Category: Fire-Lite

firealarmresources.com

GENERAL System Sensor 1400 ionization smoke detector re- quickly to both fast flaming and slow smoldering as required by UL 268. The unipolar dual chamber has the sensitivity needed to quickly detect smoke, the stability needed to avoid false alarms. Detects both visible and invisible smoke. Used with UL listed control panels. Unipolar ionization sensing chamber: Provides exceptional stability. Factory preset 1.9% nominal sensitivity. Stable operation in air velocities up to 1,200 feet-per- (7.6 meters per second). Removable cover for field cleaning. Visible LED (cid:147)blinks(cid:148) in standby. Sealed against dirt, insects and back pressure. Three-year limited warranty. 8.5 – 35 VDC operating range. Field metering of detector sensitivity. Built-in test switch. Low standby current. Built-in tamper-resistant feature. Direct surface or electrical box mounting. Remote LED option. Insect-resistant screening (maximum to 0.020″/0.508 openings). SEMS screws for easy wiring. to contribute to life safety, fire protection, and property Superior to photoelectric detectors in de- fast-flaming fires. Superior to bipolar detectors in false alarms. AND OPERATION 1400 Series ionization smoke detectors contain a dual source, dual unipolar chamber detection de- which will sense the presence of smoke particles by fast combustion as well as slow smoldering Additional key features include a blinking LED status indicator, an easily visible alarm indica- and provision for convenient field test and metering. back of the detector is sealed to block back pressure flow. The chamber is protected by a fine mesh (0.020″/ mm) screen to minimize problems with dust, dirt, 19, 1998 Ionization Smoke Detector Conventional Initiating Devices Vol. III Fire insects. If cleaning is required, the cover is easily (with a special tool), providing access to the and chamber to perform a thorough cleaning. 1400 detectors are intended for use with Fire(cid:149)Lite listed control panels. Maximum number of detectors zone depends on capacity of panel (see Fire(cid:149)Lite De- Compatibility Document #15384). Easy to install and this detector is designed for direct surface (mounting bracket included), or mounting to a octagonal or smaller box.* Easy-to-wire screw termi- allow fast and simple field wiring of in, out, and re- annunciator connections. The wiring diagram (page shows the correct method for wiring Model 1400 detec- prevent wiring mistakes, observe polarities and make that each conductor is identified. A copy of the and maintenance instructions is packaged with detector. For further information, refer to NFPA 72 on Automatic Fire Detectors,(cid:148) and to local Au- Having Jurisdiction. For Canadian applications, always use a mounting elec- box. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 2 SPECIFICATIONS detector shall be an ionization type (Model 1400) manufactured by System Sensor. Wiring connections be made by means of SEMS screws. Detector will a visible LED which will blink in standby and latch on alarm. The detector shall have a sensitivity of 1.9 as measured in the UL smoke box. The detector and cover should be easily removable for clean- It shall be possible to perform a sensitivity and func- test on

July 14, 1998 and 1424 Ionization Smoke Detectors Conventional Initiating Devices Fire 1424A) Fire Marshal NO. 1925 System Sensor 1400 Series direct-wire ionization detectors respond quickly to fast flaming fires as by UL 268 (a photoelectric smoke detector is faster detecting slow smoldering fires). The unipolar dual- sensor has the sensitivity needed to quickly de- smoke, and the stability needed to avoid false alarms. Detects both visible and invisible smoke. Used with UL listed control panels. Unipolar ionization sensing chamber: Provides exceptional stability. Factory-preset 1.9% nominal sensitivity. Stable operation in air velocities up to 1,200 feet-per- (7.6 meters per second). Removable cover for field cleaning. Visible LED (cid:147)blinks(cid:148) in standby, latches in alarm. Sealed against dirt, insects and back pressure. Three-year limited warranty. Field-metering of detector sensitivity (using MOD400R). Built-in test switch. Low standby current. Built-in tamper-resistant feature. Direct surface or electrical box mounting. Remote LED option (using RA400Z). Insect-resistant screening (0.020″/0.508 mm openings). SEMS screws for easy wiring. for protection of life and property. Superior to photo- detectors in detecting fast-flaming fires. Superior bipolar detectors in avoiding false alarms. AND OPERATION 400 Series ionization smoke detectors contain a unique source, dual unipolar chamber detection design which sense the presence of smoke particles produced by combustion as well as slow smoldering fires. Addi- key features include a blinking LED standby status an easily visible alarm indication and provision convenient field test and metering. back of the detector is sealed to block back pressure flow. The chamber is protected by a fine mesh (0.020″/ mm) screen to minimize problems with dust, dirt, and If cleaning is required, it is easy to remove the (with tool CRT-400) and obtain access to the screen chamber to perform a thorough cleaning. 1412/1424 detectors are intended for use with UL-listed control panels. Easy to install and main- this detector is designed for direct surface mounting bracket included), or mounting to a 4″ (101.6 octagonal or smaller box. Easy-to-wire screw termi- allow fast and simple field wiring of in, out, and remote connections. Fire(cid:149)Lite control panel specifications for the maxi- allowable loop resistance for the particular four-wire panel to be used. Installation and maintenance in- are packaged with each detector. prevent wiring mistakes, observe polarities and make that each conductor is identifiable. For further in- refer to NFPA 72, and to local Authority Having document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 2 LINE INFORMATION smoke detector, 12 VDC, direct- four-wire. smoke detector, 24 VDC, direct- four-wire. End-of-line relay module, 12 or 24 VDC. Annunciator (LED). Field test module for all of the System Sen- 400 Series smoke detectors. Tool. four-wire ionization. voltage: 1412 @ 12 VDC; 1424 @ 24 VDC. current consumption (maximum): 100 (cid:181)A. current consumption (maximum): 77 mA for 1412; mA for 1424. voltage range: 11.3 to 17.3 VDC for 1412; 20 29 VDC for 1424. LED l

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

firealarmresources.com

100 Series Plug-In Photoelectric Detectors Series Plug-in Smoke Detectors offer superb performance reliability in a profile which is just 2 (5.1 cm) deep. Model (photoelectric sensor) and model 2151T (photoelectric with thermal) can be used with a variety of different bases in several wiring configurations and voltages. features include: low current draw, stable performance in air velocities, built-in tamper resistant base design, LED option, removable cover, and built-in test switch. 100 Series is designed to meet the performance criteria by UL. Its sensing chambers are sealed against pressure air flow, dirt, and insects. This chamber is pro- by a fine mesh screen which can be cleaned or Additional key features include a variety of mounting and a full line of accessories. 100 Series photoelectric smoke detectors contain a unique sensing chamber designed to sense smoke particles by a wide range of combustion sources. A custom circuit incorporates signal processing to reduce alarms. 2151(A) photoelectric detector unique optical sensing is engineered to sense smoke by a wide range of sources. Dual electronic thermistors add 135 temperature thermal sensing on model 2151T. Voltage/Alarm Current: See Adapter Base Selec- Guide (see page 2). Current: 120 Standby. 1 – 3.18%/ft. 2.0 in B401. 4.1 installed in B401; 6.2 installed in B110LP. Weight: 5.2 oz. Flame retardant thermoplastic. Photo: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 Photo/Thermal: 32 to 100 (0 to 38 Listed Velocity Range: Photo: 0 fpm (0 m/s). Range: 10% RH non-condensing. Detector Spacing: On smooth ceilings (as defined in 72), spacing of 30 feet (900 sq. ft.) may be used as a Other spacing may be used depending on ceiling high air movements, and other conditions or response Listings and Approvals listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in document. In some cases, certain modules or applications F-500 Initiating Devices not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. UL Listed: S911. ULC Listed: CS308. CSFM: 7272-1653:0122. FM Approved. MEA Approved: 205-94-E. Maryland State Fire Marshal: #2180. Line Information Low-profile photoelectric detector. Must be mounted one of the B100 Series or B400 Series bases listed in the Base Selection Guide. Low-profile photoelectric detector with thermal. Must mounted to one of the B100 Series or B400 Series bases in the Adapter Base Selection Guide. Retrofit replacement flange for B400 Series flanged Remote annunciator for 2 or 4 wire systems, 3-32V. standard single gang electrical box. Hand-held sensitivity reader. Surface mounting kit provides for entry of surface conduit. For use with B401 or B401R mounting bases End of line relay for power supervision, 12/24 VDC Test magnet. Test magnet with 32 telescoping handle. Detector removal tool. Allows installation and/or of 100 Series detector heads from base in high ceiling when used with XP-4. Extension pole for XR2B. Comes in three 5 ft. sections. Replacement dust cover for 100 Series smoke Recessed mounting kit (B401 sold separately). 5/14/2012 Page 1 of 2 Type Draw on (mA) A & C A & C + A Supervisory C VDC VDC VDC VAC VDC VDC mA AC maximum Base Selection Guide Model Number Functionality contingent on panel compatibility. Must be limited by control p

June 22, 1998 and 2424 Photoelectric Smoke Detectors Optional Horn & Thermal Sensors Conventional Initiating Devices Vol. III 2424, 2424AIT, 2424TH) Fire 2424AT) 2412THB, 2424TH) System Sensor 2400 Series photoelectric detector is designed to meet the stringent performance re- of industrial and municipal fire detection and systems. The design of these detectors emphasizes of installation and field maintenance. 12 or 24 VDC operation Unique optical sensing chamber: Superior signal-to-noise ratio. Built-in signal processing. 3.0% nominal sensitivity. Removable cover for field cleaning. Visible LED (cid:147)blinks(cid:148) in standby, latches on in alarm. Sealed against dirt, insects, and back pressure. Optional built-in 135(cid:176)F (57(cid:176)C) thermal. Three-year limited warranty. Field metering of detector sensitivity. Built-in test capability. Low standby current. Twist-on mounting bracket with tamper option. Designed for direct surface or electrical box mounting. Models available with built-in 85 dBA piezoelectric horn. Insect-resistant screening with 0.020″ (0.508 mm) open- Isolated or integrated operation of thermal available (cer- models). SEMS screws for easy wiring. Meets performance criteria designated by UL 268. Built to withstand air velocities up to 3,000 feet (914.4 per minute without triggering a false alarm. to contribute to life safety, fire protection, and property Photoelectric detectors are recommended areas where smoldering fires are likely to ignite. In ar- where small combustion particles are usually present forklift trucks, cooking stoves, etc., they are less likely ionization detectors to produce false alarms. further information, see System Sensor manual I56- (cid:147)Applications Manual for System Smoke Detectors,(cid:148) provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. AND OPERATION 2400 Series photoelectric smoke detectors contain a optical sensing chamber designed to sense the of smoke particles produced by a wide range of sources. A custom integrated circuit incorpo- signal processing to reduce false alarms and sample/ circuitry to provide easy field metering of sensitivity. optional built-in piezo horn produces an interrupted 85 tone at 10 feet (3.048 m). The horn operates upon reversal of the supply voltage, when the unit senses or when the thermal reaches its alarm point (inte- thermal models only). document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 3 to install and maintain, these detectors are designed direct surface mounting (mounting bracket included), mounting to a 4″ (101.6 mm) octagon or smaller box. screw terminals allow fast and simple field of in, out, and remote annunciator connections. control panel specifications for the maximum al- loop resistance for the particular control panel to used. prevent wiring mistakes, observe polarities and make that each conductor is identified. Installation and instructions are packaged with each detec- For further information, refer to NFPA 72 Standards the local authority having jurisdiction. detectors are designed to seal the sensing cham- from back pressure air flow, dust, dirt, and insects. The of each detector is sealed. The chamber is protected a fine mesh (0.020″/0.508 mm) screen. Insta

Fire-Lite Place CT 06472 (203) 484-7161 (203) 484-7118 Evacuation Control Panel (cid:5)(cid:1)(cid:7)(cid:4)(cid:8)(cid:7)(cid:9)(cid:3)(cid:2)(cid:10) (cid:4)(cid:2)(cid:10)(cid:9)(cid:11)(cid:2)(cid:12) (cid:17) (cid:10) (cid:4) (cid:17) (cid:6) (cid:7) (cid:19)(cid:17) (cid:11) (cid:4) (cid:17)(cid:1) (cid:7) (cid:21) (cid:4) (cid:12) (cid:22) (cid:2) (cid:3) (cid:2) (cid:3) (cid:4) (cid:5) (cid:6) (cid:7) (cid:9) (cid:6) (cid:7) (cid:10) (cid:11) (cid:7) (cid:7) (cid:8) (cid:8) (cid:17) (cid:18) (cid:7) (cid:6) (cid:17) (cid:23) (cid:5) (cid:17) (cid:11) (cid:24) (cid:7) (cid:8) (cid:8) (cid:17) (cid:18) (cid:7) (cid:3) (cid:19) (cid:7) (cid:2) (cid:2) (cid:9)(cid:20) (cid:7) (cid:21)(cid:20) (cid:3) (cid:13) (cid:10) (cid:22) (cid:9) (cid:11) (cid:2)(cid:3) (cid:12) (cid:16) (cid:3) (cid:10) (cid:7) (cid:2) (cid:3) (cid:4) (cid:5) (cid:6) (cid:7) (cid:3) (cid:13) (cid:7) (cid:2) (cid:10) (cid:3) (cid:10) (cid:7) (cid:18) (cid:7) (cid:10) (cid:7) (cid:2) (cid:17)(cid:1) (cid:3) (cid:2) (cid:2) (cid:3) (cid:4) (cid:5) (cid:6) (cid:7) (cid:23) (cid:8) (cid:1) (cid:7) (cid:15) (cid:2) (cid:3) (cid:4) (cid:5) (cid:6) (cid:7) (cid:7) (cid:8) (cid:8) (cid:17) (cid:18) (cid:7) (cid:18) (cid:7) (cid:10) (cid:7) (cid:2) (cid:17)(cid:1) (cid:3) (cid:2) (cid:2) (cid:3) (cid:4) (cid:5) (cid:6) (cid:7) (cid:6) (cid:17) (cid:2) (cid:15) and Operating Manual #50580 Rev. 50580:D ECN 98-402 1998 Fire Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not t

FIRE Evacuation Control Panel and Operating Manual Clintonville Road Northford, CT 06472 (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 #50580 Rev. 50580:C ECN 97-303 1997 Fire Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F and a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. However, the life of the system standby batteries and the electronic components may adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O F. that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance rates it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke also may not sense a fire on another level or

FIRE Evacuation Control Panel and Operating Manual Clintonville Road Northford, CT 06472 (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 #50580 Rev. 50580:C ECN 97-303 1997 Fire Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F and a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. However, the life of the system standby batteries and the electronic components may adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O F. that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance rates it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke also may not sense a fire on another level or

30-3003 Smoke Detector Pyrotector Model 30-3003 Explosion Proof Smoke Detec- is a sensitive yet rugged protection device that is designed use in hazardous industrial and commercial locations. The is designed to operate effectively with both slow smol- and fast burning fires. Rugged construction. Self checking and compensating circuitry maintains desired Heightened sensitivity triggered when smoke is increasing, has not yet reached the preset sensitivity setting. Form A (SPST) N.O. contacts for connection to alarm out- circuitry. SPST N.C. contacts for supervision of input power. 2.3% fixed sensitivity. Combustible storage facilities. Munitions manufacturing. Volatile chemical storage. Chemical processing plants. Petroleum refineries. Turbine enclosures. & Operation photoelectric smoke detector uses a solid-state infrared- diode (IRED) and a light-sensing photovoltaic cell in a labyrinth assembly. The labyrinth permits free to smoke but restricts external light. Because of its function to the operation of the detector, each IRED is with extreme care and is subjected to rigorous pre- testing to ensure long-term reliability and perfor- normal operation (no smoke), the detector samples the approximately every four seconds for a period of less than millisecond. The photovoltaic smoke cell, which is placed an angle to the pulsed invisible light source, is sensitive to infrared light in the specified frequency emitted by the light source and is designed to receive a signal only the pulsed IRED source is activated. See Sec- of Sensing Chamber Assembly at top of opposite column. smoke enters the chamber, the light from the IRED off the smoke particles and reaches the photovoltaic cell. When the amount of light reflected by smoke the factory-set threshold level, the smoke alarm circuit actuated. detector will respond to a slow smoldering fire when in the chamber reaches the preset sensitivity setting, 2.3%. a fast-burning fire should occur, including fires in flammable and other materials such as plastics that generate black the abnormally rapid movement of smoke into the chamber is sensed by a special rate-compensating F-920 Initiating Devices Section of Sensing Chamber Assembly An increase in smoke within the detection chamber exceeds a preset rate causes the rate-compensation cir- to increase the intensity of the light source, which detector sensitivity. If the smoke continues to build this rate, an amplifier circuit is triggered and the unit gener- an alarm. If not, the detector reverts to normal sensitivity. normally smoky atmospheres, the detector will not go into as long as the concentration is less than the fixed sensi- of the detector. This results in a sensitive and positive with a very low potential for unwanted alarms. main enclosure of the detector contains the electronic cir- alarm relay, and supervision relay. Operation. To ensure reliable operation, the Model is equipped with self-checking circuitry. A regulation which is matched to the smoke detection circuit, monitors the output intensity of the IRED and it as necessary to compensate for an accumulation of or other contaminants, or any other variation that can with temperature and time. A power supervision relay in detector provides a trouble output signal in the event of an power failure. detector uses extensive filtering against RF and transient In addition, there is a two-second time delay an alarm is generated. printed circuit board inside the detector is coated to mini- the possibility of problems caused by moisture accumula- Outputs. The detector provides a set of Form A N.O. contacts for connection to the alarm output cir- and a set of SPST N.C. contacts for supervision of input An auxilliary set of Form C (SPDT) NO/NC alarm relay is also provided for controlling remote annunication 03/21/2012

30-3013 Smoke Detector 30-3013 Explosion Proof Smoke Detector has Division Zone explosion-proof ratings and is suitable for industrial commercial applications. The detector is designed to effectively with smoldering and rapidly growing fires contains the ability to annunciate fault ensuring no undis- failures. The 30-3013 Smoke Detector outputs include mA, a localized LED, and relays. Zone approved Trouble-free photoelectric operation 0-20 mA output for DCS integration Self-checking circuitry ensures reliable smoke detection Alarm, Auxiliary and Fault relays for controlling annunciat- devices or fire panel interface LED provides a visual indication that an alarm has occurred ingress protection level suitable for onshore or off- requirements suited for classified areas in the petrochemical, oil gas industry DCS, PLC, integration with milliamp or relay outputs Rugged design for environmental extremes Visual confirmation of detector alarm Detects smoldering fires No undisclosed failures Combustible storage facilities Munitions manufacturing Volatile chemical storage Chemical processing plants Petroleum refineries Turbine enclosures Battery rooms HVAC applications hot-swappable sensor module is intrinsically safe and live maintenance while under power, without de-classi- the hazardous area. The integrated junction box is avail- in a variety of port configurations for simplified wiring and Approved Class 1 Div 1 Groups B, C. D T4 Class 1 Div 2 Groups A, B, C, D, T4 Class 1 Zone1 AWX db ia llC T4 Gb FMG 15.0014X Ex db ia llC T4 Gb F-920 Initiating Devices Mount Mount celing.jpg Consumption 3.5 watts maximum (2.75 watts at 24 Relays Smoke alarm relay, Form C, 5 amperes at 30 VDC. The alarm relay has normally open/normally closed con- and normally de-energized operation. Fault relay, Form A, 5 amperes at 30 VDC.The fault relay normally open contacts and normally energized opera- Auxiliary relay, Form C, 5 amperes at 30 VDC. The auxiliary has normally open/normally closed contacts and nor- de-energized operation. Range Operating: to 65 ( to 149 Storage: to 70 ( to 158 Range 5 to 95% relative humidity. Protection IP44 (Applicable to ceiling mount only). Output 0-20 mA ( mA) DC current, with maxi- loop resistance of 300 ohms from 12-17.9 VDC, 500 from 18 to 19.9 VDC, and 600 ohms from 20-30 VDC. UL/CSA rated for 14-18 AWG or 2.5-0.75 mm2 Options 3/4 inch NPT or M25. Multi-port models avail- Material Polycarbonate / ABS – Smoke Detector. aluminum (painted) – Junction Box. Weight (Approximate) 7.85 lbs (3.56 kg). Period 1 year. 5/10/16 Page 1 of 2 Alarms is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use this document is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. specifications are subject to change without notice. more information, contact Fire Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. in the U.S. A. 2 of 2 DF-60908:A 5/10/16

302 Series Heat Detectors Thermotech 302 Series rate-anticipation heat detectors within a controlled range of two to three degrees of set points, regardless of the speed or rate of temperature These detectors are available in either 135 (57.2 or (90 ratings. 302 Series are normally-open devices designed espe- for fire detection and alarm systems. response. The 302 Series activate whenever air temperature reaches a detector setting, elimi- the thermal time lag inherent in conventional heat Eliminates false alarms. The 302 Series do not respond momentary temperature fluctuations below the selected Universal application. The 302 Series can be used in all for any type of occupancy. Self-restoring. Hermetically sealed. Shock resistant, corrosion resistant, tamper-proof. Of Operation 302 Series rate-anticipation heat detectors respond and the fire alarm immediately whenever the ambient tem- reaches the preset temperature setting. Under rapid rise conditions, the rate-anticipation feature enables the to respond one to three degrees ahead of the setting. the same time, however, it does not respond to momentary fluctuations below the selected protection level, eliminating false alarms. When temperature drops back below the protection level, the detector automatically itself. (Model 302) overall length: 4-1/8″ (10.48 cm). diameter: 2″ (5.08 cm). Ratings amps – 125 VDC amp – 25 VDC VDC amp Information Series detector have a smooth ceiling UL rating of 50 x (15.24 x 15.24 meters) and are the only type of heat detec- having such a rating on both fixed temperature and rate F-850 Initiating Devices Listings and Approvals listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in document. In some cases, certain modules or applications not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. UL Listed: S539 (302-AW-135/-194; 302-ET-135/-194; FM Approved: 302-ET-135/-194; CSFM: 7270-0021:001 View 02/03/09 Page 1 of 2 Model 302 Series Rate-Anticipation Heat Detectors Number Interior Vertical Mounting Interior Vertical Mounting All-Weather Vertical Mounting All-Weather Vertical Mounting All-Weather Vertical Mounting All-Weather Vertical Mounting Explosion Proof Mounting Explosion Proof Mounting white plastic adaptor plate for mounting 302 and 302-AW to 4 outlet box. To 1 below 2 below 3 below 4 below 1: For interior mounting in any atmosphere that is compatible with terminal-screw-type connections. UL rating 50 x 50 (15.24 x meters). 2: Hermetically sealed for moisture-proof or dust-proof installations. Requires no special backbox when the all-weather leads are spliced to or equivalent type wire. 3: Hermetically sealed for moisture-proof or dust-proof installations. Requires no special backbox. Has plastic hexagonal wrench bushing with 1/2 (1.27 cm) conduit threads for attachment to threaded hub cover, or any outlet box. 4: Explosion-proof for installation in hazardous locations. Has hexagonal wrench-grip bushing with 1/2 (1.27 cm) conduit threads attachment to threaded hub cover of Series JL fixture fitting as manufactured by Killark Electric Co., or equal. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use this document is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. specifications are subject to change without notice. more information, contact Fire Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. in the U.S.

411 Alarm Communicator Transmitter Central Station Monitoring of Fire and Nonfire Systems (cid:23)(cid:20)(cid:20) Programming, Troubleshooting Operating Instruction Manual Fire-Lite Place CT 06472 (203) 484-7161 (203) 484-7118 #50921 Rev. 50921:B ECN 98-469 1998 Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons

411 Series Digital Alarm Transmitters Fire 411 Series DACTs are compact, multifaceted, Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitters designed for a of fire, security, and non-fire applications. The series the 411 and 411UD, which provide three and four channels (inputs) respectively. These slave DACTs a solution for applications that require an existing (or new) alarm control panel (FACP) to transmit system status to an monitoring facility for Central or Remote Station compli- Due to extremely flexible programming options, the 411 slave DACTs are also ideal for monitoring non-fire and control panels. With fifteen selectable transmission (including ADEMCO Contact ID) compatibility with vir- all Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR) is Programming can be accomplished on-site with a programmer (PRO-411), or remotely (411UD only) the PK-411UD programming utility. This Windows remote upload/download software package permits sys- interrogation and revision from a remote site. Three (411) or four (411UD) monitoring channels (inputs) may be individually programmed to monitor the host panel for: Fire Alarm Fire Trouble Fire Supervisory Process Monitoring AC Power Loss Security Alarm Other (Fire and Non-Fire Events) Trigger inputs require a contact closure for activation 12- or 24-VDC operation, jumper-selectable UL recognized, prevention Dual-line, rotary or touch-tone-dial DACT interfaces to pub- switched telephone network (leased phone lines are not 15 reporting Contact ID format popular Capable of transmitting the following DACT information, in to vital system status of the host control panel: DACT troubles Telephone line 1 and 2 voltage fault Primary or Secondary Central Station communication System off-normal 24-hour normal test 24-hour abnormal test Long-distance Carrier Access Code (CAC) compliant, up to 20-digit Central Station telephone numbers Fully programmable transmittal codes for fire, security, pro- monitoring, and others Field-programmable with PRO-411 hand-held programmer A3-625 Programmable from remote site with optional PK-411UD software (model 411UD only) View 411 Series status off-site in real time, with optional programming software, without ever compromis- monitoring protection at the protected premises (model only) piezo sounder with local silence switch One Form-C relay, fully programmable Complies with NFPA 72 (Central Station and Remote Sta- [DACT only – not polarity reversal] Fire Alarm Systems) Extremely compact enclosure, measuring only 6.841″ cm) W x 4.595″ (11.671 cm) H x 1.0″ (2.54 cm) D Panel Compatibility panels must include AC Fail Delay option to meet NFPA Station Requirements. Panels with this feature include MRP-2002, MS-2, and MS-4. 411 Series DACTs are fully enclosed in a compact hous- measuring only 6.841″ (17.376 cm) W x 4.595″ (11.671 H x 1.0″ (2.54 cm) D. The housing enclosure consists of aluminum backbox painted red with a matching cover by two captive screws. The overlay includes large to independently mark programming options for the or four channels (inputs), relay, and also includes printed and diagnostic LED designations. Line Connections modular phone connections on the 411 Series are acces- with the cover in place and provide connections for two telephone lines using standard RJ31X or RJ38X Both telephone lines are constantly supervised for operation and integrity. If one phone line goes into fault the other is working, a report is sent to the central or station. LEDs Communication Fail (visible with front cover in place). DACT Trouble (visible with front cover in place) (411UD). 3/19/2015 Page 1 of 4

February 6, 2006 A3-050 Alarm Communicator Alarm Communicator Alarm Communicator Alarm Communicator Alarm Communicator Control/Communicators Fire Vol. VI Fire-Watch 411UDAC from Fire is a compact, stand-alone or slave Fire Alarm Communica- designed for a variety of fire and non-fire applications. provides four channels (inputs) that accept waterflow de- two- and four-wire smoke detectors, pull stations, other normally-open contact devices. The 411UDAC a cost-effective solution for applications that require an (or new) Fire Alarm Control or Security Panel to system status to an off-site monitoring facility for or Remote Station compliance. Due to its extremely programming options, the 411UDAC is also ideal use as a stand-alone unit to monitor: sprinkler systems waterflow and supervisory conditions; processes (i.e., level, gas detection, loss of air flow); and normally- contact devices. With fifteen selectable transmission including Ademco Contact ID, compatibility with all Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers (DACR) ensured. Programming can be accomplished on-site with hand-held programmer (PRO-411), or remotely utilizing optional PK-411UD Windows remote upload/ software package (order PK-CD). The PK-411UD software also permits system interroga- and revision from a remote site. Four supervised monitoring channels (inputs): three fixed B (Class B) and one Style A (Class A) or Style B B). Inputs may be individually programmed for stand- applications, or when monitoring a host con- panel, for: Two- and four-wire smoke detectors (Inputs 1 and 3). Pull station. Normally-Open contacts. Host panel trouble (slave mode). Supervisory. Supervisory (autoresettable). Waterflow (silenceable). Waterflow (non-silenceable). Process monitoring. Process monitoring (autoresettable). One Style Y (Class B) Notification Appliance (bell) Cir- 1.0 Amp notification appliance power. Coded (temporal) notification appliance (bell, signal) cir- (NAC). 12 VDC operation. Capable of 60 hours of standby. Seven individual LEDs; six visible through door: AC Power. System Trouble. System Alarm. Supervisory. Communication Fail. Battery Trouble. Earth Fault (not visible with door closed). Dual telephone lines: Dual telephone line voltage detect. Alternating phone lines for 24-hour test messages Industry-first, UL recognized, runaway preven- feature. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change notice. For more information, contact Fire Alarms, One Fire-Lite Place, Connecticut 06472. Phone: (800) 627-3473, Toll-Free FAX: (877) 699-4105, www.firelite.com in the U.S.A. 02/06/06 Page 1 of 4 New long-distance Carrier Access Code (CAC) compli- accepting 20-digit central station and service termi- telephone numbers. Industry-first, user-selectable restoral methods. Fully programmable transmittal codes for fire and non- (e.g., process monitoring) applications. Capable of transmitting the following DACT informa- in addition to vital system status of the host panel: DACT troubles. Telephone line 1 and 2 voltage fault. Primary or Secondary Central Station communica- fault. System off-normal. 24-hour normal test. 24-hour abnormal test. Includes 15 popular communication formats, including widely used Ademco Contact ID format, ensuring with virtually all DACRs. Local piezo sounder with separate and distinct sounds various conditions. Acknowledge/System Silence and Reset switches. Alarm verification.

No text preview available.

411UD Alarm Communicator Transmitter Central Station Monitoring of Fire and Nonfire Systems Programming, Troubleshooting Operating Instruction Manual Fire-Lite Place CT 06472 (203) 484-7161 (203) 484-7118 #50759 Rev. 50759:B ECN 98-469 1998 Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke also may no

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

411UDAC Rev 2 Alarm Communicator Fire-Watch 411UDAC Rev 2 is a compact, multifaceted, or slave Fire Alarm Communicator designed for a of fire and non-fire applications. It provides four chan- (inputs) that accept waterflow devices, two-wire and four- smoke detectors, pull stations, and other normally-open devices. The 411UDAC is a cost-effective solution for that require an existing (or new) Fire Alarm Con- or Security Panel to transmit system status to an off-site facility for Central or Remote Station compliance. to its extremely flexible programming options, the is also ideal for use as a stand-alone unit to monitor: systems for waterflow and supervisory conditions; (i.e., water level, gas detection, loss of air flow); and contact devices. With fifteen selectable trans- formats, including Ademco Contact ID, compatibility virtually all Digital Alarm Communicator Receivers is ensured. Programming can be accomplished on- with a hand-held programmer (PRO-411), or remotely uti- optional PK-411UD Windows remote software package. The PK-411UD upload/ software also permits system interrogation and revi- from a remote site. The PK-411UD is part of the PK-CD Four supervised monitoring channels (inputs). Three fixed Style B (Class B) and one Style A (Class A) or B (Class B). may be individually programmed for stand-alone or when monitoring a host control panel, for: Two-wire or four-wire smoke detectors (Inputs 1 and 3). Pull station. Normally-Open contacts. Host panel trouble (slave mode). Supervisory. Supervisory (autoresettable). Waterflow (silenceable). Waterflow (non-silenceable). One Style Y (Class B) Notification Appliance (bell) Circuit (NAC). 1.0 Amp notification appliance power. Coded (temporal) notification appliance (bell, signal) circuit. 12 VDC operation. Capable of 60 hours of standby. Seven individual LEDs; six visible through door: AC Power. System Trouble. System Alarm. Supervisory. Communication Fail. Battery Trouble. Earth Fault (not visible with door closed). Dual telephone lines: Dual telephone line voltage detect. A-050 / Communicators Alternating phone lines for 24-hour test messages (pro- UL recognized, runaway prevention Long-distance Carrier Access Code (CAC) compliant, 20-digit central station and service terminal tele- numbers. user-selectable restoral methods. Fully programmable transmittal codes for fire and non-fire process monitoring) applications. Capable of transmitting the following DACT information, in to vital system status of the host control panel: DACT troubles. Telephone line 1 and 2 voltage fault. Primary or Secondary Central Station communication System off-normal. 24-hour normal test. 24-hour abnormal test. 15 popular communication formats, including the used Ademco Contact ID format, ensuring compati- with virtually all DACRs. Local piezo sounder with separate and distinct sounds for conditions. Acknowledge/System Silence and Reset switches. Alarm verification. Signal silence inhibit. 12/11/2014 Page 1 of 4 Autosilence. Trouble reminder (with 24-hour resound). Real-time clock. Two Form-C relays, fully programmable to activate for the conditions: Fire alarm. Host control panel trouble. Total communication trouble. Fire supervisory (latching). Fire supervisory (autoresettable). DACT trouble (factory default for relay). Optional PK-411UD Remote Upload/Download Kit. cabinet is red and measures 14.5″ (36.83 cm) high x (32.7 cm) wide and 4.5″ (11.43 cm) deep. It provides

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

5600 (A) Series Heat Detectors Sensor 5600 Series mechanical heat detectors offer protection against fire and for non-life-safety installa- where smoke detectors are inappropriate. configurations. The 5600 Series offers a full line of to accommodate a broad range of applications. single- and dual-circuit models are offered, each avail- for low- and high-temperature ratings with either fixed- or combination activation. The ROR element of the fixed/ROR models restorable, to accommodate field-testing the unit. flexibility. To satisfy a variety of installations, the Series easily mounts to single-gang and octagonal back- These models also accommodate 4″ (101.6 mm) backboxes when used with a plastic ring. The mounting is reversible to allow for flush- and surface-mount installations. identification. The 5600 Series provides clear mark- on the exterior of the unit to ensure that the proper detec- is being used. Alphanumeric characters identify the method, as well as the temperature rating, in Fahrenheit and Celsius. Fixed temperature models identified while combination fixed/rate-of-rise units marked The 5600 Series also provides a col- as a post-activation indicator. Once the detector has activated, the collector drops from the unit to allow easy of the specific unit in alarm. Multiple configurations available: Fixed-temperature (non-resettable) or combination fixed (self-restoring). Low-temperature and high-temperature ratings. Single-circuit and dual-circuit. Easy-to-read alphanumeric identification of detector type temperature rating. External collector provides visual indication of activation. Reversible mounting bracket for flush- and surface-mount Flexible mounting capabilities: single-gang, 3.5″ or 4″ octag- 4″ (101.6 mm) square with plastic ring. LISTINGS AND APPROVALS listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in document. In some cases, certain modules or applications not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. UL Listed: S2101 ULC Listed: S2101 (Add suffix for Canadian part num- except 5601P) MEA: 199-03-E CSFM: 7270-1209:227, 7270-1653:167 FM Approved Initiating Devices SPECIFICATIONS installation temperature: models 5601, 5601P, 5603, 5621, 5623: 100 (38 for A models 5602, 5604, 5622, 5624: 150 (65.6 for A suf- temperature: models 5601, 5601P, 5603, 5621, 5623: 135 (57 models 5602, 5604, 5622, 5624: 194 (90 Threshold: 15 (8.3 per minute (models 5601P, 5602, 5621, 5622 only). Humidity Range: 5% to 95% RH noncondensing. Terminals: non-polarized, accept 14 to 22 AWG (2.0 to mm diameter with mounting bracket: 4.57″ (116 mm); with mounting bracket: 1.69″ (43 mm). 6 oz. (170 grams). Options: 3.5″ (88.9 mm) octagonal backbox; 4″ mm) octagonal backbox; single-gang backbox; 4″ mm) square backbox with a square-to-round plaster – 125 VAC – 28 VDC VDC VDC A A A A heat detector shall be a System Sensor 5600 model number ______, Listed to Underwriters Labora- UL 521 for Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling The detector shall be either a single-circuit or a dual- type, normally open. The detector shall be rated for acti- at either 135 (57 or 194 (90 and shall acti- by means of a fixed-temperature thermal sensor, or a sensor. rate-of-rise element shall be activated by a rapid rise in 08/27/14 Page 1 of 2 Easy-to-use terminal screws provide a more positive wiring SPECIFICATIONS Low-profile design to coordinate with room aesthetics. Voltage Ratings (re

June 13, 1997 Beam Smoke Detector Conventional Initiating Devices Fire Sensor(cid:146)s unique LED alignment technique as- the fast and easy setup. No special meters or tools are necessary. Four LEDs on the front of receiver provide all the help needed to lock transmitter receiver together for maximum signal strength and built-in automatic gain control compensates for the grad- deterioration of signal strength from dust accumula- component aging and temperature fluctuations. The and transmitter can be powered separately or for maximum flexibility in installation. Sensitivity at 30% or 55% Total Obscuration. There is a choice of test filters to allow convenient checking of sensitivity under varying conditions. Operating range is -22(cid:176)F to 131(cid:176)F (-30(cid:176)C to 55(cid:176)C). For information, see (cid:147)Guide for Proper Use of Beam Detectors,(cid:148) document I56-506-00. LINE INFORMATION Beam Smoke Detector. Test Station. Annunciator. Relay, 24 VDC. System Sensor Model 6424 Beam Detector is ideal meet the unique fire protection challenge of atriums and open areas with high ceilings. System Sensor Model 6424 Beam Detector is de- for four-wire, 24 VDC applications. stylish, two-component infrared detector consists of a transmitter and receiver. Together they can a linear distance from 30 to 330 Multiple units between 30 and 60 feet apart can be used to larger areas. If 95% or more of the beam is blocked, trouble condition is signaled. This blockage must be before the unit can reset itself and return to Unique LED alignment technique makes setup fast and Four LEDs on the front of the receiver provide positive indication of maximum signal strength. No special meters or alignment tools are necessary. Receiver and transmitter can be powered separately or Detects a broad range of fires. Ceiling and wall mount brackets included. Calibrated test filters included. Form A (Alarm) and B (Trouble) contacts. Remote test station option. Three-year warranty. System Sensor Model 6424 Beam Detector is particu- well suited for use in atriums, ballrooms, churches, museums, factories, and other large or high- areas where conventional smoke detectors cannot easily installed. & OPERATION two-component System Sensor Model 6424 detector of a separate infrared transmitter and receiver. units mount on opposite walls or on the ceiling across each other and are designed to detect any smoke in linear distance from 30 to 330 Since both absorption scattering of the beam(cid:146)s infrared light is detected as a in signal, the System Sensor Model 6424 works on both smoldering and fast-flaming fires. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 4 30 to 330 (length). detector spacing: On smooth ceilings, 60 be- projected beams and not more than one-half that between a projected beam and a sidewall. Other may be used depending on ceiling height, airflow and response requirements. See NFPA A-5-3.5.5.2. 30% 5% total obscuration OR 55% 5% obscuration. condition (Trouble): 95% or more obscuration; gain control limit; improper initial a

6.x firmware panels must use V7.0 PS Tools for proper functionality. to performing a firmware updates it is MANDATORY that you upload the program PS Tools before performing any updates; especially the MS-9200UDLS 5.x to 6.x, the MS-9600LS 4.x to 6.x. procedure should be as follows: Update the PS Tools to version 7.x Upload the panel. (This way in the event that the program is corrupted by the update will have a copy that is compatible with PST 7.x to download into the updated panel requires 7.x.) Update the firmware as normal using PPU Wizard 3.4.1 the panel reboots and returns a CALC FAULT a RESET of the panel should it. the 9200UDLS62B1.zip

No text preview available.

C-90 Voice Evacuation Command Center-25/50 Control Panel ACC-25/50 (ACC-25/50) is a state-of-the-art, single- or (25 watts each) Emergency Voice Evacuation Con- Panel (EVAC). The ACC-25/50 records five field-program- messages (up to 60 seconds total message duration) an integral commercial-grade emergency communica- microphone or from an external audio source. Significant enhancements set the ACC-25/50 apart from EVAC panels these include full supervision in both (alarm or music) and standby conditions, supervision of outputs, field wiring, message generator, all tone and the microphone. The integral power supply up to 18 AH batteries, which can be housed in the cabinet. ACC-25/50 is suitable for use as an adjunct (slave or to most UL-Listed Fire Alarm Control Panels An optional 25 watt, 25 VRMS audio amplifier is for system expansion to 50 watts (providing dual 25- speaker circuits) or as a secondary amplifier in jurisdic- requiring backup. A 70.7 VRMS converter is also avail- for independently converting amplifiers to meet retrofit host of field-programming options, including the capability of custom messages (fire, tornado, evacuation, hazmat, non- multi-language, etc.) make the ACC-25/50 the most versa- voice evacuation system available. Applications include schools, auditoriums, dormito- theatres, restaurants, places of worship, lodging, office and factories. Features Listed to UL Standard 864, 9th edition. 25 watt, 25 VRMS audio amplifier with single Style (Class A) or Style Y (Class B) speaker circuit (expandable 50 watts using the ACC-AAM25). Modular design for maximum system flexibility and ease of Five Command Input Circuits (CMD) are available for acti- by an FACP. Two command input circuits can be independently field-pro- for activation by a Notification Appliance Circuit or contact closure. Three command input circuits activate on contact closure. Manual deactivation of speaker zones. Command inputs allow: One 60-second message. Two messages. Three 20-second messages. 15-second messages. Five 12-second messages. Microphone time-out feature. Nineteen different system and diagnostic LEDs. Two Form-C trouble relays (System & AC Power Loss). Optional equipment: second amplifier; playback and remote microphone. digital message generator with standard, factory emergency evacuation message. Custom messages are field recordable, using the integral or the audio input jack. Digital message may be field-selected for 3, 4, 6, 8, or infi- repeat. Built-in alert tone generators with steady, slow whoop, high/ or chime tone capability. Field-selectable lead-in/trailing tone selection. Alert tone selection may be field-programmed to conform ANSI S3.41 Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal Pattern), per NFPA. Speaker zone control via CMD inputs or keypad. Dual-optically-isolated, trigger input circuits are indepen- field-programmable for activation by polarity reversal FACP NAC) or dry-contact closure. Zone 1 switch-programmable for All-Call operation. diagnostic LEDs include: Power, System Trouble, Trouble, Message Generator Trouble, Tone Trouble, Amplifier Fault, and others. Form-C trouble relay allows FACP to monitor system while in active (alarm) state. piezo provides local audible indication for troubles. Fully supervised in Standby and Active states, including microphone, amplifier output, message generator, wiring, and tone generators. amplifier supervision: current limit, audio level, circuit protection. All outputs are power-limited. Auxiliary power output provides local power for addressable modules when used to activate the ACC-25/50. Compatible with all Fire

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

ACS Series ACM/AEM-32AF ACS Series provides a modular line of products for annun- and control of the Fire intelligent and legacy fire control panels. The ACS provides arrays of to indicate point status, zone status, system status, and some versions the ability to perform system reset, silence, and drill. These ACS units use a serial interface may be located at distances of up to 6,000 feet (1,828.8 from the panel. Alarm/Circuit On and Trouble LED per-point option or more Alarm-only option. Touch-pad control switch option for remote control of acknowledge, reset, and drill. LEDs may be programmed to display status of indicating or control relays as well as system status condi- System Trouble LED indicator. On-Line/Power LED indicator. Alarm and trouble resound with flash of new conditions. Local sounder for both alarm and trouble conditions with button (program options). May be powered by 24 VDC from the panel or by remote Efficient switched-power converter reduces power con- Microprocessor-controlled electronics, fully supervised. Slip-in custom labels, lettered with standard typewriter or supplies. program. Plug-in terminal blocks for ease of installation and service. ACS modules are provided in two basic controller mod- each with its expander module. The ACM-16ATF pro- 16 annunciation and control points per module, each a red, green, or yellow Alarm/Circuit On LED, a yellow LED, and a touch-key switch. The ACM-32AF provides annunciation points per module, each with a red, green, or Alarm/Circuit On LED (for annunciating control relays, LED indicates ON/OFF). ACS Series provides arrays of LEDs to indicate point sta- and, in some versions, switches to control the state of out- circuits. ACS Series annunciator and control subsystems use hardware assemblies which allow the custom configu- of the annunciator panel to fit the individual job require- backboxes and mounting hardware schemes, includ- special remote cabinets, allow the annunciators to be con- and configured with other Fire system B-250 remote annunciation applications, the modules are typi- mounted in special ABF or ABS boxes. between the ACS Series annunciators and the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) is made through an EIA- multi-drop loop, eliminating the need for costly wiring Four wires are required, two for the EIA-485 com- (twisted-shielded pair), and two for 24 VDC regu- power. of ACS Series annunciators into existing systems is accomplished. Software may require upgrading. field-wiring terminations use removable, compression-type blocks for ease of installation, wiring, and circuit test- ACS Series annunciator and control system provides the system with up to 32 remote serially connected each with a capacity of 69 points to support any FACP. or remote power supplies and serial communications the ACS to be located virtually anywhere in the protected alarm and/or trouble conditions may be annunciated a per-point basis, or in a grouped or zone configuration. of system operational controls, such as Signal Silence, Reset, and local annunciation controls (such as Local and Lamp Test) may be accomplished through membrane push-switches. Line Information The Annunciator Control Module-16ATF con- 16 red Alarm and 16 yellow Trouble LEDs, 16 momentary 8/1/2011 Page 1 of 4 The Annunciator Flush Box-2F provides for the flush of two annunciator modules. Includes a painted trim plate [11″ (27.94 cm) high x 10.625″ (26.99 cm) and adhesive-backed annunciator label. 9.938″ (25.24 high x 9.188″ (23.34 cm) wide x 3.75″ (9.525 cm) deep. (see figure) The Annunciator Flush Box-4F provides the remote mounting of one to four annunciator modules.

AD355(A) Multi-Sensor Profile Intelligent Detector AD355(A) ADAPT detector is an intelligent, address- multi-sensing, low-profile detector designed for use with Fire Alarm Control Panels. ADAPT detector uses a combination of photoelectric and sensing technologies to increase immunity to false Unlike traditional intelligent detectors, the ADAPT has a microprocessor in the detector head that pro- alarm data. As a result, the ADAPT detector adjusts its automatically, without operator intervention or con- panel programming. where the ADAPT detector is especially useful include complexes, schools, college campuses, manufacturing industrial facilities, and anywhere else the use of a partic- area may change. The ADAPT detector automatically its sensitivity to the environment. is a communication protocol developed to greatly the speed of communication between analog intelli- devices and compatible systems. Intelligent devices com- in a grouped fashion. If one of the devices within the has new information, the panel CPU stops the group and concentrates on single points. The net effect is speed greater than five times that of earlier designs. Automatically adjusts sensitivity levels without operator or programming. Sensitivity increases with Microprocessor-based, combination photo and thermal Compatible with LiteSpeed and CLIP systems. Addressable-analog communication. Sleek, low-profile design. Two-wire SLC connection. Rotary, decimal addressing: 01-159 with MS-9600UDLS MS-9600LS series systems, and 01-99 with MS- Firmware 4. Addresses can be viewed and changed without electronic Dual bi-color LED design provides 360 viewing angle. LEDs lock red when in alarm. In LiteSpeed LEDs flash in standby for normal condition. Built-in tamper-resistant feature. Constructed of off-white fire-resistant plastic, designed to standards, and offers an attractive appearance. SEMS screws for wiring of the separate base. Several base options, including relay, isolator, and sounder. Built-in functional test switch activated by external magnet. Listed to UL 268. auto-adjusting levels: 1 to 2%/ft. and 2 to 4%/ft. classic CLIP systems; 1 to 2, 2 to 3, and 3 to 4%/ft. with systems; fixed-sensitivity levels: 1, 2, and 4%/ft. E-810 Devices in B210LP(A) Base classic CLIP systems; 0.5, 1, 2, 3, and 4%/ft. with FlashS- systems. 2.0″ (5.3 cm) high; base determines diameter. B210LP(A): 6.1″ (15.5 cm) diameter. B501(A): 4.1″ (10.4 cm) diameter. B200SR(A): 6.875″ (17.46 cm) diameter. B224RB(A): 6.2″ (15.748 cm) diameter. weight: 5.2 oz. (147 g). temperature: 0 to 38 (32 to 100 velocity range: 0 4000 ft./min. (1219.2 m/min.), for installation in ducts. humidity: 10% 93% noncondensing. sensing rating: fixed-temperature setpoint 135 SPECIFICATIONS range: 15 32 volts DC peak. current (max. avg.): 300 resistance: 50 ohms maximum; varies according to panel used. Refer to panel installation manuals. current (max.): 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC ( AD355(A) plug-in detector uses a separate base to sim- installation, service, and maintenance. A special tool maintenance personnel to plug-in and remove detec- without using a ladder. Suitable mounting base boxes 4.0″ (10.16 cm) square box. 3.5″ (8.89 cm) or 4.0″ (10.16 cm) octagonal box. Single-gang box (except relay or isolator base). The AD355(A) detector has the unique ability to adjust according to the environment, based on heat and levels. Avoid installing these detectors in locations that are to rapid and high temperature changes. An example of incorrect application would be near or in line with the output of a

No text preview available.

AD365/-IV and AD365A/-IV Photo/Thermal/Infrared Description AD365/-IV and AD365A/-IV are plug-in addressable multi-crite- detectors that replace the AD355 Series. They combine photo- thermal, and infrared (PTIR) sensors in one unit to sense components of a fire. This approach enables enhanced to real fire with heightened immunity to nuisance particu- sensors and communication can greatly reduce nuisance compared to single sensing methods. Sophisticated algo- maximize the advantages of the sensor types. This detection offers heightened immunity to nuisance particulates and sensitivity to real fire. Photoelectric sensors detect airborne particles associated with Thermal sensors detect heat and rate-of-rise (135 fixed tem- threshold). The Infrared sensor discerns light patterns in the environment as additional data point for alarm determination. ability to reject certain nuisance alarm triggers, such as theater supports the use of the detector in applications where mod- to heavy nuisance conditions exist that might cause single detectors to trigger a false alarm. PTIR detector meets both UL 268 and UL 521 listing require- and can indicate distinct smoke and heat alarms. This dual supports a local alarm setting for photoelectric detection and general evacuation setting based on thermal detection. This can work interruptions in multi-level buildings. Multi-criteria detection UL 268 and UL 521 Listed New modern profile Analog communications Low standby current Rotary address switches Dual LEDs for 360 visibility Expanded color options LiteSpeed protocol support on all models; LiteSpeed and CLIP support on -IV models Height: 2.0″ (51 mm) installed in B300(A)-6 base Diameter: 6.2″ (156 mm) installed in B300(A)-6 base; 4.1″ (104 installed in B501-WHITE/-IV/-BL base Weight: 3.4 oz. (95 g) Color: White (-IV models are ivory) Operating Humidity Range: 15% to 90% Relative Humidity, Non- Operating Temperature Range: 32 to 100 (0 to 38 Air Velocity: 0 to 300 ft./min. (0 to 91.4 m/min.) SPECIFICATIONS Operating Voltage Range: 15 to 32 VDC Devices Operating Current @ 24 VDC: 200 uA (one communication every seconds with green LED blink on communication) Maximum Alarm Current: 2 mA @ 24 VDC (one communication 5 seconds with red LED solid on) Maximum Current: 4.5 mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every seconds with amber LED solid on) Load Rating: 0.0063 devices in this datasheet meet the standards of UL 268 CAN/ S529. Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the AD365/-IV and In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult the for the latest listing status. S1059 Approved 7272-0075:0507 7/15/2019 Page 1 of 2 Information suffix indicates support of LiteSpeed and CLIP. Multi-criteria photoelectric, thermal and infrared smoke LiteSpeed, UL listed, white. For ivory, order AD365-IV and CLIP). Multi-criteria photoelectric, thermal and infrared smoke LiteSpeed, ULC listed, white. For ivory, order AD365A-IV and CLIP). 4″ Mounting base, white 4″ mounting base, white, 10-pack 4″ Mounting base, ivory 4″ Mounting base, black 6″ Flanged mounting base, white (For ULC, order B300A-6) 6″ Flanged mounting base, white, 10-pack 6″ Flanged mounting base, ivory (For ULC, order B300A- Intelligent addressable sounder base, white (For ULC, B200SA-WH) Intelligent addressable sounder base, ivory (For ULC, B200SA-IV) Intelligent addressable sounder base, low-fre- white, UL-listed Intelligent addressable sounder base, low-frequency, UL-listed Isolator base, white (For ULC, order B224BIA-WH) Isolator base, ivory (For ULC, order B224BIA-IV)

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS and AD365-IV Photoelectric, and Infrared Sensor Voltage Range: Current @ 24 VDC: Alarm Current: Current: Humidity Range: Temperature Range: Velocity: Load Rating: refer to your isolator base/module manual for isolator calculation instructions. to 32 VDC uA (one communication every 5 seconds with green LED blink on communication) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with red LED solid on) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with amber LED solid on) to 90% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing to 100 (0 to 38 to 300 ft./min. (0 to 91.4 m/min.) (51 mm) installed in B300-6 Base (156 mm) installed in B300-6 Base; 4.1 (104 mm) installed in B501 Series Base oz. (95 g) FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 268 listed for Open Air Protection 268A listed for Duct Applications 521 listed for Heat Detectors sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel installation manual. The installation must meet the require- of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maxi- performance when compliance with the National Protection Association (NFPA); see NFPA 72. For a complete list compatible bases, refer to the Base/Sensor Cross Reference Chart at DESCRIPTION AD365 and AD365-IV are plug-in type multi-criteria smoke sensors that a photoelectric sensing chamber combined with a 135 (57.2 fixed heat detector and infrared (IR) sensors. The AD365 and AD365-IV transmit an alarm signal due to heat (135 per UL 521. sensors transmit an analog representation of smoke density over a commu- line to a control panel. Rotary dial switches are provided for setting sensor address. (See Figure 2.) LEDs on the sensor are controlled by the panel to indicate sensor status. output is provided for connection to an optional remote LED annunciator RA100Z). panels offer different features sets across different models. As a result, features of the photoelectric sensors may be available on some control but not on others. will support only LiteSpeed protocol mode. AD365-IV will support ei- LiteSpeed or CLIP (Classic Loop Interface Protocol) mode. The possible available in the multi-criteria smoke sensors, if supported by the con- unit are: The sensor LEDs can operate in three ways off, and blinking can be set to red, green, or amber. This is controlled by the panel. The remote output may be synchronized to the LED operation or con- independent of the LEDs. Devices are point addressable up to 159 addresses. refer to the operation manual for the UL listed control panel for specific The photoelectric sensors require compatible addressable com- to function properly. Connect these sensors to listed-compatible panels only. recommends spacing sensors in compliance with NFPA 72. In low air applications with smooth ceilings, space sensors 30 feet apart (9.1 m). specific information regarding sensor spacing, placement, and special ap- refer to NFPA 72 or the System Smoke Detector Application Guide, from FireLite. GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes, and any special requirements of the Authority Having Proper wire gauges should be used. The installation wires should color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. connections will prevent a system from responding properly in the of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the base wiring diagram. Figure 1.) Set the desired address on the sensor address switches. (See Figure 2.) Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base while it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control panel and the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. 1. WIRING DIAGRAM

To Install the Annunciator Driver Module: the short end of the spacer through the of the ADM-12 as Driver Module Installation Drawing 15634, Rev A 1/6/93 ECN 93-06 Hold the ADM-12 upright over the right-hand corner of the Begin inserting the free end of nylon spacer hole at upper right-hand corner of (to the left of the mounting while carefully aligning the board’s connector over pin header J3. Press on the board until the spacer and snap into place. spacer in hole, lining up pin at J3 Use the diagram below to connect from an RZA-5F Remote to the ADM-12. Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 1 – Installation

No text preview available.

12 Clintonville Road CT 06472 203-484-7161 203-484-7118 AFM-16AF Fixed Module the Sensiscan 2000 Alarm Control Panels ALARM ANNUNCIATOR ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE 5 ZONE 6 ZONE 7 ZONE 8 ZONE 9 ZONE 10 ZONE 11 ZONE 12 ZONE 13 ZONE 14 ZONE 15 ZONE 16 TROUBLE LINE 15210 Rev.C ECN 95-210 Precautions to the following will aid in problem-free with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/ inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software To ensure proper system operation, this product be tested in accordance with NFPA 72-1993 Chapter after any programming operation or change in site- software. Reacceptance testing is required after change, addition or deletion of system components, after any modification, repair or adjustment to system or wiring. components, circuits, system operations, or software known to be affected by a change must be 100% In addition, to ensure that other operations are not affected, at least 10% of initiating devices are not directly affected by the change, up to a of 50 devices, must be tested and proper operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for at 0-49O C/32-120O F and at a relative of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O However, the useful life of the system standby and the electronic components may be affected by extreme temperature ranges humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this and its peripherals be installed in an with a nominal room temperature of 15- C/60-80O F. that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may erratically or can be damaged when subjected to induced transients. Although no system is completely from lightning transients and interferences, proper will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside wiring is not recommended, due to an increased suscep- to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or en- AC power and batteries prior to removing or circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any so that static charges are removed from the body. Use suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and pro- manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP and reliability depend upon proper installation. Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insur- rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warn-

THE Manual for the and AFM-32AF Modules Clintonville Road CT 06472 203-484-7161 203-484-7118 # 15970 Revision C 15970:C ECN 95-210 Precautions to the following will aid in problem-free with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/ inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software To ensure proper system operation, this product be tested in accordance with NFPA 72-1993 Chapter after any programming operation or change in site- software. Reacceptance testing is required after change, addition or deletion of system components, after any modification, repair or adjustment to system or wiring. components, circuits, system operations, or software known to be affected by a change must be 100% In addition, to ensure that other operations are not affected, at least 10% of initiating devices are not directly affected by the change, up to a of 50 devices, must be tested and proper operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for at 0-49O C/32-120O F and at a relative of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O However, the useful life of the system standby and the electronic components may be affected by extreme temperature ranges humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this and its peripherals be installed in an with a nominal room temperature of 15- C/60-80O F. that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may erratically or can be damaged when subjected to induced transients. Although no system is completely from lightning transients and interferences, proper will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside wiring is not recommended, due to an increased suscep- to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or en- AC power and batteries prior to removing or circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any so that static charges are removed from the body. Use suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and pro- manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP and reliability depend upon proper installation. Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insur- rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warn- devices, and a fire alarm control with remote notification can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such system, however, does not assure protection against prop- damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

Annunciator Fire Alarm Control Panels Clintonville Road CT 06472 203-484-7118 # 15390 Revision: 15390:D ECN 9 Precautions to the following will aid in problem-free with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/ inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software To ensure proper system operation, this product be tested in accordance with NFPA 72-1993 Chapter after any programming operation or change in site- software. Reacceptance testing is required after change, addition or deletion of system components, after any modification, repair or adjustment to system or wiring. components, circuits, system operations, or software known to be affected by a change must be 100% In addition, to ensure that other operations are not affected, at least 10% of initiating devices are not directly affected by the change, up to a of 50 devices, must be tested and proper operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for at 0-49O C/32-120O F and at a relative of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O However, the useful life of the system standby and the electronic components may be affected by extreme temperature ranges humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this and its peripherals be installed in an with a nominal room temperature of 15- C/60-80O F. that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may erratically or can be damaged when subjected to induced transients. Although no system is completely from lightning transients and interferences, proper will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside wiring is not recommended, due to an increased suscep- to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or en- AC power and batteries prior to removing or circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any so that static charges are removed from the body. Use suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and pro- manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP and reliability depend upon proper installation. Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insur- rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warn- devices, and a fire alarm control with remote notification can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such system, however, does not assure protection against prop- damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot the detectors su

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

ANN-100 Character LCD Fire Annunciator ANN-100 annunciator is a backlit, 80-character LCD fire annun- that mimics the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) display. It system status indicators for AC Power, Alarm, Trouble, and Alarm Silenced conditions. ANN-100 and the FACP communicate over a two-wire serial employing the ANN-BUS communication format. Con- devices are powered, via two additional wires, by either the FACP or a remote UL-listed, filtered power supply. ANN-100 displays English-language text of system point infor- including device type, zone, independent point alarm, trouble supervisory status, as well as any custom alpha labels pro- into the control panel. It includes control switches for control of critical system functions. (A keyswitch prevents operation of the control switches.) to eight ANN-100s may be connected to each ANN-BUS of a No programming is required, which saves time during system Listed to UL Standard 864, 9th Edition Backlit 80-character LCD display (20 characters x 4 lines) Mimics all display information from the host panel Control switches for Signal Silence, System Acknowledge, Reset, Control switches can be independently enabled or disabled at the Drill Keyswitch enables/disables control switches and mechanically annunciator enclosure Keyswitch can be enabled or disabled at the FACP Enclosure supervised for tamper System status LEDs for AC Power, Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory, Alarm Silence Local sounder can be enabled or disabled at the FACP ANN-100 connects to the ANN-BUS terminal on the FACP and minimal panel programming Displays device type identifiers, individual point alarm, trouble, zone, and custom alpha labels Time-and date display field Surface-mount or flush-mount installation options Optional trim ring for a more finished look Can be remotely located up to 6,000 feet (1,800 m) from the Backlight turns off during AC loss to conserve battery power but turn back on if an alarm condition occurs May be powered by 24 VDC from the host FACP or by remote supply (requires 24 VDC) Up to eight ANN-100s can be connected on the ANN-BUS and Indicators AC Power Alarm Trouble Supervisory Alarm Silenced Flush Mount: (Outside wall) 12.25 x 11.5 x 0.875 (31.1W 29.2H x 2.2D cm), (Inside wall) 9.375 x 8.375 x 2 x 21.3H x 5.1D cm) Surface Mount: (Including Trim Ring) 12.25 x 11.5 3 x 29.2H x 2.2D cm) Operating Voltage: 24VDC Standby Current: 20mA Alarm Current: 25mA Wiring Distance: Up to 6,000 ft max. from FACP All connections are power-limited and supervised. For use indoors in a dry location. Relative humidity: 93% 2% RH (non-condensing) at 32 2 Ambient temperature: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 3 Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the ANN-100. In some certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agen- or listing may be in process. Consult the factory for the latest status. S2424 approved 7165-0075:0500 COA #6261 Information 80 character remote fire annunciator; red Optional trim ring for surface-mount applications; red 1/22/2019 Page 1 of 2 Alarms is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. specifications are subject to change without notice. more information, contact Fire Alarms.

ANN-80 Serial LCD Annunciator ANN-80 annunciator is a compact, backlit, 80-character LCD annunciator that mimics the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) It provides system status indicators for AC Power, Alarm, Supervisory, and Alarm Silenced conditions. The ANN-80 the FACP communicate over a two-wire serial interface employ- the ANN-Bus communication format. Connected devices are via two additional wires, by either the host FACP or a UL-listed, filtered power supply. The ANN-80 is red; for order ANN-80-W. ANN-80 displays English-language text of system point informa- including device type, zone, independent point alarm, trouble or status, as well as any custom alpha labels programmed the control panel. It includes control switches for remote control critical system functions. (A keyswitch prevents unauthorized of the control switches.) to eight ANN-80s may be connected to the ANN-Bus of each No programming is required, which saves time during system Listed to UL Standard 864, 9th Edition Backlit 80-character LCD display (20 characters x 4 lines) Mimics all display information from the host panel Control switches for System Acknowledge, Signal Silence, Drill, Reset Control switches can be independently enabled or disabled at the Keyswitch enables/disables control switches and mechanically annunciator enclosure Keyswitch can be enabled or disabled at the FACP Enclosure supervised for tamper System status LEDs for AC Power, Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory, Alarm Silence Local sounder can be enabled or disabled at the FACP ANN-80 connects to the ANN-Bus terminal on the FACP and minimal panel programming Displays device type identifiers, individual point alarm, trouble, zone, and custom alpha labels Time-and date display field Surface mount directly to wall or to single, double, or 4″ square box Semi-flush mount to single, double, or 4″ square electrical box. ANN-SB80KIT for angled view mounting Can be remotely located up to 6,000 feet (1,800 m) from the Backlight turns off during AC loss to conserve battery power but turn back on if an alarm condition occurs May be powered by 24 VDC from the host FACP or by remote supply (requires 24 VDC) Up to eight ANN-80s can be connected on the ANN-Bus and Indicators AC Power Alarm Trouble B-90 Supervisory Alarm Silenced Operating voltage range: 18 VDC to 28 VDC Current consumption @ 24 VDC nominal (filtered and non- 40 mA maximum Ambient temperature: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 Relative humidity: 93% 2% RH (non-condensing) at 32 5.375 (13.65 cm.) high x 6.875 (17.46 cm.) wide x 1.375 (3.49 (90 3 deep For use indoors in a dry location All connections are power-limited and supervised ANN-Bus THE DEVICES ON THE ANN-BUS FROM AUXIL- POWER SUPPLY ANN-Bus can be powered by an auxiliary power supply when maximum number of ANN-Bus devices exceeds the ANN-Bus requirements. See the FACP manual for more information. DEVICE ADDRESSING ANN-Bus device requires a unique address (ID Number) in to communicate with the FACP. A maximum of 8 devices can connected to the FACP ANN-Bus communication circuit. See the manual for more information. REQUIREMENTS: COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUIT ANN-80 connects to the FACP ANN-Bus communications cir- To determine the type of wire and the maximum wiring distance can be used with FACP ANN-Bus accessory modules, it is nec- to calculate the total worst case current draw for all modules a single 4-conductor bus. The total worst case current draw is by adding the individual worst case currents for each For total worst case current draw on a single ANN-Bus refer to FACP manual. 3/15/2018 Page 1 of 2 REQUIREMENTS: POWER CIRCUI

No text preview available.

ANN-80C Serial LCD Indicator ANN-80C indicator is a compact, backlit, 80-character LCD fire that mimics the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) display. It system status indicators for AC Power, Alarm, Trouble, and Alarm Silenced conditions. The ANN-80C and the communicate over a two-wire serial interface employing the communication format. Connected devices are powered, two additional wires, by either the host FACP or a remote ULC- filtered power supply. The ANN-80C is red. ANN-80C displays English-language text of system point infor- including device type, zone, independent point alarm, trouble supervisory status, as well as any custom alpha labels pro- into the control panel. It includes buttons for local silence, test, and sounder test. A keyswitch prevents unauthorized to eight ANN-80Cs may be connected to the ANN-Bus of each No programming is required, which saves time during system ULC listed meets all Canadian requirements for a fire alarm Backlit 80-character LCD display (20 characters x 4 lines) Buttons for local silence, lamp test, and sounder test Keyswitch enables/disables buttons and mechanically locks indi- enclosure Keyswitch can be enabled or disabled at the FACP Enclosure supervised for tamper System status LEDs for AC Power, Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory, Alarm Silence Local sounder can be enabled or disabled at the FACP ANN-80C connects to the ANN-BUS terminal on the FACP and minimal panel programming Displays device type identifiers, individual point alarm, trouble, zone, and custom alpha labels Time-and date display field Surface mount directly to wall or to single, double, or 4″ square box Semi-flush mount to single, double, or 4″ square electrical box. ANN-SB80KIT for angled view mounting Can be remotely located up to 1,800 m from the panel Backlight turns off during AC loss to conserve battery power but turn back on if an alarm condition occurs May be powered by 24 VDC from the host FACP or by remote supply (requires 24 VDC) and Indicators AC Power Alarm Trouble Supervisory Alarm Silenced Local Silence Lamp Test Sounder Test DF-60676:A2 Operating voltage range: 18 VDC to 28 VDC Current consumption @ 24 VDC nominal (filtered and non- 40 mA maximum Ambient temperature: 0 to 49 Relative humidity: 93% 2% RH (non-condensing) at 32 13.65 cm. high x 17.46 cm. wide x 3.49 cm. deep For use indoors in a dry location All connections are power-limited and supervised ANN-Bus THE DEVICES ON THE ANN-BUS FROM AUXIL- POWER SUPPLY ANN-Bus can be powered by an auxiliary power supply when maximum number of ANN-Bus devices exceeds the ANN-Bus requirements. See the FACP manual for more information. DEVICE ADDRESSING ANN-Bus device requires a unique address (ID Number) in to communicate with the FACP. A maximum of 8 devices can connected to the FACP ANN-Bus communication circuit. See the manual for more information. REQUIREMENTS: COMMUNICATIONS CIRCUIT ANN-80C connects to the FACP ANN-Bus communications cir- To determine the type of wire and the maximum wiring distance can be used with FACP ANN-Bus accessory modules, it is nec- to calculate the total worst case current draw for all modules a single 4-conductor bus. The total worst case current draw is by adding the individual worst case currents for each For total worst case current draw on a single ANN-Bus refer to FACP manual. 3/15/2018 Page 1 of 2 REQUIREMENTS: POWER CIRCUIT 14 to 18 AWG (0.75 – 2.08 mm2) wire for 24 VDC power circuit is Power wire distance limitation is set by 1.2 volt maxi- line drop form source to end of circuit. All connections are power-limited and supervised. A maximum of eight ANN-80C modules may be connected to this Options Red 80 character LCD Indicator. Red surf

ANN-I/O Driver Module ANN-I/O is an LED driver module that can be used in a wide of applications including as an interface with the Fire Alarm Panel (FACP) to drive most customized graphic annuncia- It comes in a plastic enclosure that may be mounted inside a annunciator or accessory cabinet and can drive up to 40 ANN-I/O and the FACP communicate over a two-wire serial employing the ANN-Bus communication format. An addi- two wires are used for 24-volt DC power. A single four-con- unshielded cable may be used for both power and data to eight ANN-Bus devices may be connected to the ANN-Bus of FACP. ANN-I/O connects to the ANN-Bus terminal on the FACP and minimal programming Each ANN-I/O module drives up to 40 LEDs Programmable to indicate activity for points or zones Compatible with ES-50X, ES-200X, MS-9600(UD)LS, MS-9050UD, MRP-2001, MRP-2002, MS-5UD, MS-10UD Can be remotely located up to 6,000 feet (1,829 m) from the May be powered by 24 VDC from the host FACP or by remote supply (requires 24 VDC) Up to eight ANN-Bus devices may be connected to the ANN-Bus each FACP Maximum ANN-Bus Voltage: 24 VDC Maximum Current: Alarm: 200 mA, Standby: 35 mA, Each LED: 10mA Maximum wiring distance from FACP: 6000 ft. (1829 m.) Ambient Temperature: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 Relative Humidity: 93% 2% RH (non-condensing) at 32 2 3 For use indoors in a dry location Connections to FACP are power-limited and supervised External measurements: 6.00″ (15.2 cm.) high x 7.76″ (19.7 cm.) x 1.46″ (3.7 cm.) deep B-93 Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the ANN-I/O. In some certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agen- or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing UL: S2424 CSFM: 7120-0075:0213 MEA: 442-06-E ANN-Bus THE DEVICES ON THE ANN-BUS FROM AUXIL- POWER SUPPLY devices can be powered by an auxiliary power supply available panel power is exceeded. See FACP manual for DEVICE ADDRESSING ANN-Bus device requires a unique address (ID Number) in to communicate with the FACP. A maximum of eight devices be connected to the FACP ANN-Bus communication circuit. See FACP manual for more information. 3/15/2018 Page 1 of 2 Alarms is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this is strictly prohibited. 2 of 2 DF-52430:C 3/15/2018 document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. specifications are subject to change without notice. more information, contact Fire Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. of Origin: USA

No text preview available.

DF-60816:D B-92 Module is a fiber module (ANN-LC) that allows the MS- to become a common central station communicator multiple MS-9050UD and MS-9200UDLS fire alarm control Lite-Connect is a solution that allows building owners reduce the number of phone lines by consolidating the cen- station communications to a single panel. Using fiber-optic the panels are connected together and the MS- sends point or zone information for the entire system the central station. In addition, building to building connec- with fiber avoid potential ground fault issues and damage by lightning strikes. When using the IPGSM-DP(C) or IPGSM-COM Commer- Fire Communicator, node address settings 10 or above should be used.There are no restrictions with the IPGSM-4G(C). Each FACP (main MS-9050UD and remote panels) its own ANN-LC module. Up to 16 remote panels (MS-9050UD and MS-9200UDLS). Fiber optic panel to panel connections to avoid potential faults or lightning strike issues. Main panel communicates up to 50 points / 20 zones to the Station for the MS-9050UD and 198 points / 99 for the MS-9200UDLS. Connects to the ANN-BUS of the fire panel and requires programming. Class B or Class A operation for survivability. panel requires a unique address that is assigned programming. Operating voltage: 24 VDC Maximum current: 150 mA @ 24 VDC Maximum attenuation of the optical signal between any two cards for 62.5/125 or 50/125 multi-mode fiber optic with LC connectors: 5 dB. For uninterrupted cable runs, this will equate to a maximum optic cabling distance of 3.1 miles (5km) between each card. Any attenuation incurred through the use of cable splicing, patch connections, or other loss inducing equipment in the cable path between Lite-Connect cards shall be included in overall attenuation calculation, along with the fiber cable, and not exceed in total the 5db attenuation limit. Compatible with the MS-9050UD Series software version Compatible with the MS-9200UDLS Series software version or later. or later. Each ANN-LC must have the same version of the Lite-Con- module software. Station A 6/30/2015 Page 1 of 2 Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the ANN-LC Lite- Module. In some cases, certain modules or applica- may not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing be in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. UL Listed: S2424 CSFM: 7300-0075:0231 FM approved Fire Dept. of New York: COA #6177 Information Module ships with a hardware kit containing a cable, a 21 long ribbon cable, 2 hex nuts, and 1 self- screw. is a trademark; and Fire-Lite Alarms is a registered trade- of Honeywell International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use this document is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. specifications are subject to change without notice. more information, contact Fire Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. in the USA 2 of 2 DF-60816:D 6/30/2015

ANN-LED Annunciator Module ANN-LED annunciator module provides LED annunciation of system faults and input zones/points when used with a com- Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). The ANN-LED module pro- alarm (red), (yellow) and supervisory (yellow) for up to ten input zones or addressable points. ANN- has red LEDs only for alarm communication of up to 30 points. ANN-LED is supplied standard with certain Canadian FACPs as by ULC. ANN-LED and the FACP communicate over a two-wire serial employing the ANN-Bus communication format. An addi- two wires are used for 24-volt DC power. A single four-con- unshielded cable may be used for both power and data to eight ANN-Bus devices may be connected to the ANN-Bus of FACP. ANN-LED connects to the ANN-Bus terminal on the FACP and minimal programming three LEDs for each zone: Alarm, Trouble and Supervi- Compatible with the ES-200X, ES-50X, MS-9600(UD)LS, MS- MS-9050UD, MS-5UD, MS-10UD, MRP-2001, and Can be remotely located up to 6,000 feet (1,829 m) from the May be powered by 24 VDC from the host FACP or by remote supply (requires 24 VDC) Maximum ANN-BUS Voltage: 24 VDC Maximum Current: Alarm: 68 mA Standby: 28 mA Maximum wiring distance from FACP: 6,000 ft. (1,829 m.) Ambient Temperature: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 Relative Humidity: 93% 2% RH (non-condensing) at 32 2 For use indoors in a dry location Connections to FACP are power-limited and supervised 5.160″ (13.11 cm.) high x 10.043″ (25.51 cm.) wide x 1.77″ (4.5 3 deep ANN-Bus THE DEVICES ON THE ANN-BUS FROM AUXIL- POWER SUPPLY devices can be powered by an auxiliary power supply available panel power is exceeded. See FACP manual for DEVICE ADDRESSING ANN-Bus device requires a unique address (ID Number) in to communicate with the FACP. A maximum of eight devices be connected to the FACP ANN-Bus communication circuit. See FACP manual for more information. B-105 Information annunciator module with alarm (red), trouble (yellow) supervisory (yellow) indication for up to ten input zones or points, includes module mounting bracket, metal cover clear plastic screen, rubber display/label holder, screws for the metal cover and the backbox, red enclosure same as above, with gray enclosure and white key- annunciator module with alarm (red) indicators for up 30 input zones or addressable points, includes red enclosure same as above, with gray enclosure and white key- Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the ANN-LED. In some certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agen- or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing UL: S2424 ULC: S2424 (ANN-LED only) FM approved CSFM: 7120-0075:0222 MEA: 333-07-E Fire Dept of NY: COA #6177 3/15/2018 Page 1 of 2 Alarms is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. specifications are subject to change without notice. more information, contact Fire Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. of Origin: USA 2 of 2 DF-60241:E 3/15/2018

ANN-RLY Module ANN-RLY relay module provides 10 programmable Form-C when used with a compatible FACP (Fire Alarm Control The ANN-RLY module may be mounted inside the FACP circuit board chassis or in the battery area of the enclosure optional mounting bracket P/N: ANN-MBRLY. Reference Instructions document #53033. ANN-RLY and the FACP communicate over a two-wire serial employing the ANN-Bus communication format. An addi- two wires are used for 24-volt DC power. A single four-con- unshielded cable may be used for both power and data to eight ANN-Bus devices may be connected to the ANN-Bus of FACP. ANN-RLY connects to the ANN-Bus terminal on the FACP and minimal programming Provides 10 programmable Form-C relays Ten Form-C relays can be programmed for various functions; Trouble, Supervisory, AC Loss, Waterflow Delay, Input and Silenceable Alarm. Compatible with ES-200X, ES-50X, MS9600(UD)LS, MS-9050UD, MRP-2001, MRP-2002, MS-10UD, MS-5UD May be powered by 24 VDC from the host FACP or by remote supply (requires 24 VDC) Up to eight ANN-Bus devices may be connected to the ANN-Bus each FACP Listed to UL Standard 864, 9th Edition Maximum ANN-BUS Voltage: 24 VDC Maximum Current: Alarm: 75 mA Standby: 15 mA Ambient Temperature: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 Relative Humidity: 93% 2% RH (non-condensing) at 32 2 3 For use indoors in a dry location Connections to FACP are power-limited and supervised. Relay Contact Ratings: 2 Amps @ 30VDC (Resistive) 0.5 Amps 30VAC (Resistive) ANN-Bus THE DEVICES ON THE ANN-BUS FROM AUXIL- POWER SUPPLY devices can be powered by an auxiliary power supply available panel power is exceeded. See FACP manual for DEVICE ADDRESSING ANN-Bus device requires a unique address (ID Number) in to communicate with the FACP. A maximum of eight devices be connected to the FACP ANN-Bus communication circuit. See FACP manual for more information. B-200 Information ANN-RLY: Relay Module provides 10 programmable Form C ANN-MBRLY: Optional mounting bracket; required for applications ROME: Relay Option Module Enclosure, includes one ANN-RLY module and one ANN-MBRLY bracket installed Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the FeaturedProduct. In cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain approval or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest list- status. UL:S2424 FM Approved Fire Dept. of New York: #COA 6177 CSFM: 7120-0075:0222 MEA: 333-07-E 3/15/2018 Page 1 of 2 Alarms is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. specifications are subject to change without notice. 2 of 2 DF-52431:C 3/15/2018 more information, contact Fire Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. of Origin: USA

ANN-S/PG Printer Interface Module ANN-S/PG Interface module connects either a serial or parallel with a compatible Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) to print logs of system events, detector status reports, and event ANN-S/PG and the FACP communicate over a two-wire serial employing the ANN-Bus communication format. An addi- two wires are used for 24-volt DC power. A single four-con- unshielded cable may be used for both power and data to eight devices may be connected to the ANN-Bus of each Listed to UL Standard 864, 9th edition Auto-configure menu selection allows programmer to bring all the attached to the ANN-Bus on-line quickly Surface mounts directly to wall Can be remotely located up to 6,000 feet (1,829 m) from the May be powered by 24 VDC from the host FACP or by remote supply (requires 24 VDC) Connects a remote printer using a standard cable (DB-9 for a printer; DB-25 for a parallel printer) Operating Voltage: 24 VDC Current (Alarm and Standby): 45mA Ambient Temperature: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 Relative Humidity: 93% 2% RH (non-condensing) at 32 2 Maximum wiring distance from FACP: 6,000 ft. (1,829 m.) Dimensions: 6.00 (15.2 cm.) high x 7.76 (19.7 cm.) wide x 1.46 3 cm.) deep For use indoors in a dry location Connections to FACP are power-limited and supervised B-95 ANN-Bus THE DEVICES ON THE ANN-BUS FROM AUXIL- POWER SUPPLY devices can be powered by an auxiliary power supply available panel power is exceeded. See FACP manual for DEVICE ADDRESSING ANN-Bus device requires a unique address (ID Number) in to communicate with the FACP. A maximum of eight devices be connected to the FACP ANN-Bus communication circuit. See FACP manual for more information. Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the ANN-S/PG. In some certain modules may not be listed by certain approval agen- or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest listing UL: S2424 CSFM: 7120-0075:0213 MEA: 442-06-E 3/15/2018 Page 1 of 2 Alarms is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. specifications are subject to change without notice. more information, contact Fire Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. of Origin: USA 2 of 2 DF-52429:B 3/15/2018

faps6ia0Cover.fm Page 1 Monday, June 15, 1998 2:24 PM &OLQWRQYLOOH 5RDG &7 (cid:19)(cid:25)(cid:23)(cid:26)(cid:21) (cid:23)(cid:27)(cid:23)(cid:16)(cid:26)(cid:20)(cid:25)(cid:20) (cid:23)(cid:27)(cid:23)(cid:16)(cid:26)(cid:20)(cid:20)(cid:27) (cid:11))D[(cid:12) (cid:24)(cid:19)(cid:27)(cid:28)(cid:22) A (cid:24)(cid:19)(cid:27)(cid:28)(cid:22)(cid:29)$ (cid:28)(cid:27)(cid:16)(cid:19)(cid:24)(cid:24) Precautions to the following will aid in problem-free with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/ inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software To ensure proper system operation, this product be tested in accordance with NFPA 72-1993 Chapter after any programming operation or change in site- software. Reacceptance testing is required after change, addition or deletion of system components, after any modification, repair or adjustment to system or wiring. components, circuits, system operations, or software known to be affected by a change must be 100% In addition, to ensure that other operations are not affected, at least 10% of initiating devices are not directly affected by the change, up to a of 50 devices, must be tested and proper operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for at 0-49O C/32-120O F and at a relative of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O However, the useful life of the system standby and the electronic components may be affected by extreme temperature ranges humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this and its peripherals be installed in an with a nominal room temperature of 15- C/60-80O F. that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may erratically or can be damaged when subjected to induced transients. Although no system is completely from lightning transients and interferences, proper will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside wiring is not recommended, due to an increased suscep- to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or en- AC power and batteries prior to removing or circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any so that static charges are removed from the body. Use suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and pro- manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP and reliability depend upon proper installation. Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insur- rates possible, it is not a substitute

June 26, 1998 & AR-10F Release Manual Stations Conventional Initiating Devices Fire Fire(cid:149)Lite AR Series of Agent Release Manual Sta- is designed for use with the Sensiscan 2000 and Agent Release Control Panels. Based on the BG-10 Series of Manual Fire Alarm Stations, the Series provides dual-action, normally open contact, initiating points. The ARA-10 also includes a abort switch, System Activated (release) LED and Normal LED. Impact-resistant, durable LEXAN (or polycarbonate housing. Backplate made of 16 gauge steel. Highly visible. Easily operated (within ADA 5 lb. pull force when used break tube (cid:151) models manufactured after 10-1- identified by an under station spring). Attractive shape with textured finish. ARA-10 includes: Manual release, dual-action. Manual abort switch. System Activated (release) LED. System Normal (power-on) LED. AR-10F includes: Manual release, dual-action only. AR Series agent release manual stations are in- for use as release initiating devices with Fire(cid:149)Lite 2000 and MRP-4424 agent release control pan- These stations are ideally suited for areas such as rooms and computer rooms, where a chemical agent used to extinguish a fire. The AR Series stations should installed in compliance with applicable NFPA stan- local building codes, and plans and specifications. AR-10F agent release manual station mounts to a single-gang electrical box or SB-10 surface-mount The ARA-10 requires a custom backbox for mount- (cid:151) model SBA-10. A terminal block with screws is for fast and easy wiring of the agent release is a registered trademark of GE Plastics, a subsidiary General Electric Company. the handle down causes the AR Stations to latch in down position and to close the normally open release switch. The handle is restored manually by un- the allen-head screw so the top of the case can forward, allowing the spring-loaded handle to return its normal position. The case can then be pivoted back its normal position and secured with the allen-head document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 2 LINE INFORMATION Release Manual Station, dual action. terminal block with screws for fast easy wiring of agent release circuit. as above with manual abort switch, Activated (release) LED and System (power-on) LED. backbox for AR-10F. backbox for ARA-10. for ARA-10 ELR on last unit. 2 of 2 (cid:151) DF-51230 (rear view) Agent Release Manual Station view on page 1)

No text preview available.

REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR, MODEL RA400Z the remote annunciator between terminals 1 and 3 using the spade lug terminal included. The spade lug termi- is connected to the base terminal as shown in Figure 5. is not acceptable for three stripped wires to be under the same wiring terminal unless they are separated by a washer a lug like the spade lug supplied with the model RA400Z. See Figure 5 for installation. WIRE WITH LUG 5. Connection to Remote Annunciator Terminal. B310LP base is intended for use in a 2-wire addressable system, with screw terminals provided for power (+ and remote annunciator connections. Communication takes place over the power (+ and lines. PLUG-IN DETECTOR BASE INSTRUCTIONS installing detectors, please thoroughly read the system wiring and installation manuals, and manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which provides detailed information on detector spacing, placement, and special applications. Copies of these manuals are available from Fire DESCRIPTION B310LP Plug-in Detector Base is used with Fire models CP350 ionization, SD350 and SD350T photoelectronic de- and H350 and H350R heat detectors TERMINALS ( Remote Annunciator ( (+) Annunciator (+) PROOF refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems 1. Terminal Layout inches (155 mm) inch (102 mm) square box with or without plaster ring Depth: 1.5 inches (38 mm) inch Octagon Box, Min. Depth 1.5 inches (38 mm) inch Octagon Box, Min. Depth 1.5 inches (38 mm) Gang Box, Min. Depth 1.5 inches (38 mm) Fire Alarms, Inc., One Fire Place, Northford, CT 06472, 203-484-7161 detector base mounts directly to 3-1/2 inch and 4 octagon boxes, 4 inch square boxes (with or with- plaster rings) and single gang boxes. To mount, re- the decorative ring by turning it in either direction unhook the snaps, then separate the ring from the Install the base on the box using the screws sup- with the junction box and the appropriate mount- slots in the base. Place the decorative ring on the and rotate it in either direction until it snaps into (see Figure 2). WIRING GUIDELINES wiring must be installed in compliance with all appli- local codes and any special requirements of the having jurisdiction, using the proper wire The conductors used to connect smoke detectors control panels and accessory devices should be to reduce the likelihood of wiring errors. connections can prevent a system from re- properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected it is recommended that the wire be no than AWG 18. However, the screws and plate in the base can accommodate wire up to AWG 12. The use of twisted pair wiring or cable for the power (+ and loop is recom- to minimize the effects of electrical interfer- shielded cable is used, the shield connection to and the detector must be continuous by using wire crimping, or soldering, as appropriate for a reli- connection. 2. Mounting Detector to Box electrical connections by stripping about 3/8″ (10 mm) of insulation from the end of the wire (use strip gauge in base), sliding the bare end of the wire under the clamping plate, and tightening the clamping plate screw. Do loop the wire under the clamping plate. zone wiring of the detector base should be checked before the detector heads are installed in them. The wiring be checked for continuity and polarity in the base, and dielectric tests should be performed. ON (NOT (NOT ANNUNCIATOR Do not loop wire under terminal 1 or 2. wire run to provide supervision of connections. A OPTIONAL WIRING 3. Typical Wiring Diagram for 2-wire loop

B350LP PLUG-IN DETECTOR BASE INSTRUCTIONS installing detectors, please thoroughly read the system wiring and installation manuals, and manual I56-407, for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors, which provides detailed information on detector spacing, placement, and special applications. Copies of these manuals are available from Fire DESCRIPTION B350LP Plug-in Detector Base is used with Fire models CP350 ionization, SD350 and SD350T photoelectronic de- and H350 and H350R heat detectors B350LP base is intended for use in a 2-wire addressable system, with screw terminals provided for power (+ and remote annunciator connections. Communication takes place over the power (+ and lines. TERMINALS ( Remote Annunciator ( (+) Annunciator (+) PROOF 1. Terminal Layout inches (155 mm) inch (102 mm) square box with or without plaster ring Depth: 1.5 inches (38 mm) inch Octagon Box, Min. Depth 1.5 inches (38 mm) inch Octagon Box, Min. Depth 1.5 inches (38 mm) Gang Box, Min. Depth 1.5 inches (38 mm) Alarms, Inc., One Fire Place, Northford, CT 06472, 203-484-7161 ON (NOT (NOT detector base mounts directly to 3-1/2 inch and 4 octagon boxes, 4 inch square boxes (with or with- plaster rings) and single gang boxes. To mount, re- the decorative ring by turning it in either direction unhook the snaps, then separate the ring from the Install the base on the box using the screws sup- with the junction box and the appropriate mount- slots in the base. Place the decorative ring on the and rotate it in either direction until it snaps into (see Figure 2). WIRING GUIDELINES wiring must be installed in compliance with all appli- local codes and any special requirements of the having jurisdiction, using the proper wire The conductors used to connect smoke detectors control panels and accessory devices should be to reduce the likelihood of wiring errors. connections can prevent a system from re- properly in the event of a fire. signal wiring (the wiring between interconnected it is recommended that the wire be no than AWG 18. However, the screws and plate in the base can accommodate wire up to AWG 12. The use of twisted pair wiring or cable for the power (+ and loop is recom- to minimize the effects of electrical interfer- shielded cable is used, the shield connection to and the detector must be continuous by using wire crimping, or soldering, as appropriate for a reli- connection. 2. Mounting Detector to Box electrical connections by stripping about 3/8″ (10 mm) of insulation from the end of the wire (use strip gauge in base), sliding the bare end of the wire under the clamping plate, and tightening the clamping plate screw. Do loop the wire under the clamping plate. zone wiring of the detector base should be checked before the detector heads are installed in them. The wiring be checked for continuity and polarity in the base, and dielectric tests should be performed. base includes a label for recording the zone, address, and type of detector being installed. This information is impor- to set the address of the detector head that will later be plugged into the base and to verify the type required for that ANNUNCIATOR Do not loop wire under terminal 1 or 2. wire run to provide supervision of connections. A OPTIONAL WIRING 3. Typical Wiring Diagram for 2-wire loop Do NOT use the tamper-resistant capability if the XR2 Removal Tool will be used. Tamper Resistant Tab, in the Detector Mounting Bracket, can make the detector tamper-resistant by making it nec- to use a small screwdriver or similar tool to detach the detector from the base. make the detector tamper-resistant, use

BAT Series Batteries Lead-Acid Series Batteries are Power Sonic brand batteries. BAT (or Power Sonic brand) batteries are recommended for power or backup power for all Fire fire alarm equipment. Provide secondary power for control panels. Sealed and maintenance-free. Overcharge protected. Easy handling with leakproof construction. Ruggedly constructed, high-impact case (ABS, polystyrene, polypropylene, depending on models). Long service life. Compact design. Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to BAT Series Batteries. some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult factory latest listing status. UL Recognized Components: MH20845 (Power-Sonic) D-500 Supplies/Accessories Information 10-unit bulk pack of BAT-1250 (12 V 5 AH) 5-unit bulk pack of BAT-1270 (12 V 7 AH) 4-unit bulk pack of BAT-12120 (12V 12 AH) 2-unit bulk pack of BAT-12180 (12 V 18 AH) 2-unit bulk pack of BAT-12260 (12 V 26 AH) single battery (12 V 55 AH) single battery (12 V 100 AH) Number Reference & Specifications Part 20 hr. A.H. V PS-1270 PS-12180 PS-121000 over 7/13/2011 Page 1 of 2 Discharge Curves of Temperature on Capacity left: Storage left: Alarms is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. display trademarks of the manufacturer. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use this document is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. specifications are subject to change without notice. more information, contact Fire Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. in the U.S. A. 2 of 2 DF-52397:C1 7/13/2011

No text preview available.

Fire Alarm Control Panel minimum Battery Box Battery Box Installation Drawing # 15736 Rev. A 15736:A ECN:93-199 10/5/93 BB-17F Battery Box may be used to house to two 17AH batteries. It mounts directly the FACP cabinet. Knockouts are pro- on the top surface of the battery box. 1 1 4 Description Battery Box Cabinet Battery Box Cover Screws Remove knockouts in the bottom of the cabinet and the top of the BB-17F Align knockouts in FACP and BB-17F. the BB-17F to wall using 1/4(cid:148) holes in back of cabinet. Run conduit between the BB-17F cabinet the FACP cabinet. Make sure there is least 1/2(cid:148) of clearance between the BB- and the FACP (see illustration at left). Run battery cable through conduit from into battery box. Connect cable to Secure the BB-17F cover to cabinet using self-threading screws. Clintonville Road CT 06472 484-7161 (203) 484-7118

Battery/Peripherals Enclosure Installation Document 50295:B 07/24/2001 01-250 cabinet consists of a backbox with an integral, door that is hinged on the bottom to swing for access. is designed to be mounted a minimum of 6 inches cm) below the fire alarm control panel When both cabinets are surface mounted, knockout in the bottom-right corner of the FACP line up directly above the knockout in the top- corner of this enclosure. enclosure should be mounted in a clean, dry, area, using the six holes provided. The enclosure has 0.875 in. (2.2225 cm) which accept standard 0.75 in. (1.905 cm) inch cm) Enclosure 30 in. m m ) 0 in . (71.12 m m ) 6 in . 64 m m ) Side in. (612 .775 m m ) 30 in. m m ) 75 in. 25 m m ) in. (406.4 m m ) 0 in . m m ) 0 in . m m ) in. m m ) in. m m ) Enclosure PN 50295:B 07/24/2001 50 in. m m ) 5 in 5 m m ) in. (603 .25 m m ) (without door) 25 in. 75 m m ) in. m m ) in m

BEAM1224(A) and Beam Smoke Detectors System Sensor BEAM1224 and BEAM1224S are four- conventional reflected beam smoke detectors. They are suited for protecting open areas with high ceilings spot-type smoke detectors are difficult to install and BEAM1224 and BEAM1224S are to be used with UL compatible fire alarm control panels only. Installation of single-ended reflective design is much quicker than a dual- projected beam detector. Alignment is easily accom- with an optical sight and a two-digit signal strength incorporated into the beam detector. Listed for operation to 131 the BEAM1224 and BEAM1224S can be in open-area applications to provide early warning in where temperature extremes exceed the design for other types of smoke detection. BEAM1224 and BEAM1224S are a transmitter/receiver and a reflector. When smoke enters the area between the and the reflector, it causes a reduction in the signal When the smoke level (signal strength) reaches the threshold, an alarm is activated. The detectors four standard sensitivity selections as well as two Accli- settings. When either Acclimate setting is selected, detector will automatically adjust its sensitivity using software algorithms to select the optimum sensitivity the specific environment. BEAM1224S has an integral sensitivity test feature of a fil- attached to a servomotor inside the detector optics. Activa- of the RTS151 or RTS151KEY remote test station moves filter into the pathway of the light beam, testing the detec- sensitivity. This sensitivity test feature allows the user to and easily meet the annual maintenance and test of NFPA 72, without physical access to the Unless otherwise specified, the term BEAM1224 is used in data sheet to refer to both the BEAM1224 and the Likewise, BEAM1224S BEAM1224SA. version). Transmitter/receiver built into same unit. Six user-selectable sensitivity levels. 16 to 328 (use BEAMLRK beyond 230 protection range. Removable plug-in terminal blocks. Digital display for easy alignment. Built-in automatic gain control compensates for signal dete- from dust buildup. Paintable cover. Optional remote test station. Optional long-range kit (BEAMLRK) for applications in of 230 (70 m). Optional multi-mount kit (BEAMMMK) providing ceiling or mount capability with increased angular adjustment. Optional heater kits (BEAMHK and BEAMHKR) for preven- of condensation (not intended to increase or reduce the operating temperature). Optional heavy-duty mounting bracket (6500-MMK) (cid:129) F-725 Initiating Devices Reflective Plate BEAMMMK separately) SPECIFICATIONS range: 16 to 230 feet (5 to 70 m), 230 to 328 feet to 100 m) using optional BEAMLRK kit. angle: horizontal and vertical. Note that the move independently of the unit. (6 levels): Level 1 25%. Level 2 30%. Level 3 40%. Level 4 50%. Acclimate Level 5 30% to 50%. Acclimate Level 6 40% to 50%. condition (trouble): 96% or more obscuration blockage. Self-compensation limit reached. aid: Optical gunsight. Two-digit display. Alarm local red LED and remote alarm. Trouble local yellow LED and remote trouble. Normal local flashing green LED. features: sensitivity test filter (BEAM1224S only, requires exter- power supply). Sensitivity filter (incremental scale on reflector). alignment mode. initial alignment. signal strength indication. 08/26/2009 Page 1 of 2 Listings and Approvals listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in document. In some cases, certain modules or applications not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may in process. Con

BEAM355 and BEAM355S Reflected-Type Beam Smoke Detectors FireLite BEAM355 and BEAM355S are reflected beam smoke detectors for protecting areas with high and sloping ceilings, and wide-open where spot-type smoke detectors are difficult to install maintain. applications are atriums, cathedral aircraft hangars, warehouses, sporting arenas, halls, and enclosed parking facilities. They are with the MS-9600 Series and MS9200 Series in or CLIP mode. Installation of the single-ended design is much quicker than a dual-ended projected detector. Alignment is easily accomplished with an sight and a two-digit signal strength meter incorporated the beam detector. Listed for operation from to the BEAM355 and BEAM355S are usable in open area where temperature extremes exceed the design of other types of smoke detection. BEAM355 and BEAM355S are a transmitter/receiver unit a reflector. When smoke enters the area between the unit the reflector it causes a reduction in the signal strength. threshold, an alarm is activated. The detectors four standard sensitivity selections as well as two settings. When either Acclimate setting is detector advanced software algorithms adjust to the optimum sensitivity for the specific BEAM355S has an integral sensitivity test feature of a attached to a servomotor inside the detector optics. of the RTS151 or RTS151KEY remote test stations the filter into the pathway of the light beam, testing the sensitivity. This sensitivity test feature allows the to quickly and easily meet the annual maintenance and requirements of NFPA 72, without physical access to the The servomotor must be powered by +24 VDC, not power. strength) smoke Listed to UL 268, ULC CAN/ULC S529. Transmitter/receiver built into same unit. Six user-selectable sensitivity levels. 16 to 328 (use BEAMLRK beyond 230 protection range. Removable plug-in terminal blocks. Digital display no special tools required. Built-in automatic gain control compensates for signal dete- from dust buildup. Optional remote test station. Optional long-range kit (BEAMLRK) for applications in of 230 (70 m). Optional multi-mount kit (BEAMMMK) providing ceiling or mount capability with increased angular adjustment. Optional heater kits (BEAMHK and BEAMHKR) of condensation (not intended to increase or the specified operating temperature). Paintable cover. E-270 Devices Plate SPECIFICATIONS Range: 16 to 230 feet (5 to 70 m), 230 to 328 feet to 100 m) using optional BEAMLRK kit. Angle: horizontal and vertical. Note that optics move independently of the unit. (6 levels): Sensitivity settings are a feature of specific control panels. Level 1 25%. Level 2 30%. Level 3 40%. Level 4 50%. Acclimate Level 5 30% to 50%. Acclimate Level 6 40% to 50%. Condition (trouble): 96% or more obscuration blockage. Self-compensation limit reached. Aid: Optical gunsight. Two-digit display. Alarm local red LED and remote alarm. Trouble local yellow LED and remote trouble. Normal local flashing green LED. alignment mode. initial alignment. signal strength indication. 11/16/09 Page 1 of 4 features: sensitivity test filter (BEAM355S only, requires power supply). Sensitivity filter (incremental scale on reflector). Local alarm test switch. Local alarm reset switch.

inSTAllATion AnD MAinTEnAncE inSTRucTionS BEAM355S Single-ended Type Projected Beam Smoke Detector FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 Time: Conditions: Features: 7 Operation: Weight: Size: Angle: Trim Ring: to 230 Feet (5 to 70m) to 328 Feet (70 to 100m) using optional accessory BEAMLRK to 50% Total Obscuration in 6 levels Level 1 = 25% Level 2 = 30% Level 3 = 40% Level 4 = 50% Level 5 = 30% to 50% (Acclimate) Level 6 = 40% to 50% (Acclimate) to 60 Feet (9.1 to 18.3m) – 20 seconds typical; TROUBLE: – 30 seconds typical Blockage (96% or More Obscuration) Initial Alignment limit reached (service needed) Alignment mode Sensitivity Test Filter (BEAM355S only, requires additional external power supply) Filter (Incremental scale on reflector) Alarm Test Switch Alarm Reset Switch Test and Reset Switch Capability – Remote Output, Local LED (red); – Remote Output, Local LED (yellow), Blink Pattern Indicates Trouble Diagnostics OPERATION – Local LED (flashing green with communication) AIDS – Optical Gunsight (coarse adjustment), 00 to 99 Digital Display (fine adjustment) – Digital Display Readout in Percent Obscuration isolators provide style 7 operation. (may be disabled via shunts on circuit board) to 131 ( to 55 NOTE: for applications below 32 (0 see Special Applications section of this manual. to 93% RH Non-condensing lbs. (1.77 kg) 10.5 6.5 (381mm 267mm 165mm) only without optional accessories Terminal Blocks (12 to 22AWG) Horizontal and Vertical be painted using enamel or acrylic type paints Current: Supply (BEAM355S only): Output (alarm) to 32 VDC Standby – Alarm (LED on): Trouble (LED on): Alignment: – 15 to 32 VDC – 0.5A Max. – 15 to 32 VDC; NOTE: Output voltage same as device input voltage. – 15mA maximum; 6mA minimum; NOTE: Output current is limited by 2.2Kohm resistor Max. (1 communication every 5 sec. LED flashing, SLC @ 24 V) Max. Max. Max. DEScRiPTion Model BEAM355/BEAM355S is a long range projected beam smoke designed to provide open area protection. It is to be used with UL- compatible control panels only. The detector consists of a transmitter/ unit and a reflector. Smoke entering the area between the transmit- and reflector causes a reduction in signal. When the obscuration alarm thresholds (chosen at the transmitter/receiver unit), the de- generates an alarm signal. Complete blockage of the beam causes a signal. Slow changes in obscuration due to a build up of dirt or dust the lens of the detector are compensated for by a microcontroller that con- monitors the signal strength and periodically updates the alarm and thresholds. When the self-compensation circuit reaches its limit, the generates a trouble signal, indicating the need for service. LEDs on the detector indicate the current status: a red LED for alarm, a LED for trouble, and a blinking green LED for standby operation. Note: panel controls the status of the red and green LEDs. The local reset but- is accessible by removing the outer paintable trim ring. The yellow LED blink in specific patterns to provide a diagnostic aid when diagnosing the of a trouble signal. It will also blink the amount of drift compensation has been used at the conclusion of the test. Trouble signals automati- reset upon removing the cause of trouble. Red and yellow LEDs can be connected to the remote Alarm and Trouble outputs. These outputs the functions of the detector red and yellow LEDs. In addition to these there is a dual digital display that reads 00 to 99. This display is to indicate the signal strength of the beam in alignment mode and to the sensitivity setting of the detector in percent obscuration when the

inSTAllATion AnD MAinTEnAncE inSTRucTionS BEAM355SA Reflected Type Beam Smoke Detector FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 Time: Conditions: Features: 7 Operation: to 230 Feet (5 to 70m); 230 to 328 Feet (70 to 100m) using optional accessory BEAMLRK to 50% Total Obscuration in 6 levels Level 1 = 25% Level 2 = 30% Level 3 = 40% Level 4 = 50% Level 5 = 30% to 50% (Acclimate) Level 6 = 40% to 50% (Acclimate) to 60 Feet (9.1 to 18.3m) – 20 seconds typical; TROUBLE – 30 seconds typical Blockage (96% or More Obscuration) Initial Alignment limit reached (service needed) Alignment mode Sensitivity Test Filter (BEAM355SA only, requires additional external power supply) Filter (Incremental scale on reflector) Alarm Test Switch Alarm Reset Switch Test and Reset Switch Capability (compatible with RTS451/RTS451KEYA) – Remote Output, Local LED (red) – Remote Output, Local LED (yellow); Blink Pattern Indicates Trouble Diagnostics OPERATION – Local LED (flashing green with communication) AIDS – Optical Gunsight (coarse adjustment); 00 to 99 Digital Display (fine adjustment) – Digital Display Readout in Percent Obscuration isolators provide style 7 operation. (may be disabled via shunts on circuit board) to 131 ( to 55 NOTE: for applications below 32 (0 see Special Applications section of this manual. to 93% RH Noncondensing Weight: Size: Angle: Trim Ring: Current: Supply (BEAM355SA only): Output: (alarm) lbs. (1.77 kg) 10.5 6.5 (381mm 267mm 165mm) only without optional accessories Terminal Blocks (12 to 22AWG) Horizontal and Vertical be painted using enamel or acrylic type paints – 15 to 32 VDC Standby: Alarm (LED on): Trouble (LED on): Alignment: 0.5A Max. 15mA maximum; 6mA minimum; NOTE: Output current is limited by 2.2Kohm resistor Max. (1 communication every 5 sec., LED flashing, SLC @ 24 V) Max. Max. Max. to 32 VDC; NOTE: Output voltage same as device input voltage. to 32 VDC DEScRiPTion Model BEAM355A/BEAM355SA is a long range projected beam detector designed to provide open area protection. It is to be used ULC-listed compatible control panels only. The detector consists of a unit and a reflector. Smoke entering the area between the and reflector causes a reduction in signal. When the ob- reaches alarm thresholds (chosen at the transmitter/receiver unit), detector generates an alarm signal. Complete blockage of the beam causes trouble signal. Slow changes in obscuration due to a build up of dirt or dust the lens of the detector are compensated for by a microcontroller that con- monitors the signal strength and periodically updates the alarm and thresholds. When the self-compensation circuit reaches its limit, the generates a trouble signal, indicating the need for service. LEDs on the detector indicate the current status: a red LED for alarm, a LED for trouble, and a blinking green LED for standby operation. Note: panel controls the status of the red and green LEDs. The local reset but- is accessible by removing the outer paintable trim ring. The yellow LED blink in specific patterns to provide a diagnostic aid when diagnosing the of a trouble signal. It will also blink the amount of drift compensation has been used at the conclusion of the test. Trouble signals automati- reset upon removing the cause of trouble. Red and yellow LEDs can be connected to the remote Alarm and Trouble outputs. These outputs the functions of the detector red and yellow LEDs. In addition to these there is a dual digital display that reads 00 to 99. This display is to indicate the signal strength of the beam in alignment mode and to the sensitivity setting of the detector in percent obscuration when

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Kit for use with Reflective Projected Beam Smoke Detectors Ohio Avenue, St. Charles, Illinois 60174 FAX: 630/377-6495 This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. 1. CEILINg MOUNT BRACKET ASSEMBLy: DESCRIPTION BEAMMMK allows reflected beam detectors and reflectors to be mounted either a vertical wall or the ceiling. The kit allows for additional alignment in cases where the detector and reflector cannot be mounted within of each other. The kit includes the hardware necessary to mount either single transmitter/receiver unit or a single reflector. (To mount the trans- the surface mount kit, BEAMSMK, must also be used). If the and the reflector require additional alignment range two are required. The kit is not compatible with the long-range reflector kit kit includes the following parts: bracket bracket mount bracket inside mount bracket outside Description Wall mount bracket Horizontal adjustment screw (ceiling) #10-24 2 1/4 Horizontal adjustment screw (wall) #10-24 13/8 Washer plastic #10 Washer metal #10 Washer metal split-lock #10 Hex nut #10-24 screw #10-24 1/2 screw #10-24 5/8 washer plastic washer metal wrench BRACKETS a ceiling or wall bracket so that when mounted, the transmitter/re- and the reflector will have a clear line of sight between them. ceiling bracket is composed of two parts that should be assembled with inside part between the ceiling and the outside part as shown in Figure 1. brackets should be mounted so that the slot in the front of each bracket facing the other bracket. Mount the brackets only on solid structures of the To avoid unwanted alarms due to wall movement, do not mount to walls, such as sheet metal walls (see Mounting Locations section of transmitter/receiver manual for more details). IN FRONT BRACKET AND WIRINg INSTRUCTIONS: BEAMSMK accessory must be used with the transmitter/receiver to pro- wiring entry. Refer to Figures 2 through 4 for this step. Read the installation instructions of the beam detector to determine the size and number of wires to be used. Drill the appropriate holes for the flexible conduit using the drill centers on either the sides or the back of the surface mount base. See 2 for details. Note that the top of the surface mount base contains bosses for the brackets used in the next step. Conduit sizes 1/2 or 3/4 are acceptable. Assemble the brackets to the surface mount base using the two #10- 5/8 screws and two #10 split-lock washers provided. See Figure 3 for The screws should be fully tightened. Assemble the bracket to the brackets using the two #10-24 screws and fender washers provided. See Figure 3 for details. The bracket should be assembled to the brackets so that the words NOT PAINT appear in the front of the assembly. Tighten the screws almost snug. The assembly should tilt freely in either direction. The will be fully tightened later when the alignment is performed. Insert the flange of the bracket into the keyed hole of the wall or ceil- mount bracket. Slide the bracket forward into position. The surface base should now hang from the bracket. Insert the correct screw and washer combination (either wall or ceil- mount) through the slot and into the hole of the mounting bracket Tighten the screw until almost snug. The assembly should still freely in both directions. The screw will be fully tightened later the alignment is performed. Pull the wiring and the flexible conduit through the drilled hole(s). At- nut(s) (not included) to conduit fitting and tighten. Be sure to leave enough wire to reach the transmitter/receiver unit attached to the su

Note: The switch rating is 3 amps @ 30 Volts AC/DC Denotes solder connection BG-10L, BG-10WP, HR-10, AR-10F Series Pull Station Installation Drawing 15486 Rev: F 9/04/96 ECN 96-323 contact for functions control panel loop output control panel loop output next device or ELR control panel loop output next device or ELR terminal block tests – or to circuit operated). control panel loop output next device or ELR next device or ELR BG-10 Series Pull Stations are non-coded, dual-action, normally-open manual pull stations with the following options: (with AUX. switch); BG-10L (with key for reset); BG-10P/T (with key for presignal or test); BG-10N (without terminal BG-10WP (BG-10 enclosed in a weatherproof backbox); HR 10 (Halon Release, with wiring the same as the BG-10); (Agent Release, with wiring the same as the BG-10). Series Operation the dual-action door is pushed in and the handle pulled down, the N.O. push-type switches will close. The handle cannot restored to its normal position until the station is manually reset by unscrewing the hex screw and pivoting the case away from the backplate. When the handle is restored, return the case to its normal position and secure with the screw. Note: The BG-10L utilizes a mechanical key instead of a hex screw. The microswitch of the BG-10P/T is activated rotating a key clockwise. The key cannot be removed while in this position. Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 203-484-7161 203-484-7118

BG-10WP Outdoor Pull Station INSTALLATION DRAWING 15452 Revision D ECN 00-236 04/24/00 Pipe Plug (3/4-14 THD) on top or bottom.) dimples provided as hole starters mounting backbox to wall supplied by customer) Procedure Mount outdoor backbox to pipe (top or bottom). Remove paper backing from and secure to backbox. Connect wires from conduit to station terminal block. Attach pull station using supplied with WP-10. Station to fasten pull station to the (Supplied the WP-10) With Rear-access Conduit the installation requires running conduit through rear of the backbox, drill a new access hole and the unused holes on top & bottom. Use UL plugs or ones similar to the one supplied. UL requirements, this hole must be located the raised lettering will not be damaged. is a space of 1.875 in. (47.625 mm) avail- between the lettering and the lower edge of backbox. UL Listed Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Fittings (Category Control Number are suitable for use with these backboxes. location for rear-access hole size 1.875 in., 47.625 mm) 15452, Revision D

No text preview available.

Wiring + NEXT IDC Pull Station 50964-1 Manual Pull Station U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; 6,314,772; Other Patents Pending 50964-1 GAUGE 2 3 4 BG-12 pull station is a non-coded, dual-action manual pull station with a hex-lock reset It provides Fire control panels with one normally open (N/O) alarm initiating The BG-12 meets the ADAAG controls and operating mechanisms guidelines (sec- 4.1.3[13]), and the ADA requirement for a 5 lb. maximum pull force to activate the pull Operating instructions are molded into the pull station handle along with Braille Molded Terminal numbers are also present. contact (N/O) is gold plated for reliability and rated at 0.25 A at 30 volts (AC or BG-12 pull station can be surface mounted to an SB-10 or SB-I/O surface backbox or mounted on a standard single-gang, double-gang or 4 (10.16 cm) square electrical The optional BG-TR trim ring can be used if the BG-12 is to be semi-flush mounted. activate the dual-action pull station, push in and pull down on the handle. The word appears after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull sta- is reset. pull station includes one Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST) Normally Open (N/O) which closes upon activation of the pull station. the Pull Station To reset the BG-12 hex lock pull station, insert the supplied 9/64-inch hex wrench into lock until firmly seated and turn counterclockwise 1/4-turn. Open the door until the handle returns to normal. Close and lock the door. Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the position. Open- the door will not activate or deactivate the alarm switch. DO NOT LOOP WIRING ANY TERMINALS. BREAK WIRE TO MAINTAIN IDC SUPERVISION. Do not loop wiring under any Break wire run to IDC supervision. Do not detach the door of the pull station during installation. The door of pull station cannot be reattached to the backplate after the backplate has already been onto an electrical box. the Fire BG-12 pull station in accordance with these instructions, NFPA standards, national and local Fire and Electrical codes and the requirements the AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the devices should be con- in accordance with the appropriate NFPA standards. Failure to follow these directions result in failure of the device to report an alarm condition. Fire is not responsible for that have been improperly installed, tested or maintained. Compliance ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows forward approach to an object, the forward reach height allowed is 48 inches (121.92 cm). If the clear floor space parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is inches (137.16 cm). Estaci Pulsadora Manual U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; 6,314,772; Other Patents Pending 50964-1 estaci pulsadora BG-12 es una estaci no c y de doble acci manual con la de reajuste de una cerradura hexagonal. Esta provee a los paneles de control Fire-Lite con una alarma de iniciaci de entrada normalmente abierta (N/O). El BG-12 las normas de control y funcionamiento de la ADAAG ( secci 4.1.3 [13] ) y los de ADA para que la estaci pulsadora sea activada con una fuerza de jale m 5 libras. Las instrucciones de funcionamiento estan moldeadas en la manija (manubrio) al texto Braille. Los n moldeados de las terminales tambi estan presentes. de Contacto del Interruptor contacto del interruptor (N/O) es oro plateado para la confiabilidad y clasificado en 0.25 A 30 voltios (AV o DC). estaci pulsadora BG-12 puede ser montada en la superficie del respaldo de un SB-10 o un esta tambi puede ser semi-montada en una caja el cuadrada ya sea individual doble de 4 (10.16 cm). El anillo opcional (BG-TR) puede ser usado si el BG-12 va a ser

BG-12 Series Fire Alarm Pull Stations Fire BG-12 Series is a cost-effective, feature-packed of non-coded manual fire alarm pull stations. It was to meet multiple applications with the installer and in mind. The BG-12 Series features a variety of mod- including single- and dual-action versions. BG-12 Series provides Fire Alarm Control Panels as well as other manufacturers controls, with a man- alarm initiating input signal. Its innovative design, durable and multiple mounting options make the BG-12 simple to install, maintain, and operate. Aesthetically pleasing, highly visible design and color. Attractive contoured shape and light textured finish. Meets ADA 5 lb. maximum pull-force. Meets UL 38, Standard for Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. Easily operated(single- or dual-action), yet designed to pre- false alarms when bumped, shaken, or jarred. PUSH IN/PULL DOWN handle latches in the down position to indicate the station has been operated. The word appears on top of the handle in yellow, further indicating operation of the station. Operation handle features white arrows showing basic opera- direction for non-English-speaking persons. Braille text included on finger-hold area of operation handle across top of handle. Multiple hex- and key-lock models available. U.S. patented hex-lock needs only a quarter-turn to lock/ Station can be opened for inspection and maintenance with- initiating an alarm. Product ID label viewable by simply opening the cover; label made of a durable long-life material. The words and are molded into the adjacent to the alarm switch (located inside). Four-position terminal strip molded into backplate. Terminal strip includes Phillips combination-head captive 8/32 for easy connection to Initiating Device Circuit (IDC). Terminal screws backed-out at factory and shipped ready to field wiring (up to 12 AWG/3.1 mm Terminal numbers are molded into the backplate, eliminating need for labels. Switch contacts are normally open. Can be surface-mounted (with SB-10 or SB-I/O) or semi- mounted. Semi-flush mount to a standard single-gang, or 4″ (10.16 cm) square electrical box. Backplate is large enough to overlap a single-gang backbox by 1/2″ (1.27 cm). Optional trim ring (BG12TR). Spanish versions (FUEGO) available (BG-12LSP, BG-12LPSP). Designed to replace the Fire legacy BG-10 Series. Models packaged in attractive, clear plastic (PVC), clam- Point-of-Purchase packages. Packaging includes cutaway dust/paint cover in shape of pull station. (cid:129) F-050 Initiating Devices Cover, backplate and operation handle are all molded of polycarbonate material. Cover features white lettering and trim. Red color matches System Sensor popular SpectrAlert horn/strobe series. BG-12 manual pull stations provide a textured finger-hold that includes Braille text. In addition to PUSH IN and PULL text, there are arrows indicating how to operate the sta- provided for non-English-speaking people. in and then pulling down on the handle activates the alarm switch. Once latched in the down position, word appears at the top in bright yellow, with a of the handle protruding at the bottom as a visible flag. the station is simple: insert the key, twist one quarter- then open the station front cover, causing the spring- operation handle to return to its original position. The switch can then be reset to its normal (non-alarm) position (by hand) or by closing the station front cover, which resets the switch. 04/22/08 Page 1 of 2 SPECIFICATIONS: station inches cm) inches cm) inches cm) inches cm) inches cm)

Wiring + NEXT IDC Pull Station 50964 Manual Pull Station U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; Other Patents Pending 2 3 4 GAUGE 50964 BG-12L pull station is a non-coded, dual-action manual pull station with a key-lock feature. It provides Fire control panels with one normally open (N/O) alarm initi- input. The BG-12L meets the ADAAG controls and operating mechanisms guidelines 4.1.3[13]), and the ADA requirement for a 5 lb. maximum pull force to activate pull station. Operating instructions are molded into the pull station handle along with text. Molded Terminal numbers are also present. contact (N/O) is gold plated for reliability and rated at 0.25 A at 30 volts (AC or BG-12L pull station can be surface mounted to an SB-10 or SB-I/O surface backbox semi-flush mounted on a standard single-gang, double-gang or 4 (10.16 cm) square box. The optional BG-TR trim ring can be used if the BG-12L is to be semi-flush activate the dual-action pull station, push in and pull down on the handle. The word appears after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull sta- is reset. pull station includes one Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST) Normally Open (N/O) which closes upon activation of the pull station. the Pull Station Insert the key into the lock and rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise. Open the door until the handle returns to normal. Close and lock the door. Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the position. Opening door will not activate or deactivate the alarm switch. DO NOT LOOP WIRING ANY TERMINALS. BREAK WIRE TO MAINTAIN IDC SUPERVISION. Do not loop wiring under any Break wire run to IDC supervision. Do not detach the door of the pull station during installation. The door of pull station cannot be reattached to the backplate after the backplate has already been onto an electrical box. the Fire BG-12L pull station in accordance with these instructions, NFPA standards, national and local Fire and Electrical codes and the requirements the AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the devices should be con- in accordance with the appropriate NFPA standards. Failure to follow these directions result in failure of the device to report an alarm condition. Fire is not responsible for that have been improperly installed, tested or maintained. Compliance ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows forward approach to an object, the forward reach height allowed is 48 inches (121.92 cm). If the clear floor space parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is inches (137.16 cm). + EL IDC 2 3 4 GAUGE Estaci Pulsadora Manual U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; Other Patents Pending 50964 estaci pulsadora BG-12L es una estaci no c y de doble acci manual con caracter de reajuste de una cerradura de llave. Esta provee a los paneles de control Fire-Lite con una alarma de iniciaci de entrada normalmente abierta (N/O). El BG-12L las normas de control y funcionamiento de la ADAAG ( seccion 4.1.3 [13] ) y los de ADA para que la estaci pulsadora sea activada con una fuerza de jale m 5 libras. Las instrucciones de funcionamiento estan moldeadas en la manija (manubrio) al texto Braille. Los n moldeados de las terminales tambien estan presentes. de Contacto del Interruptor contacto del interruptor (N/O) es oro plateado para la confiabilidad y clasificado en 0.25 en 30 voltios (AV o DC). estaci pulsadora BG-12L puede ser montada en la superficie del respaldo de un SB- o un SB-1/O; esta tambi puede ser semi-montada en una caja el cuadrada ya individual o doble de 4 (10.16 cm). El anillo opcional (BG-TR) puede ser usado si el

Wiring FACP + To Next Device IDC Contact Contact Pull Station 51381 Manual Pull Station U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; Other Patents Pending 51381 2 3 4 BG-12LA pull station is a non-coded, dual-action manual pull station with a key-lock feature. It provides Fire control panels with one normally open (N/O) alarm initiat- input. A second set of contacts is rated up to 3 Amps at 30 V (AC or DC) for auxiliary The BG-12LA meets the ADAAG controls and operating mechanisms guidelines 4.1.3[13]), and the ADA requirement for a 5 lb. maximum pull force to activate pull station. Operating instructions are molded into the pull station handle along with text. Molded Terminal numbers are also present. Circuit (Terminals 1 & 2): to .25 Amp at 30 Volts (AC or DC). Contact Circuit (Terminals 3 & 4): to 3 Amps at 30 Volts (AC or DC). BG-12LA pull station can be surface mounted to an SB-10 or SB-I/O surface backbox semi-flush mounted on a standard single-gang, double-gang or 4 (10.16 cm) square box. The optional BG-TR trim ring can be used if the BG-12LA is to be semi- mounted. activate the dual-action pull station, push in and pull down on the handle. The word appears after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull sta- is reset. pull station includes one Double Pole, Double Throw (DPDT) Normally Open (N/O) which closes upon activation of the pull station. the Pull Station Insert the key into the lock and rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise. Open the door until the handle returns to normal. Close and lock the door. Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the position. Open- the door will not activate or deactivate the alarm switch. Do not loop wiring under any Break wire run to IDC supervision. Do not detach the door of the pull station during installation. The door of pull station cannot be reattached to the backplate after the backplate has already been onto an electrical box. the Fire BG-12LA pull station in accordance with these instructions, NFPA standards, national and local Fire and Electrical codes and the requirements the AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the devices should be con- in accordance with the appropriate NFPA standards. Failure to follow these directions result in failure of the device to report an alarm condition. Fire is not responsible for that have been improperly installed, tested or maintained. Compliance ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows forward approach to an object, the forward reach height allowed is 48 inches (121.92 cm). If the clear floor space parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is inches (137.16 cm).

BG-12LAO/-12LAOB Manual Pull Station U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; Other Patents Pending 51877 BG-12LAO/-12LAOB pull station is a non-coded, dual-action manual pull station with a key-lock reset feature, an approved outdoor gasket, and an accompanying Outdoor Backbox. It provides Fire control panels with one normally open (N/O) initiating input. A second set of contacts is rated up to 3 Amps at 30 V (AC or DC) for functions. The BG-12LAO/-12LAOB meets the ADAAG controls and operating guidelines (section 4.1.3[13]), and the ADA requirement for a 5 lb. maximum force to activate the pull station. Operating instructions are molded into the pull station along with Braille text. Molded Terminal numbers are also present. To meet UL requirements for outdoor use, the BG-12LAO pull station must be to the SB-I/O backbox to create the BG-12LAOB model. The BG-12LAO, the WP-10 backbox, is UL approved in retrofit applications. Circuit (Terminals 1 & 2): Rated to .25 Amp at 30 Volts (AC or DC). Contact Circuit (Terminals 3 & 4): Rated to 3 Amps at 30 Volts (AC or DC). switch contacts (N/O) are sealed and gold plated for reliability. supplied Outdoor Backbox (SB-I/O) is surface mounted using the incorporated mount- bosses. The backbox can be positioned to allow conduit connection from any side and pull station will mount in any position. activate the dual-action pull station, push in and pull down on the handle. The word appears after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull sta- is reset. pull station includes one Double Pole, Double Throw (DPDT) Normally Open (N/O) which closes upon activation of the pull station. the Pull Station Insert the key into the lock and rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise. Open the door until the handle returns to normal. Close and lock the door. Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the position. Open- the door will not activate or deactivate the alarm switch. FACP + To Next Device IDC Contact Contact Pull Station 51877 Gasket not cover any connections) Do not loop wiring under any Break wire run to IDC supervision. Do not detach the door of the pull station during installation. The door of pull station cannot be reattached to the backplate after the backplate has already been onto an electrical box. the Fire BG-12LAO/-12LAOB pull station in accordance with these instructions, NFPA standards, national and local Fire and Electrical codes and the requirements the AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the devices should be con- in accordance with the appropriate NFPA standards. Failure to follow these directions result in failure of the device to report an alarm condition. Fire is not responsible for that have been improperly installed, tested or maintained. Compliance ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows forward approach to an object, the forward reach height allowed is 48 inches (121.92 cm). If the clear floor space parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is inches (137.16 cm).

Wiring FACP + Next IDC Pull Station 51378 To meet UL requirements for outdoor use, the BG-12LO pull station must be to the SB-I/O backbox to create the BG-12LOB model. The BG-12LO, with the backbox, is UL approved in retrofit applications. Gasket not cover any connections) Do not loop wiring under any Break wire run to IDC supervision. Manual Pull Station for Outdoor Applications) U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; Other Patents Pending 51378 BG-12LO and BG-12LOB pull stations are non-coded, dual-action manual pull stations a key-lock reset feature, an approved outdoor gasket, and an accompanying outdoor (BG-12LOB only). They provide Fire control panels with one normally open alarm initiating input. The BG-12LO/-12LOB meet the ADAAG controls and operating guidelines (section 4.1.3[13]), and the ADA requirement for a 5 lb. maximum force to activate the pull station. Operating instructions are molded into the pull station along with Braille text. Molded terminal numbers are also present. gold plated switch contact (N/O) is sealed for reliability and rated at 0.25 A at 30 volts or DC). supplied Outdoor Backbox (SB-I/O) is surface mounted using the incorporated mount- bosses. The backbox can be positioned to allow conduit from any side and the pull will mount in any position. Use the (4) screws provided to mount the pull station the backbox. activate the dual-action pull station, push in and pull down on the handle. The word appears after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull sta- is reset. pull station includes one Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST) Normally Open (N/O) which closes upon activation of the pull station. the Pull Station Insert the key into the lock and rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise. Open the door until the handle returns to normal. Close and lock the door. Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the position. Open- the door will not activate or deactivate the alarm switch. Do not detach the door of the pull station during installation. The door of pull station cannot be reattached to the backplate after the backplate has already been onto an electrical box. the Fire BG-12LO/-12LOB pull stations in accordance with these instructions, NFPA standards, national and local Fire and Electrical codes and the requirements the AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the devices should be con- in accordance with the appropriate NFPA standards. Failure to follow these directions result in failure of the device to report an alarm condition. Fire is not responsible for that have been improperly installed, tested or maintained. Compliance ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows forward approach to an object, the forward reach height allowed is 48 inches (121.92 cm). If the clear floor space parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is inches (137.16 cm).

Wiring Next Pre-Signal + on IDC FACP + IDC To Next Device on General Alarm IDC From FACP General Alarm IDC Pull Station 51479 Manual Pull Station U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; 6,632,108 2 3 4 51479 GAUGE BG-12LPS pull station is a non-coded, dual-action manual pull station with a key-lock reset It provides Fire control panels with two (2) normally open (N/O) alarm initiating signals. input is activated by pushing in, then pulling down the dual action A alarm input signal can be manually activated via a momentary rocker switch inside the unit. This general alarm switch can only be accessed by opening the cover the supplied key/lock. BG-12LPS meets the ADAAG controls and operating mechanisms guidelines (section and the ADA requirement for a 5 lb. maximum pull force to activate the pull station. instructions are molded into the pull station handle along with Braille text. Molded numbers are also present. contacts (N/O) are gold plated for reliability and rated at 0.25 A at 30 volts (AC or BG-12LPS pull station can be surface mounted to an SB-10 or SB-I/O surface backbox semi-flush mounted on a standard double-gang or 4 (10.16 cm) square electrical box. The BG-TR trim ring can be used if the BG-12LPS is to be semi-flush mounted. activate the dual-action pull station, push in and pull down on the handle. The word appears after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull station reset. pull station includes two independently operated Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST) Normally (N/O) Switches for pre-signal/ general alarm applications. the Pull Station Insert the key into the lock and rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise. Open the door until the handle returns to normal. Close and lock the door. Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the position. Opening the will not activate or deactivate the pre-signal toggle switch. Do not loop wiring under any Break wire run to IDC supervision. PRODUCT FOR O R M A L General Do not detach the door of the pull station installation. The door of the pull station cannot be to the backplate after the backplate has already installed onto an electrical box. n s t a l l t h e F i r e L i t e B G – 1 2 L P S p u l l s t a- in accordance with these instructions, NFPA standards, national and local Fire Electrical codes and the requirements of the AHJ Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the should be conducted in accordance with the NFPA standards. Failure to follow these may result in failure of the device to report alarm condition. Fire is not responsible for that have been improperly installed, tested or Compliance ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows approach to an object, the maximum forward height allowed is 48 inches (121.92 cm). If the floor space allows parallel approach by a person a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is 54 (137.16 cm). de Contacto del Interruptor contactos del interruptor (N/O) son oro plateado para la confiabilidad y clasificado en 0.25 A en voltios (AV o DC). Pulsadora Manual 51479 No entrelazar cableado por de las terminales. Cortar los cables mantener supervisi en IDC. Estaci Pulsadora Manual U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; 6,632,108 51479 estaci pulsadora BG-12LSP es una estaci no c y de doble acci manual con la de reajuste de una cerradura de llave. Esta provee a los paneles de control de Fire-Lite dos se

Wiring Next Pre-Signal + on IDC FACP + IDC To Next Device on General Alarm IDC From FACP General Alarm IDC Pull Station 51479-1 Manual Pull Station U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; 6,632,108 2 3 4 51479-1 GAUGE BG-12LPSP pull station is a non-coded, dual-action manual pull station with a key-lock feature, and dual language (Spanish/English) labeling and operating instructions. It provides control panels with two (2) normally open (N/O) alarm initiating input signals. input is activated by pushing in, then pulling down the dual action handle. A input signal can be manually activated via a momentary rocker switch mounted inside unit. This general alarm switch can only be accessed by opening the cover with the supplied BG-12LPSP meets the ADAAG controls and operating mechanisms guidelines (section and the ADA requirement for a 5 lb. maximum pull force to activate the pull station. Terminal numbers are also present. Do not loop wiring under any Break wire run to IDC supervision. contacts (N/O) are gold plated for reliability and rated at 0.25 A at 30 volts (AC or BG-12LPSP pull station can be surface mounted to an SB-10 or SB-I/O surface backbox semi-flush mounted on a standard double-gang or 4 (10.16 cm) square electrical box. The BG-TR trim ring can be used if the BG-12LPSP is to be semi-flush mounted. activate the dual-action pull station, push in and pull down on the handle. The word appears after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull station reset. pull station includes two independently operated Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST) Normally (N/O) Switches for pre-signal/ general alarm applications. the Pull Station Insert the key into the lock and rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise. Open the door until the handle returns to normal. Close and lock the door. Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the position. Opening the will not activate or deactivate the pre-signal toggle switch. General PRODUCT FOR O R M A L Do not detach the door of the pull station installation. The door of the pull station cannot be to the backplate after the backplate has already installed onto an electrical box. n s t a l l t h e F i r e L i t e B G – 1 2 L P S P p u l l s t a- in accordance with these instructions, NFPA standards, national and local Fire Electrical codes and the requirements of the AHJ Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the should be conducted in accordance with the NFPA standards. Failure to follow these may result in failure of the device to report alarm condition. Fire is not responsible for that have been improperly installed, tested or Compliance ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows approach to an object, the maximum forward height allowed is 48 inches (121.92 cm). If the floor space allows parallel approach by a person a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is 54 (137.16 cm). de Contacto del Interruptor contactos del interruptor (N/O) son oro plateado para la confiabilidad y clasificado en 0.25 A en voltios (AV o DC). Pulsadora Manual 51479-1 No entrelazar cableado por de las terminales. Cortar los cables mantener supervisi en IDC. Estaci Pulsadora Manual U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; 6,632,108 51479-1 estaci pulsadora BG-12LSP es una estaci no c y de doble acci manual con la de reajuste de una cerradura de llave, la cual incluye un duo de lengua (Espa

Wiring + NEXT IDC Release Pull Station 51370 and BG-12LRA Agent Release Pull Station U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; Other Patents Pending 2 3 4 GAUGE 51370 BG-12LR and BG-12LRA Agent Release Pull Stations are designed for use with control panels that include releasing capabilities. These stations are ideally suited areas such as clean rooms and computer rooms, where a chemical agent is used to extin- a fire. Both pull stations provide a dual-action, normally open contact (N/O), release point with a key-lock reset feature. The BG-12LRA also includes a manual abort System Normal LED, and System Activated (release) LED. Both stations meet the controls and operating mechanisms guidelines (section 4.1.3[13]), and the ADA for a 5 lb. maximum pull force to activate the pull station. Operating instructions molded into the pull station handle along with Braille text. Molded terminal numbers also present. contact (N/O) is gold plated for reliability and rated at 0.25 A at 30 volts (AC or BG-12LR pull station can be surface mounted to an SB-10 or SB-I/O surface backbox semi-flush mounted on a standard single-gang, double-gang or 4 (10.16 cm) square box. The optional BG-TR trim ring can be used if the BG-12LR is to be semi-flush The BG-12LRA must be surface-mounted to a SBA-10 backbox. initiate an agent release, push in and pull down on the handle. The word after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull station is reset. pull station includes one Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST) Normally Open (N/O) which closes upon activation of the pull station. the Pull Station Insert the key into the lock and rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise. Open the door until the handle returns to normal. Close and lock the door. Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the position. Open- the door will not activate or deactivate the alarm switch. DO NOT LOOP WIRING ANY TERMINALS. BREAK WIRE TO MAINTAIN IDC SUPERVISION. Do not loop wiring under any Break wire run to IDC supervision. Do not detach the door of the pull station during installation. The door of pull station cannot be reattached to the backplate after the backplate has already been onto an electrical box. the Fire BG-12LR and BG-12LRA pull station in accordance with these instructions, NFPA standards, national and local Fire and Electrical codes and the requirements the AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the devices should be con- in accordance with the appropriate NFPA standards. Failure to follow these directions result in failure of the device to report an alarm condition. Fire is not responsible for that have been improperly installed, tested or maintained. Compliance ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows forward approach to an object, the forward reach height allowed is 48 inches (121.92 cm). If the clear floor space parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is inches (137.16 cm). agent release control panel release circuit or previous release initiating device To next agent release device or ELR last device on circuit 2 3 4 GAUGE Feature (BG-12LRA only) operation and reset of the BG-12LRA agent release pull station is the same as the BG-12LR, the addition of the Abort Feature: The System Normal LED will stay illuminated when the Release Control Panel is Systems Normal. When the station has been activated, ini- the agent release process in the control panel, the System Activated LED will illuminate. the control panel has been configured to abort the releasing of an extinguishing agent, pushing and holding-in the abort switch will cancel the agent release sequence. Please to the respective agent release control panel manual for further instructions about us- the Abort feature. Plate Wiring (BG-12LRA only)

No text preview available.

Wiring + NEXT IDC Pull Station 50964-3 Manual Pull Station U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; Other Patents Pending 2 3 4 GAUGE 50964-3 BG-12LSP pull station is a non-coded, dual-action manual pull station with a key-lock feature and dual language (Spanish/English) labeling and operating instructions. It Fire control panels with one normally open (N/O) alarm initiating input. BG-12LSP meets the ADAAG controls and operating mechanisms guidelines (section and the ADA requirement for a 5 lb. maximum pull force to activate the pull Molded Terminal numbers are also present. contact (N/O) is gold plated for reliability and rated at 0.25 A at 30 volts (AC or BG-12LSP pull station can be surface mounted to an SB-10 or SB-I/O surface backbox semi-flush mounted on a standard single-gang, double-gang or 4 (10.16 cm) square box. The optional BG-TR trim ring can be used if the BG-12LSP is to be semi- mounted. activate the dual-action pull station, push in and pull down on the handle. The word appears after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull sta- is reset. pull station includes one Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST) Normally Open (N/O) which closes upon activation of the pull station. the Pull Station Insert the key into the lock and rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise. Open the door until the handle returns to normal. Close and lock the door. Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the position. Open- the door will not activate or deactivate the alarm switch. DO NOT LOOP WIRING ANY TERMINALS. BREAK WIRE TO MAINTAIN IDC SUPERVISION. Do not loop wiring under any Break wire run to IDC supervision. Do not detach the door of the pull station during installation. The door of pull station cannot be reattached to the backplate after the backplate has already been onto an electrical box. the Fire BG-12LSP pull station in accordance with these instructions, NFPA standards, national and local Fire and Electrical codes and the requirements the AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the devices should be con- in accordance with the appropriate NFPA standards. Failure to follow these directions result in failure of the device to report an alarm condition. Fire is not responsible for that have been improperly installed, tested or maintained. Compliance ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows forward approach to an object, the forward reach height allowed is 48 inches (121.92 cm). If the clear floor space parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is inches (137.16 cm). + EL IDC 2 3 4 GAUGE Estaci Pulsadora Manual U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; Other Patents Pending 50964-3 estaci pulsadora BG-12LSP es una estaci no c y de doble acci manual la caracter de reajuste de una cerradura de llave, la cual incluye un duo de lengua etiquetado e Instrucciones de operaci Esta provee a los paneles de de Fire con una alarma de iniciaci de entrada normalmente abierta (N/O). El reune las normas de control y funcionamiento de la ADAAG ( secci 4.1.3 [13]) los requisitos de ADA para que la estaci pulsadora sea activada con una fuerza de jale de 5 libras. Los n moldeados de las terminales tambi est presentes. de Contacto del Interruptor contacto del interruptor (N/O) es oro plateado para la confiabilidad y clasificado en 0.25 A 30 voltios (AV o DC). estaci pulsadora BG-12LSP puede se montada en la superficie del respaldo de un SB-10 un SB-I/O; esta tambi puede ser semi-montada en una caja el cuadrada ya sea indi- o doble de 4 (10.16 cm

BG-12LX Manual Pull Station Fire BG-12LX is a state-of-the-art, dual-action (i.e., two motions to activate the station) pull station that an addressable addressable fire alarm control panels (FACPs) the BG-12LX is addressable, the control panel can the exact location of the activated manual station. This fire personnel quickly to the location of the alarm. (mounted Maintenance personnel can open station for inspection and setting without causing an alarm condition. Built-in bicolor LED, which is visible through the handle of station, flashes in normal operation and latches steady when in alarm. Handle latches in down position and the word to clearly indicate the station has been operated. Captive screw terminals wire-ready for easy connection to loop (accepts up to 12 AWG/3.25 mm wire). Can be surface mounted (with SB-10 or SB-I/O) or semi- mounted. Semi-flush mount to a standard single- double-gang, or 4″ (10.16 cm) square electrical box. Smooth dual-action design. Meets ADAAG controls and operating mechanisms guide- (Section 4.1.3[13]); meets ADA requirement for 5 lb. activation force. Highly visible. Attractive shape and textured finish. Key reset. Optional trim ring (BG12TR). Meets UL 38, Standard for Manually Actuated Signaling Braille text on station handle. door, and handle are molded of durable polycarbonate with a textured finish. Shipping Weight: 9.6 oz. (272.15 g) Normal operating voltage: 24 VDC. Maximum SLC loop voltage: 28.0 VDC. Maximum SLC standby current: 375 Maximum SLC alarm current: 5 mA. Temperature Range: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 Relative Humidity: 10% to 93% (noncondensing) For use indoors in a dry location BG-12LX will mount semi-flush into a single-gang, double- or standard 4″ (10.16 cm) square electrical outlet box, or surface mount to the model SB-10 or SB-I/O surface back- If the BG-12LX is being semi-flush mounted, then the trim ring (BG12TR) may be used. The BG12TR is E-100 Devices needed for semi-flush mounting with 4″ (10.16 cm) or boxes (not with single-gang boxes). in, then pulling down on the handle causes it to latch the down/activated position. Once latched, the word (in bright yellow) appears at the top of the handle, a portion of the handle protrudes from the bottom of the To reset the station, simply unlock the station with the and pull the door open. This action resets the handle; clos- the door automatically resets the switch. manual station, on command from the control panel, data to the panel representing the state of the manual Two rotary decimal switches allow address settings 159 with Breakaway Tab removed for MS-9600 Series, 1 and MS-9200UDLS, 1 50 for MS-9050UD). Fire Alarm Stations shall be non-coded, with a key- reset lock in order that they may be tested, and so that after actual Emergency Operation, they cannot restored to normal except by use of a key. An operated sta- shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually as activated. Manual stations shall be constructed of polycarbonate material with clearly visible operat- instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall on the front of the stations in white letters, 1.00 inches cm) or larger. Stations shall be suitable for surface on matching backbox SB-10 or SB-I/O; or semi-flush on a standard single-gang, double-gang, or (10.16 cm) square electrical box, and shall be installed 4/13/2012 Page 1 of 2 the limits defined by the Americans with Disabilities Act or per national/local requirements. Manual Stations be Underwriters Laboratories listed. stations shall connec

No text preview available.

BG-12LXSP Addressable Pull Station U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; Other Patents Pending 52148 BG-12LXSP Addressable pull station is a non-coded, dual-action manual pull station a key-lock reset feature. It also has dual language (Spanish/English) labeling and operat- instructions. It provides Fire intelligent control panels with one addressable alarm input. The addressable module is housed inside the pull station. The BG-12LXSP is with all Fire intelligent panels. The BG-12LXSP meets the ADAAG controls operating mechanisms guidelines (section 4.1.3[13]), and the ADA requirement for a 5 maximum pull force to activate the pull station. Operating instructions are molded into pull station handle along with Braille text. Molded Terminal numbers are also present. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC. Operating Current (LED Flash): 300 Range: 32 F – 120 F (0 C – 49 C). Humidity Range: 10% – 93% non-condensing. BG-12LXSP Addressable pull station can be surface mounted to an SB-10 or SB-I/O backbox or semi-flush mounted on a standard single-gang, double-gang or 4 (10.16 square electrical box. The optional BG-TR trim ring can be used if the BG-12LXSP is be semi-flush mounted. activate the dual-action pull station, push in and pull down on the handle. The word appears after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull sta- is reset. pull station includes one Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST) Normally Open (N/O) which closes upon activation of the pull station. the Pull Station Insert the key into the lock and rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise. Open the door until the handle returns to normal. Close and lock the door. Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the position. Open- the door will not activate or deactivate the alarm switch. Pull Station 52148 2 3 4 GAUGE Do not detach the door of the pull station during installation. The door of pull station cannot be reattached to the backplate after the backplate has already been onto an electrical box. the Fire BG-12LXSP addressable pull station in accordance with these instructions, NFPA standards, national and local Fire and Electrical codes and the requirements the AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the devices should be con- in accordance with the appropriate NFPA standards. Failure to follow these directions result in failure of the device to report an alarm condition. Fire is not responsible for that have been improperly installed, tested or maintained. Compliance ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows forward approach to an object, the forward reach height allowed is 48 inches (121.92 cm). If the clear floor space parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is inches (137.16 cm). for Programming information) the BG-12LXSP Address BG-12LXSP Addressable pull station is factory preset with address Set the address the pull station by turning the rotary address switches on the addressable module mounted the pull station. Only one device per address is allowed. Multiple modules may not set to the same address on the Signaling Line Circuit. Once the address is set, record it the space provided on the product ID label located inside the pull station. ADDRESS SWITCHES OPERATION RED RED LED is visible translucent Opening the station door not activate or the alarm 3 2 1 O R M A L 50997 REV-A IDENTIFICATION LABEL Approved Label Here in – 12 Series ALARM BOX TO DOCUMENT

Estaci manual de alarma, identificable, modelo BG-12LXSP de EE.UU. N 428,351; 6,380,846. Otras patentes en tr 52148 modelo BG-12LXSP es una Estaci manual de alarma de doble acci identificable y no codificada, con inter- de reposici a base de llave. Viene con etiquetas e instrucciones de uso en ingl y en espa . Genera una identificable de inicio de estado de alarma que se env a los paneles de control de alarma contra incendio BG-12LXSP cumple con las pautas de mecanismos y controles establecidos en la secci 4.1.3[13] de la Ley (para discapacitados) y tambi con la norma ADA que estipula una fuerza m de 5 libras para activar alarma. Las instrucciones de uso se encuentran estampadas en la estaci manual de alarma, adonde tambi inscripciones en Braille. Los n de terminal se encuentran moldeados en la unidad. t normal de servicio: 24 VCC promedio con LED destellando: 300 micro amperes de temperatura de servicio: 32 a 120 F (0 a 49 C) relativa ambiente: 10 a 93%, sin condensaci estaci manual de alarma BG-12LXSP se puede montar en una caja de conexiones para superficie SB-10 o o tambi a semi-ras en una caja com de conexiones, en una caja doble de conexiones o en una caja de conexiones el de 4 (10.16 cm). Para montaje a semi-ras del BG-12LXSP, se puede usar la opcional BG-TR. activar la estaci manual de alarma, simplemente empujar primero y luego tirar hacia abajo de la manija. entonces la inscripci que permanecer a la vista hasta que se reestablezca la estaci su estado normal. estaci tiene un rel unipolar de simple acci normalmente abierto, cuyo contacto se cierra cuando se activa dispositivo. del estado de la estaci manual Introducir la llave y girar un cuarto de giro en sentido contrario a las manecillas del reloj. Abrir la tapa hasta que la palanca vuelva a la posici normal. Volver a cerrar la tapa con llave. Al cerrar la tapa, el rel de la estaci vuelve a su posici normal, pero si se abre la tapa, el rel de alarma se activar ni desactivar manual identificable 52148 de conexiones siguiente panel control 2 3 4 GAUGE No desmontar la tapa de la estaci manual durante su instalaci ya que no se podr volver instalar a la placa de montaje despu de que la misma se haya fijado a una caja de conexiones. la estaci manual de alarma Fire modelo NGB-12LXSP de acuerdo con estas instrucciones, con las NFPA, con los reglamentos municipales vigentes para sistemas contra incendio e instalaciones el con las normas de las autoridades competentes seg el caso. Efectuar las pruebas peri de los dispositivos sistema de alarma, seg lo dicten los requisitos de las normas NFPA. El incumplimiento de las presentes podr impedir que la estaci manual env una se de alarma. Fire no asume ninguna re- por los dispositivos que se hayan instalado, probado o mantenido inadecuadamente. de las normas ADA el cumplimiento de las normas ADA (para discapacitados): si el espacio libre en el piso para acceder al dis- permite aproximaci s de frente, la altura m para alcanzarlo debe ser de 48 pulgadas (121.92 Si el espacio libre en el piso para acceder al dispositivo permitiera aproximaci lateral (de costado) de una en silla de ruedas, la altura m para alcanzarlo es de 54 pulgadas (137.16 cm). de programaci al dorso) del BG-12LXSP identificaci original de f de la estaci manual de alarma BG-12LXSP es Para fijar una identi- usar los selectores rotativos que se encuentran en el m identificador de la estaci manual. Se debe solamente una identifica

Wiring IN/OUT ( IN/OUT (+) Pull Station 50964-2 Manual Pull Station U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; 6,314,772 50964-2 BG-12S pull station is a non-coded, single-action manual pull station with pigtail con- and a hex-lock reset feature. It provides Fire control panels with one normally (N/O) alarm initiating input. The BG-12S meets the ADAAG controls and operating guidelines (section 4.1.3[13]), and the ADA requirement for a 5 lb. maximum force to activate the pull station. Operating instructions are molded into the pull station along with Braille text. contact (N/O) is gold plated for reliability and rated at 0.25 A at 30 volts (AC or BG-12S pull station can be surface mounted to an SB-10 or SB-I/O surface backbox semi-flush mounted on a standard single-gang, double-gang or 4 (10.16 cm) square box. The optional BG-TR trim ring can be used if the BG-12S is to be semi-flush activate the single-action pull station, simply pull down the handle. The word appears after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull station is pull station includes one Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST) Normally Open (N/O) which closes upon activation of the pull station. the Pull Station To reset the BG-12S hex lock pull station, insert the supplied 9/64-inch hex wrench the lock until firmly seated and turn counterclockwise 1/4-turn. Open the door until the handle returns to normal. Close and lock the door. Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the position. Opening door will not activate or deactivate the alarm switch. Do not detach the door of the pull station during installation. The door of pull station cannot be reattached to the backplate after the backplate has already been onto an electrical box. the Fire BG-12S pull station in accordance with these instructions, NFPA standards, national and local Fire and Electrical codes and the requirements the AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the devices should be con- in accordance with the appropriate NFPA standards. Failure to follow these directions result in failure of the device to report an alarm condition. Fire is not responsible for that have been improperly installed, tested or maintained. Compliance ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows forward approach to an object, the forward reach height allowed is 48 inches (121.92 cm). If the clear floor space parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is inches (137.16 cm). Estaci Pulsadora Manual U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846; 6,314,772 50964-2 estaci pulsadora BG-12S es una estaci no c y de acci manual individual conecciones entrelazadas y una caracter de reajuste de una cerradura hexagonal. provee a los paneles de control de Fire con una alarma de iniciaci de entrada abierta (N/O). El BG-12S reune las normas de control y funcionamiento de la ( seccion 4.1.3 [13] ) y los requisitos de ADA para que la estaci pulsadora sea con una fuerza de jale m de 5 libras. Las instrucciones de funcionamiento estan en la manija (manubrio) junto al texto Braille. de Contacto del Interruptor contacto del interruptor (N/O) es oro plateado para la confiabilidad y clasificado en 0.25 A 30 voltios (AV o DC). estaci pulsadora BG-12S puede ser montada en la superficie del respaldo de un SB-10 un SB-I/O; esta tambi puede ser semi-montada en una caja el cuadrada ya sea o doble de 4 (10.16 cm). El anillo opcional (BG-TR) puede ser usado si el BG-12 a ser semi-montado. activar la estaci pulsadora de acci individual, simplemente tire hacia abajo la manija La palabra aparecer despu que la manija haya sido tirada hacia Esta permanecer hasta que la estaci pulsado

Wiring IN/OUT ( IN/OUT (+) Pull Station 51860 Manual Pull Station U.S. Patent No. Des. 428,351; 6,380,846 51860 BG-12SL pull station is a non-coded, single-action manual pull station with pigtail con- and a key-lock reset feature. It provides Fire control panels with one normally (N/O) alarm initiating input. The BG-12SL meets the ADAAG controls and operating guidelines (section 4.1.3[13]), and the ADA requirement for a 5 lb. maximum force to activate the pull station. Operating instructions are molded into the pull station along with Braille text. contact (N/O) is gold plated for reliability and rated at 0.25 A at 30 volts (AC or BG-12SL pull station can be surface mounted to an SB-10 or SB-I/O surface backbox semi-flush mounted on a standard single-gang, double-gang or 4 (10.16 cm) square box. The optional BG-TR trim ring can be used if the BG-12SL is to be semi- mounted. activate the single-action pull station, simply pull down the handle. The word appears after the handle is pulled down. This will remain until the pull station is pull station includes one Single Pole, Single Throw (SPST) Normally Open (N/O) which closes upon activation of the pull station. the Pull Station Insert the key into the lock and rotate 1/4-turn counterclockwise. Open the door until the handle returns to normal. Close and lock the door. Closing the door automatically resets the switch to the position. Open- the door will not activate or deactivate the alarm switch. Do not detach the door of the pull station during installation. The door of pull station cannot be reattached to the backplate after the backplate has already been onto an electrical box. the Fire BG-12SL pull station in accordance with these instructions, NFPA standards, national and local Fire and Electrical codes and the requirements the AHJ (Authority Having Jurisdiction). Regular testing of the devices should be con- in accordance with the appropriate NFPA standards. Failure to follow these directions result in failure of the device to report an alarm condition. Fire is not responsible for that have been improperly installed, tested or maintained. Compliance ADA compliance, if the clear floor space only allows forward approach to an object, the forward reach height allowed is 48 inches (121.92 cm). If the clear floor space parallel approach by a person in a wheelchair, the maximum side reach allowed is inches (137.16 cm).

(cid:11)(cid:12)(cid:13)(cid:14)(cid:9)(cid:15)(cid:16)(cid:17)(cid:9)(cid:7)(cid:5)(cid:5)(cid:16) (cid:1)(cid:2)(cid:1) (cid:10)(cid:11)(cid:2)(cid:4)!(cid:9)(cid:4)(cid:13)(cid:10)(cid:16)(cid:11)(cid:3)(cid:25)(cid:4)(cid:5)(cid:10)(cid:7)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:12)(cid:13)(cid:14)(cid:7)(cid:15)(cid:4)”(cid:22)(cid:18)(cid:11)(cid:7)(cid:22)(cid:13)(cid:4)(cid:20)(cid:14)(cid:18)(cid:27) “(cid:22)(cid:15)(cid:23)(cid:13)(cid:10)(cid:3)(cid:16)(cid:4) (cid:10)(cid:11)(cid:2)(cid:4) (cid:12)(cid:15)(cid:3)(cid:7)(cid:10)(cid:28)(cid:14)(cid:18)(cid:16)(cid:4) (cid:10)(cid:11)(cid:2)(cid:4) $(cid:10)(cid:16)(cid:14)%(cid:10)(cid:13)(cid:10)(cid:11)(cid:10)(cid:3)(cid:16)(cid:4) (cid:12)(cid:28)(cid:11)# (cid:21)(cid:11)(cid:19)(cid:7)(cid:25)(cid:30)(cid:4)(cid:15)(cid:3)(cid:11)(cid:14)(cid:13)(cid:4)(cid:28)(cid:22)(cid:18)(cid:16)(cid:11)(cid:7)(cid:19)(cid:28)(cid:11)(cid:10)(cid:22)(cid:18)# (cid:21)(cid:10)(cid:15)(cid:23)(cid:13)(cid:3)(cid:4) (cid:22)(cid:23)(cid:3)(cid:7)(cid:14)(cid:11)(cid:10)(cid:22)(cid:18)# &(cid:23)(cid:3)(cid:7)(cid:14)(cid:11)(cid:10)(cid:22)(cid:18)(cid:4) (cid:25)(cid:22)(cid:3)(cid:16)(cid:4) (cid:18)(cid:22)(cid:11)(cid:4) (cid:7)(cid:3) (cid:7)(cid:3)(cid:23)(cid:13)(cid:14)(cid:28)(cid:3)(cid:15)(cid:3)(cid:18)(cid:11)(cid:4) (cid:22)(cid:31)(cid:4) (

Fire Solutions That Endures Alarms has a legacy simple, reliable life-safety By designing advanced that also easy to use, makes protecting what most easy year after In a world where anything can in an instant, you can count the consistency of Fire-Lite. Innovation that Endures. of Contents 3 Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panels 4 Emergency Command Center 6 Conventional Fire Alarm Control Panels 7 Releasing Control Panels 8 Sychronized Power Supplies, Pull Stations, and Annunciators 9 Addressable Smoke Detection, Wireless Technology, and Communicators 10 Complete Fire Alarm System 11 Quick Reference Guide Fire Alarm Control Panels Alarm innovative, addressable control panels offer a wide range capabilities to provide superior value and flexibility. They are easy to install program with notification appliance circuit (NAC) synchronization enable emergency personnel to quickly locate a fire. The built-in protocol ensures the fastest possible device response to help reduce property damage and save lives. Series and ES-200X Single SLC that provides support for 50 (ES-50X) or 198 (ES-200X) addressable devices. Upload/download panel programming database and flash firmware with USB thumb drive. Support for addressable multi-criteria fire and CO detector. 4 programmable function keys to save time. Built-in Class-A capability for all 4 NACs; no optional card required. Trouble indication for SLC devices not programmed. Integrated SWIFT display driver and annunciator built-in to panel. Notification appliance circuits have built-in sync for the industry and Gentex manufacturers including System Sensor Wheelock of 318 devices) per SLC with SLC-2LS option card). MS-9600UDLS Up to 159 detectors and 159 control/monitor modules. LiteSpeed protocol for SLC communication polls 10 devices at a time and operates on standard, unshielded wire. Auto-programmable function reduces installation time. Advanced fire technology sensitivity testing and automatic drift compensation. 4 programmable Class B and 2 Class A NACs. Command Center (ECC) Alarm Emergency Command Center (ECC) leverages advanced technology and 60+ years of life-safety to deliver critical messages through non-proprietary systems. The ECC is ideal for any building that needs flexible, multi-zoned, and highly configurable fire evacuation and mass notification system that easy to maintain. Primary Console Seamless integration and control when connected to select Fire-Lite addressable panels through the ANN/ACS communication bus. May be used with any UL-listed control panel (messages can be initiated by using a dry contact or via a fire alarm NAC circuit). Includes a single 25 volt, 50 watt speaker circuit (upgradable 100 watts and 2 speaker circuits with optional amplifier). Speaker circuits are expandable by up to 8 outputs (with an optional ECC-CE6 module). Can support up to 14 prerecorded messages that are field- programmable for up to 60 seconds of message playback. can be used to activate Built-in 2 Amp NAC output with sync generator. 8 Command Input Circuits messages 1 to 8. Optional amplifier can be configured as a backup in the event the primary amplifier fails. Amplifiers are independently powered to eliminate system condition. Optional transformer conversion module available for 70.7 volt speaker operation. Supports charging up to 26AH batteries. during a short circuit handsets. quick installation. Fighter Telephone Provides supervision, annunciation, and control for up to 24 remote Built-in auto-program feature Can be wired for class A (Style 6 or Style 7) or class B (Style 4) configuration. Can be configured for Multi-Pho

No text preview available.

CAB-3F SERIES INSTALLATION DOCUMENT cabinets for the Sensiscan 2000 are fabri- from 16 gauge steel. The cabinet assem- consists of two basic components: Line Information cabinet is available as a separate backbox door assembly. Use the following model num- to order each backbox and door assembly. (SBB-X3F) Door (DR-X3F) cabinet parts are FIRE gray with navy Lexan Windows. This produces a taste- combination, accenting the decor of the lobby setting. Cabinet and door assembly. (1) mount- Cabinet and door assembly. (2) mount- with the key-locked door are a pin- hinge, a Lexan window, two keys and the hardware to mount the door to the backbox has been engineered to provide for the installer. Knockouts are at numerous points to aid the in- in bringing conduit into the enclosure a minimum of hardship. are field-selectable for either left or right mounting. Door opens 180 are available in two (2 sizes, (A & B). outside dimensions are noted on each diagram. A trim ring option is avail- for semi-flush mounting. Description Door only, A style, (1) tier. Backbox only, A style, (1) tier. Trim ring for use with A style. by 22-5/16″H) Door only, B style, (2) tiers. Backbox only, B style, (2) tiers. Trim ring for use with B style. by 30-13/16″H) channel. Provides a pair of wire neatly route wire between CHS Order one pair per chassis. Clintonville Road Ct. 06472 (203) 484-7161 (203) 484-7118 15391-A 4/14/92 hand door hand door Corner hole outward You Begin option of mounting doors in either a left/right hand will aid in installation and service when two control are mounted in a confined area or side by side (as In this manner the doors can be opened “barn door” permitting an open work space. Note that in this type of it is necessary to leave enough space between to insert a key into the locks on the door frames. NOTE: The two hinges and two alignment tabs be attached to the backbox before any equipment is With chassis, installed space is very limited. Assembly Instructions can be either left or right-hand mounted. The and text depict a left hand mounted example. a right hand mounting, simply substitute right for left the instructions. Insert door hinges (A) into the top and bottom slots of side to be hinged (in this case the LEFT side). Secure hinges to the studs in the backbox with the nuts Note that the small hole on the outer tab faces Thread stud (B) into the BOTTOM hinge first. Thread the bottom up. Place the grounding star washer on stud. Place the door lower corner onto this stud. the door on the lower stud first provides a place for door to rest while you complete the assembly. Align the door on the backbox so that the door sits directly under the top Thread remaining stud (B) into the TOP hinge and through the hole in the top the door. Your door should now swing freely. 15391-A 4/14/92 Corner Right Install the door alignment (C) in the unused slots on backbox (top and bottom). this example the door was on the left, leaving unused slots on the right). alignment tab (C) to PEM stud with nut pro- These tabs align the correctly with the backbox prevent the door from “skewed” open. Punch out the knockout for door lock and install the lock Be sure to do this so you will be sure to out the correct side. lock mechanism as viewed a left-hinged mounting appli- The lock would be in the right side of the (as shown below).

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Multiple Module with Relay Outputs and Two Monitor Inputs FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 Operating Voltage: Current Draw: Operating Current: Range: Contact Rating: Resistance: IDC wiring resistance: IDC Voltage: IDC Current: CONTACT RATINgS: RATINg A A A A A A A A to 32 VDC mA (4 LEDs on) mA, 1 communication every 5 seconds to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Non-condensing base address=Relay Output #1, Module base address +1=Monitor Input #1, base address +2=Relay Output #2, Module base address +3=Monitor Input #2 H x 4.275 W x 1.4 D (Mounts to a 4 square by 21/8 deep box.) Electrical Box; EA-CB Barrier at 30 VDC Ohms (monitor iputs only) Ohms Volts VOLTAgE DESCRIpTION VAC VDC VDC VDC VAC VDC VAC VAC = 20ms) = 0.35 = 0.35 = 0.75 = 0.35 REqUIREMENTS ensure proper operation, these modules shall be connected to listed com- system control panels only. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and appropri- wiring diagrams. the address on the module per job drawings. Secure module to electrical box (supplied by installer), as shown in 2. 1. CONTROLS AND INDICATORS: INSTALLINg information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to control panel installation manual for detailed system information. If the will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the opera- and local authority that the system will be temporarily out of service. Dis- power to the control panel before installing the modules. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. DESCRIpTION CDRM-300 multi output-input module is intended for use in intelligent, systems, where the individual address of each module is selected the built-in rotary decade switches. It is capable of replacing two indi- relay control modules and two Class B monitor modules. Each relay is intended for Form C switching applications which do not require supervision for the load circuit. Each monitor input is intended to between a fire alarm control panel and one or more devices. Each output has its own green LED. Each monitored input has its own bi- LED, which can be controlled by the control panel. module address is selected by means of rotary decade address switches Figure 1). These can be accessed from the front of the module. A screw- should be used to rotate the wheels to select the desired addresses. module can use up to four (4) addresses. The base address selected via rotary address switches will be assigned to relay output #1 from 00 to 156. module will automatically assign the next three addresses as appropriate monitored input #1, relay output #2, and monitored input #2. relay output #2 or monitored input #2 are not used, please switch the cor- DIP switch to the position with the screwdriver (See Figure These two addresses will then be free to be used for other devices on loop. NOTE: If relay output #2 is disabled and monitored input #2 is the address for monitored input #2 will be module base address +3. base address +2 (reserved for relay output #2) will then be open for devices. 1A. DISABLINg OUTpUT #2 AND INpUT #2 2. MODULE MOUNTINg: module mounts directly to 4-inch square electrical boxes (see Figure 2). box must have a minimum depth of 21/8 inches. Surface mounted electri- boxes (SMB500) are available from System Sensor. The module can also to the DNR(W) duct housing. 3. TypICAL 2-WIRE INITIATINg CIRCUIT CONfIgURATION, NfpA STyLE B: NEXT NUMBER OF UL LISTED CONTACT

Relay/Monitor Module E-840 Devices CDRM-300(A) multi output-input module is designed for with Fire Fire Alarm Control Panels. addressable module is intended for use in intelligent, two- loops. It includes two individual relay control modules and Class B monitor modules. Each relay output is intended for C switching applications which do not require wiring for the load circuit. Each monitor input provides an between a fire alarm control panel and one or more open contact-type devices. Each relay output has its green LED. Powered by SLC loop directly, no external power required. Mounts in standard junction boxes (4.0″/10.16 cm square, cm deep). LEDs flash red during normal operation and latch on red to indicate alarm. Compatible with LiteSpeed and CLIP systems. Addressable-analog communication. Sleek, low-profile design. Two-wire SLC connection. Rotary, decimal addressing: 01-159 with MS-9600UDLS MS-9600LS series systems, and 01-99 with MS- Firmware 4. Addresses can be viewed and changed without electronic Temperature: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 Humidity: 10% 93% non-condensing. 4.675″ H x 4.275″ W x 1.4″ D. (Mounts to a 4″ square by deep box.) Weight: 6.3 oz. (178.6 grams). SPECIFICATIONS Operating Voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. Current Draw: 24 mA (4 LEDs on). Operating Current: 1300 Contact Ratings: A A A A A A A A VAC VDC VDC VDC VAC VDC VAC VAC APPLICATION = 0.35 = 20ms) = 0.35 = 0.75 = 0.35 and Programming installation instructions shipped with the module, and the Wiring Manual for complete details. To ensure proper these modules shall be connected to listed compat- system control panels only. Mount on a standard junction box (4.0″/10.16 cm square) is at least 2.125″/5.398 cm deep. instructions are provided with each module. Terminal screws are provided for and out wiring. Surface-mount box is available as an option. Addressing: Module base address=Relay Output #1 Module base address +1=Monitor Input #1 Module base address +2=Relay Output #2 Module base address +3=Monitor Input #2 module can use up to four (4) addresses. The base selected with the rotary address switches will be to relay output #1 from 00 to 156. The module will assign the next three addresses as appropriate monitored input #1, relay output #2, and monitored input #2. switch settings can disable relay output #2 or monitored #2 and free up those addresses. (NOTE: This will affect see installation manual for details.) The inputs and outputs on CDRM-300(A) provide Style B B) circuits ONLY. Style D (Class A) circuits are NOT sup- in any application. Listings and Approvals listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in document. In some cases, certain modules or applications not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. UL/ULC Listed: S2424 CSFM: 7300-0075:0225 01/10/2012 Page 1 of 2 Line Information suffix indicates ULC Listed model. Dual Relay/Monitor Module. Same as above but with ULC Listing. Surface-mount electrical box. Alarms is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use this document is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all spec

CELL-CAB-FL(C) and Fire Alarm Communicators CELL-CAB-FL(C) and CELL-MOD(C) are cellular communica- options for Fire Endurance Series addressable fire alarm panels (FACPs). GSM communicators provide cellular communication as an method of central station reporting. Combined with the onboard communicator, they provide dual path cellular and reporting capability, while eliminating the need and cost of sepa- dialer capture modules and special programming. Battery from the control panel maximizes overall system efficiency. in size, easy to install, with a programmable supervision time 1-60 minutes, these communicator models can be positioned from the fire alarm control panel via 4-wire serial bus for reception. The CELL-CAB-FL(C) and CELL-MOD(C) are 864 and NFPA 72 fire code compliant for sole, primary, or communications. They work with AlarmNet to provide a connection to the central station. CELL-CAB-FL(C) includes a GSM communicator within a metal enclosure with lock and key and includes an external The CELL-MOD(C) houses the GSM communicator in a enclosure and has an option for an external antenna. CELL-CAB-FL(C) and CELL-MOD(C) are compatible with the Endurance Series FACPs: ES-50X(C): 50 point addressable FACP ES-200X(C): 198 point addressable FACP Communicate directly with Endurance Series panels Easy installation – no need for special programming or separate module Battery backup provided by the panel to increase system effi- and decrease cost Provide dual-path cellular and IP reporting capability UL 864 and NFPA 72 code compliant for sole, primary, and communications Easily managed accounts through on-line management tools Remote mounting up to 6,000 feet (1,828.8m) Quality of Service (QOS) diagnostics via AlarmNet convey vital information such as when messages are received, strength, and message path used Programmable supervision time from 1-60 minutes Provide full data reporting using Contact ID format 11/5/2018 Page 1 of 2 SPECIFICATIONS 10.38″W x 10.165″H x 3.176″D x 25.82 cm x 8.07cm) 7.809″W x 5.982″H x 1.5″D x 15.19cm x 3.81cm) Weight: CELL-MOD: 1.3 lbs (589.7 g) CELL-CAB-FL: 5.2 lbs (2.36 Kg) Red Temperature: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 10 to 93% relative humidity (non-condensing) Current: 55mA Current: 100mA TRANSCEIVER 3G Cellular Radio UMTS WCDMA FDD 850/1900MHz FCC part 15, 22, 24, and 68 compliant PROTOCOLS HSPA+ (4G) and HSPA (HSDPA & HSUPA) (3G) INFORMATION Cellular module housed in metal cabinet with lock key. Includes external antenna Cellular module housed in metal cabinet with lock key. Includes external antenna. For use in Canadian applica- with Canadian model FACPs. Cellular module housed in plastic enclosure. (External sold separately) Cellular module housed in plastic enclosure. (Exter- antenna sold separately), For use in Canadian applications with model FACPs. 3dB gain external/remote antenna 50 point addressable FACP with pre-installed IPOTS-COM 50 point addressable FACP with pre-installed IPOTS- communicator, for use in Canadian applications 198 point addressable FACP with pre-installed IPOTS- communicator 198 point addressable FACP with pre-installed IPOTS- communicator, for use in Canadian applications Dual board) for the Endurance Series panels UL: S3511 (CELL-MOD), S2424 (CELL-CAB-FL) ULC: S3511 (CELL-MODC), S2424 (CELL-CAB-FLC) CSFM: 7300-0075:0504 FCC ID: CFS8DLPHS8-US (POTS and communicator and Fire-Lite Alarms are registered trademarks of Honeywell Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE DESIGN OF NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS AND SYSTEMS No. (Revision 2) Date: 11/30/2016 Parameters: nonstructural products (mechanical and/or electrical components) listed on this certificate are CERTIFIED1 FOR SEISMIC APPLICATIONS accordance with the following building code2 releases. 2000, IBC 2003, IBC 2006, IBC 2009, IBC 2012 following model designations, options, and accessories are included in this certification. Reference report number VMA-45894-01 as issued The VMC Group for a complete list of certified models, included accessories/options, and certified installation methods. Fire Alarm Control Panels above referenced equipment is APPROVED for seismic application when properly installed,3 used as intended, and contains a Seismic Label referencing this Certificate of Compliance4. As limited by the tabulated values, below grade, grade, and roof-level installations, in essential facilities, for life safety applications, and/or of equipment containing hazardous contents are permitted and included in certification with an Equipment Importance Factor assigned as IP=1.5. Seismic Design Levels <= 2.50 * g <= 0.0 at Grade) <= 2.00 * g <= 1.0 on Roof) Classes A, B, C, D, Seismic Risk Category I, II, III, IV, and Seismic Design Categories A, B, C, D, E, and F all covered under this certification, limited by the SDS value stated above. section 13.2.5 of the third printing of ASCE7-10, by deriving the horizontal test accelerations using SDS = 2.00 g and z/h = 1.0 deriving the vertical test accelerations using SDS = 2.50 g, all applications are acceptable for roof and grade installations where 2.50 g. Seismic Installation Methods to rigid wall Test of Active and Energized Components, Non-Active Components, and Equipment Structure: by successful seismic shake table testing at the nationally recognized University of California Berkeley Pacific Engineering Research Center under the witness of the Certified Seismic Qualification Agency, The VMC Testing was conducted in accordance with ICC-ES AC-156 to envelope the required response spectrum (RRS) of horizontal flexible acceleration (AFLEX) of 3.20 g and a rigid acceleration (ARIG) of 2.40 g. This test level to an SDS = 2.50 g with a z/h of 1.0. Functionality was verified before and after the shake test. of Design for Supports and Attachments to the Building: calculations and analysis of the equipment attachment to the building structure, the equivalent static force method was using the Seismic Design Acceleration, FP/WP,5 for Load Resistance Factored Design (LRFD) methods. This but is not limited to the unit anchoring requirements and external isolation calculations. Design Acceleration Equation, = 0.4 x (SDS=2.50 g) x (IP=1.5) x (aP/RP=0.417) x (1+2(z/h=1.0)) = 1.88 g is representative of the worst-case shake tested condition, as determined from Table 13.6-1 in ASCE/SEI7-05/10. Rev 0 1 of 3 OF COMPLIANCE DESIGN OF NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENTS AND SYSTEMS Product Table: Number Fire Alarm Control Panel Fire Alarm Control Panel Remote Power Supply Remote Power Supply Remote Power Supply Remote Power Supply Chassis Remote Power Supply Chassis Remote Power Supply Box BB-17F Box BB-26 Fire Alarm Control Panel 3 Amp Fire Alarm Control Panel 7 Amp Control Panel Release Control Panel Fire Alarm Control Panel 3 Amp Fire Alarm Control Panel 7 Amp Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel Addressable Fire Alarm Control Panel Command Center Panel Command Center Panel LOC Telephone Panel Paging Unit Microphone certification includes the unit and factory supplied accessories and options. The unit and included accessories and options shall be a design and factory supplies. The unit shall be installed and attached to the building structure per the manufacturer supplied seismic instructions. This certification exclud

CHG-120F Charger CHG-120F is a state-of-the-art battery charging system for use with Fire fire alarm control panels It is designed to charge lead-acid batteries between and 120 ampere-hours (AH). Charges sealed lead-acid batteries. Automatic float-type battery charger. Rated for batteries of 25 to 120 ampere-hours. Obtains full float voltage within 48 hours. For use on any 24-volt FACP which can handle the speci- batteries and can disable the local charger. AC Fail delay (central station applications) per latest NFPA Form-C Trouble contact. Dual outputs, for easy load distribution. Diagnostic LEDs: Primary AC On Charger Trouble. Ground Fault. Hi Charge. Lo Charge. Battery Voltage Level (3 LEDs). Low Battery. Black or red BB-55F(R) battery cabinet. Field-selectable input voltage, 120 VAC or 230 VAC. Charges: 26 AH batteries within 9 hours. 55/60 AH batteries within 20 hours. 120 AH batteries within 38 hours. Values per Fire testing. and Operation CHG-120F consists of a PC board and mounting chassis. current is provided automatically when the battery falls below the charger output voltage. the CHG-120F when batteries required for standby are between 25 to 120 AH. Specifications AC (TB1): 115 VAC, 60 Hz, 2 A. 230 VAC, 50 Hz, 1 A. relay (TB3): 5 A at 30 VDC. charge voltage: 27.6 VDC. charging current: 4.5 A. F1-F3: 15 A. sizes: 26 AH to 120 AH. D-225 Supplies/Accessories time (to charge two fully discharged batteries): 25 AH = 9 hours. 55 AH/60 AH = 20 hours. 120 AH = 38 hours. CHG-120F mounts remotely in the BB-55F Battery Back- Install the CHG-120F within 20 feet (6.096 m) of the main in the left position of the BB-55F backbox. Only one 55 AH battery or two 26 AH batteries will mount the charger board in the BB-55F. Battery Box Battery Configurations: The battery can mount configurations of batteries as follows: Without CHG-120F mounted internally: With CHG-120F mounted internally: Up to two 26 AH batteries. Up to two 55 AH batteries. One 100 AH battery. Up to two 26 AH batteries. One 55 AH battery. One 100 AH battery. When 100 AH batteries are required, a BB-55F is required mount each 100 AH battery. Line Information Battery charger circuit board and mounting chas- Includes mounting hardware and installation instructions. 26 AH, 12-volt, sealed lead-acid battery. Order as pack BAT-12260-BP, contains two. 55 AH, 12-volt, sealed lead-acid battery. 10/18/2012 Page 1 of 2 100 AH, 12-volt, sealed lead-acid battery. Battery Backbox holds up to two BAT-12550 55 AH or one BAT-121000 100 AH battery. Dimensions: 24.0″ (61.0 cm) wide x 14.0″ (35.6 cm) high x 7.75″ (19.7 deep. Door: 24.125″ (61.3 cm) wide x 14.25″ (36.2 cm) x (door adds 0.063″ [approx. 0.16 cm] to depth), black. Same as BB-55F above but painted red. with Codes and Standards CHG-120F complies with the following standards: NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code. UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems. Features UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Alarm Systems. CAN/ULC-S527-M87. Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the basic CHG- In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Con- factory for latest listing status. UL: S1287. ULC: CS100. CSFM: 7315-0075:0182. MEA: 195-97-E Vol. 2. Battery Backbox is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use this document

Charger D-250 Supplies/Accessories CHG-75 battery charger is designed to charge leadacid that provide emergency standby power for a Fire Control Panel (FACP) and related equipment. Two 12- batteries are used in series to supply a nominal 24 VDC. battery charger is compatible with any FACP that uses batteries with a rating of 25 AH (amp-hours) to 75 The FACP must have a feature that allows the disabling of control panel battery charger. 120 VAC or 220/240 VAC operation. Rated for batteries 25 to 75 AH. Charger can connect to the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) of Fire addressable intelligent control panel for trouble Mounts in a BB-26 or BB-55F enclosure. Screw terminal connections for battery, battery backup to equipment and SLC loop. 6.25 A fuse (F1) for AC overload protection. 15.0 A replaceable fuse (F2) provides battery with current- short circuit, and overload protection. 15.0 A replaceable fuse (F3) provides battery with current- and overload protection for output to connected Form-C trouble relay rated for 2.0 A @ 30 VDC (resistive). Ground fault detection circuit (can be disabled). Battery, charger, and AC voltage supervision. AC loss reporting delay option for 8- or 16-hour delay. Connectors for trouble input and output direct CHG-75 to FACP and allow daisy-chaining of external trou- through the charger without affecting charger opera- Master trouble input allows monitoring of another device or Diagnostic LEDs for monitoring: Primary AC On, Charger. Trouble, Ground Fault, Charging, SLC Communication, Low Battery. and Operation CHG-75 consists of a PC board and mounting chassis. Installation section for compatible backboxes. current is provided automatically when the battery falls below the charger output voltage. While charg- the batteries, the CHGING (charging) LED will turn on. batteries are fully charged, the charger maintains a float of 27.6 VDC. The SLC LED and AC LED are the only LEDs that should be on during normal operation if SLC is programmed at the FACP and the SLC switch is On. the CHG-75 with Fire FACPs when batteries required standby are rated equal to or greater than 25 AH. When installing the batteries, make that proper polarity is observed between the leads and the battery terminal posts. See manual for complete instructions and precautions. Specifications Primary AC power in (TB1): 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 2.0 A; or VAC, 50 Hz, 1.0 A. Wire size: minimum 14 AWG mm with 600-volt insulation. Form-C relay (TB4): 2.0 A at 30 VDC (resistive). Float charge voltage: 27.6 VDC. Maximum charging current: 4.5 A (peak). Battery sizes: 25 AH to 75 AH. CHG-75 can be mounted remotely in the BB-26 or BB- battery backbox. Install the CHG-75 within 20 feet m) of the main FACP. mounting remotely in the BB-55F: The CHG-75 to the right of the mounting holes positioned at the top the cabinet. Use the supplied self-tapping screws to secure charger to the backbox. mounting remotely in the BB-26: The CHG-75 just below mounting holes positioned at the top center the cabinet. Use the supplied nuts to mount the charger to studs located in the backbox. Line Information Battery charger circuit board and mounting chassis. mounting hardware and installation instructions. 26 AH, 12-volt, sealed lead-acid battery. Battery backbox holds up to two BAT-12260 26 AH bat- Box dimensions: 15.6″ (39.62 cm) wide x 15.5″ (39.37 10/18/2012 Page 1 of 2 high x 5.125″ (13.02 cm) deep. Door dimensions: same as backbox. Battery backbox holds up to two BAT-12550 55 AH Box dimensions: 24.0″ (61.0 cm) wide x 14.0″ (35.6 high x 7.75″ (19.7 cm) deep. Door dimensions: 24.125″ cm) wide x 14.25″ (36.2 cm) high x (door adds 0.063″ 0.16 cm] to depth). Sam

No text preview available.

InstallatIon anD maIntenance InstructIons FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 control module Operating Voltage: Current Draw: Operating Current: NAC Line Loss: Supply Voltage (between Terminals T10 and T11) Maximum (NAC): NAC Current Ratings: Range: to 32VDC mA (LED on) (LED flashing – group poll mode) 350 (LED flashing – direct poll mode); 485 Max. (Communicating, NAC Shorted) VDC 24VDC class B wiring system, the current rating is 3A; For class A wiring system, the current rating is 2A to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Non-condensing H 4 W 11/4 D (Mounts to a 4 square by 21/8 deep box.) Electrical Box; CB500 Barrier 2a. moDule mountIng BarrIer: 2B: InstallIng information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to control panel installation manual for detailed system information. If the will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the opera- and local authority that the system will be temporarily out of service. Dis- power to the control panel before installing the modules. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. DescrIptIon Supervised Control Modules are intended for use in addressable, systems, where the individual address of each module is selected the built-in rotary switches. This module is used to switch an external supply, which can be a DC power supply, to notification appliances. It supervises the wiring to the connected loads and reports their status to panel as NORMAL, OPEN, or SHORT CIRCUIT. The CMF-300 has two pairs output termination points available for fault-tolerant wiring and a panel- LED indicator. This module can be used to replace a C304 module has been configured for supervised wiring operation. requIrements ensure proper operation, these modules shall be connected to listed com- system control panels only. 1a. controls anD 1B. Jumper locatIon CMF-300 mounts directly to 4-inch square electrical boxes (see Figure The box must have a minimum depth of 21/8 inches. Surface mounted boxes (SMB500) are available. The module can also mount to the or DNR(W) duct housing. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and When using control modules in nonpower limited applications, CB500 Module Barrier must be used to meet UL requirements for the sepa- of power-limited and nonpower-limited terminals and wiring. The bar- must be inserted into a 4 junction box, and the control module be placed into the barrier and attached to the junction box (Figure 2A). power-limited wiring must be placed into the isolated quadrant of the barrier (Figure 2B). Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and appropri- wiring diagrams. the address on the module per job drawings. Secure module to electrical box (supplied by installer), as shown in 2A. should be stripped to the appropriate length (recommended strip length 1/4 to 3/8 Exposed conductor should be secured under the clamping plate should not protrude beyond the terminal block area. Caution: Do not loop under terminals. Break wire run to provide supervision of connections. When using the FCM-1 for fire fighter telephone applications, Jumper (J1) and discard. The Jumper is located on the back as shown Figure 1B. The module does not provide ring back when used as a firefigh- circuit. must be removed whenever power supply monitoring feature is not required. 3. typIcal notIfIcatIon applIance cIrcuIt confIguratIon, nfpa style y (class B): NOT LOOP WIRE ON TERMINALS 10 & 11. BREAK WIRE TO PROVIDE SUPERVISION OF CONNECTIONS. VDC CIRCUIT MODULES TO COMPATIBLE CONTROL ONLY VDC POWER SUPPLY REGULATED, LIMITED PER NFPA 70. FOR FIRE PROTECTION BATTERY BACKUP. POLARITIES ARE IN ALARM

I Control Module Instructions to 32VDC (LED flashing – in group poll mode) 350 (LED of flashing – in direct poll mode) Max. (Communicating, NAC Shorted) VDC Operating Voltage: Operating Current: NAC Line Loss: Supply Voltage (between Terminals T3 and T4) (NAC): (Speakers): NAC Current Ratings: Range: 24VDC V RMS, 50 W class B wiring system, the current rating is 3A class A wiring system, the current rating is 2A to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Non-condensing H 4 W 11/4 D (Mounts to a 4 square by 21/8 deep box.) Electrical Box; CB500 Barrier Installing information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to the control panel installation manual for system information. If the modules will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the operator and authority that the system will be temporarily out of service. Disconnect power to the control panel before installing modules. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. Description Supervised Control Modules are intended for use in addressable, two-wire systems, where the individual address each module is selected using the built-in rotary switches. This module is used to switch an external power supply, can be a DC power supply, to notification appliances. It also supervises the wiring to the connected loads and re- their status to the panel as NORMAL, OPEN, or SHORT CIRCUIT. The CMF-300 has two pairs of output termination available for fault-tolerant wiring and a panel-controlled LED indicator. This module can be used to replace a C304 that has been configured for supervised wiring operation. Requirements ensure proper operation, these modules shall be connected to listed compatible system control panels only. CMF-300 mounts directly to 4 square electrical boxes (see Figure 2A). The box must have a minimum depth of 21/8 mounted electrical boxes (SMB500) are available. relay switch contacts are shipped in the standby state (open) state, but may have transferred to the activated (closed) during shipping. To ensure that the switch contacts are in their correct state, modules must be made to communicate the panel before connecting circuits controlled by the module. Fire Alarms, Inc Alarms, Inc., One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 06472, 203-484-7161 All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. When using control modules in non- limited applications, the CB500 Module Barrier must be used to meet UL requirements for the separation of power- and nonpower-limited terminals and wiring. The barrier must be inserted into a 4 junction box, and the module must be placed into the barrier and attached to the junction box (Figure 2A). The power-limited wiring must placed into the isolated quadrant of the module barrier (Figure 2B). Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and appropriate wiring diagrams. Set the address on the module per job drawings. Some panels support extended addressing. In order to set the module above address 99 on compatible systems, remove the stop on the upper rotary switch with thumb in the direction shown in Figure 1. Secure module to electrical box (supplied by installer), as shown in Figure 2A. 1A. Controls and indicators: 2A. Module mounting with barrier: 2B: 865 6 7 8 9

CMF-300(A) Module CMF-300(A) Addressable Control Module provides intelligent control panels a circuit for Notification (horns, strobes, etc.). Addressability allows the to be activated through panel programming, on a (zone or area of coverage) basis. is a communication protocol developed by Engineering that greatly enhances the speed of com- between analog intelligent devices. Intelligent communicate in a grouped fashion. If one of the within the group has new information, the panel CPU the group poll and concentrates on single points. The effect is response speed greater than five times that of designs. Built-in type identification automatically identifies these to the control panel. circuitry powered directly by two-wire SLC loop. CMF-300(A) module requires power (for horns, etc.). LED green each time a communication is from the control panel and turns on steady red activated. High noise immunity (EMF/RFI). The CMF-300(A) may be used to switch 24-volt NAC Wide viewing angle of LED. SEMS screws with clamping plates for wiring ease. Direct-dial entry of address: 01 159 for MS-9600 series 01 99 on MS-9200UDLS and MS-9050UD. CMF-300(A) is used to switch 24 VDC audible/visual The face plate is made of off-white heat-resistant plastic. Controls include two rotary switches for direct-dial entry of setting. The CMF-300(A) is configured for a single Class B (Style Y) Class A (Style Z) Notification Appliance Circuit. CMF-300(A) uses one of the module addresses on a loop. It responds to regular polls from the control panel reports its type and status, including the open/normal/ status of its Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC). The blinks with each poll received. On command, it activates internal relay. The CMF-300(A) supervises Class B (Style or Class A (Style Z) notification or control circuits. code command from the panel, the CMF-300(A) will dis- the supervision and connect the external power sup- in the proper polarity across the load device. The of the supervision provides a positive indication the panel that the control relay actually turned ON. The E-350 Devices power supply is always relay-isolated from the com- loop so that a trouble condition on the external supply will never interfere with the rest of the system. switches set a unique address for each module. The may be set before or after mounting. The built-in CODE (not settable) will identify the module to the con- panel, so as to differentiate between a module and a sen- address. operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. SLC current draw: 6.5 mA (LED on). operating current: 350 direct poll (CLIP mode), group poll (LiteSpeed mode) with LED flashing. supply voltage: maximum 80 volts (RMS or DC). on external supply: 2 mA maximum (using internal relay). resistance: 47K ohms. range: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 range: 10% to 93% non-condensing. 4.5″ (11.43 cm) high x 4″ (10.16 cm) wide x (3.175 cm) deep. Mounts to a 4″ (10.16 cm) square x (5.398 cm) deep box. Listings and Approvals some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult fac- for latest listing status. ULC: S2424 Line Information Intelligent addressable control module. 4/20/10 Page 1 of 2 Canadian intelligent addressable control Optional surface-mount backbox. Optional control module barrier, required by UL for power-limited and non-power-limited wiring in the junction box as CMF-300(A). For installation instructions, see document I56-1189-009 refer to the SLC Wiring Manual, document 51309. The CRF- relay module, previously on this

No text preview available.

Circuit Supervised Control Module SYNC-1 Accessory Card (cid:129) E-920 Devices CMF-300-6 six-circuit supervised control module intelligent alarm systems with supervised monitoring wiring to load devices that require an external power supply operate, such as horns, strobes, or bells. Each module is for switching applications involving AC or DC which wiring supervision. Upon command from the control the CMF-300-6 will disconnect the supervision and con- the external power supply across the load device. first module is addressed from 01 to 154 (MS-9600 series while the remaining modules are automatically assigned the next five higher addresses. On an MS-9050UD, MS- or MS-9200UDLS, the addressing would be 01 to 94. CMF-300-6 module has terminals for connection to an supply circuit for powering devices on its notification circuit (NAC). One or multiple power supplies may used. Provisions are included for disabling a maximum of three addresses. CMF-300-6 module features a short-circuit-protection to protect the external power supply against short-cir- conditions on the NAC. When an alarm condition occurs, relay which connects the external supply to the NAC will be allowed to close if a short-circuit condition currently on the NAC. Additionally, an algorithm is incorporated to shorts when the module is active. The CMF-300-6 module close all circuits that are not shorted to find the NAC with problem. CMF-300-6 module has panel-controlled green LED indi- The panel can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or off. SYNC-1 accessory card provides the CMF-300-6 with functionality with compatible System Sensor and SpectrAlert Advance audio/visual devices. Six addressable Style B (Class B) or three addressable D (Class A) outputs that function as notification appli- circuits. Removable 12 AWG (3.31 mm to 18 AWG (0.821 mm terminal blocks. Status indicators for each point. Unused addresses may be disabled. Rotary address switches. LiteSpeed or CLIP operation. Optional SYNC-1 accessory card for SpectrAlert and Advance devices. Mount one or two modules in a BB-2F cabinet (optional). Mount up to six modules on a CHS-6 chassis in a BB-6F or cabinet (optional). Mounting hardware included. current: 2.25 mA (SLC current draw with all used; if some addresses are disabled, the standby decreases). current: 35 mA (assumes all six NACS have been once and all six LEDs solid ON). range: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 for UL appli- to +55 for EN54 applications. 10% to 85% noncondensing for UL applications; to 93% noncondensing for EN54 applications. 6.8″ (172.72 mm) high x 5.8″ (147.32 mm) wide 1.25″ (31.75 mm) deep. weight: 1.1 lb. (0.499 kg) including packaging. options: CHS-6 chassis, BB-6F cabinet, BB-25 BB-2F cabinet. gauge: 12 AWG (3.31 mm to 18 AWG (0.821 mm is shipped in Class B position; remove shunt for A operation. SLC wiring resistance: 40 ohms on MS-9600 MS-9200UDLS, MS-9050UD, and MS-9200. NAC wiring resistance: 40 ohms. rating per circuit: to 50 W @ 70.7 VAC; 50 W @ 25 (UL applications only). contact ratings: 30 VDC, 110 VAC. ratings: 3.0 A @ 30 VDC maximum, resistive, non-coded. 2.0 A @ 30 VDC maximum, resistive, coded. 1.0 A @ 30 VDC maximum, inductive (L/R = 2 ms), coded. 0.5 A @ 30 VDC maximum, inductive (L/R = 5 ms), coded. 0.9 A @ 70.7 VAC maximum, resistive, non-coded. 0.7 A @ 70.7 VAC maximum, inductive (PF = 0.35), non- 3/4/2015 Page 1 of 2 not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. UL Listed: S2424. ULC Listed: S2424. MEA Listed: 55-02-E/ 226-03-E (SYNC-1). FM Approved (Local Protective Signaling). CSFM: 7300-0075:02

24, chemin Viceroy (Ontario) L4K2L9 (905) 660-7210 : (905) 660-7204 d POWER 1 1 1 1 SILENCE 2 2 2 2 d d et no 50907F R A 2003 Fire ECN 03-339 des syst d si l d syst d parfois droit une prime d moins ne remplace pas l contre l avant l – Il pourrait y avoir plusieurs sources d raccord au tableau d D les sources d avant de proc ou au d L de commande et le mat pourraient subir des dommages si l ins ou retire des des modules ou des c de connexion pendant que l encore sous tension. d d ou de faire l avant d lu et compris le pr manuel. EN GARDE – Essai d apr l de mises du logiciel : Pour assurer le fonctionnement ad du syst pr produit doit v conform la norme NFPA Chapitre 7 apr toute op de programmation ou du logiciel propre l Il faut proc un d apr tout ajout, modi ou suppression de du syst ou apr tout ajustement, modi ou de mat ou du c du syst les composants, circuits, fonctions d ou fonctions du syst vis par un changement doivent nou- mis l dans leur totalit De plus, pour s que toutes autres facettes du fonctionnement ne sont pas compromises par il faut v au moins 10 % des autres d qui ne sont pas directement vis par le jusqu concurrence de 50 dispositifs, et v le bon du syst syst respecte les exigences de la NFPA en ce qui concerne fonctionnement 0-49 32-120 et une humidit relative de % sans condensation 30 Toutefois, la dur de vie utile piles de secours du syst et des composants compromise par des temp extr et l cons il est pr que le syst et ses p install dans un environnement o la temp ambiante est de 15-27 60-80 le calibre des pour toutes les boucles des dispositifs d La plupart des appareils ne tol pas une ohmique de plus de 10 % de la tension sp pour l syst d automatique – g de d de fum de d thermiques, d de dispositifs sonores et d tableau de avec fonction d distance – peut servir donner rapide d le d d incendie. Ce type de syst n aucune garantie de protection contre les d mat

24 Viceroy Road Ontario L4K2L9 (905) 660-7210 (905) 660-7204 Alarm Control Panel Maintenance and Operating Manual #50907 Rev. 50907:A ECN 98-425 1998 Fire Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term relia all solid state electronic devices, this system may oper- – Several different sources of power can be connected erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of power transients. Although no system is completely immune servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may be lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or inter- reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and recommended, due to an increased susceptibility to nearby strikes. Consult with the Technical Services Depart- if any problems are anticipated or encountered. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: AC power and batteries prior to removing or ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. with NFPA 72-1993 Chapter 7 after any programming or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance test- all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make or after any modification, repair or adjustment to sys- cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifi- hardware or wiring. verify that they will not interfere with battery, trans- and printed circuit board location. components, circuits, system operations or software functions to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addi- not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tight- to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal con- least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. change, up to a maximum of 50 devices must also be tested proper system operation verified. system contains static-sensitive components Always yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any so that static charges are removed from the body. Use suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating and pro- manuals. These instructions must be followed to damage to the control panel and associated equipment. operation and reliability depend upon proper installation. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/ F and at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) 30O C/86O F. However, the useful life of the system standby and the electronic components may be adversely by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/ F. that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the device voltage. Alarm System Limitations automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audi- warning devices and a fire alarm control with remote noti- capability can provide early warning of a developing Such a system, however, does not assure protection property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot the detectors such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A sec- floor detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or fire. Furthermore, all types of smoke de

CO1224T/CO1224A Monoxide Detector monoxide (CO) is an odorless, colorless, tasteless and toxic gas that is produced when fuels, such as wood, charcoal and oil, are burned with insufficient air. The of residential and commercial fatalities caused from fuels come from heating systems, power tools and char- grills. carbon monoxide is detected, the CO1224T will alert by and flashing a temp-4 signal alarm. Protection is 24/7 by a central station if connected to a panel a digital alarm communicator. CO1224T is specifically designed for system operation. means the detector is fully listed to UL Standard 2075, a code required trouble relay, which sends a sensor or end-of-life signal to the control panel and the central as well as SEMS-type terminal Phillips-head screws, provide a quicker and more positive wiring connection code required wiring supervision. Also, the offers low cur- draw, allowing more detectors to be connected to the without having to purchase a more expensive panel or extra power supply. addressability to the by supervising the circuit with a monitor module such as the MMF-301(A). to the CO1224T is RealTest technology that allows of its internal CO detector with a carbon monoxide gas There are few steps: Hold the test button for two sec- and after the green LED begins to flash about once per spray a small amount of CO into the detector. The will alarm to indicate presence of gas. RealTest technology allows installer to test detector with gas. Full compliance with UL 2075. A code required trouble relay. Wiring supervision with SEMS terminals. A six-year end-of-life timer. 12/24 VDC. A current draw of 20mA in standby and 40mA in alarm. Versatile mounting for wall and ceiling. Electrochemical sensing technology. SPECIFICATIONS monoxide detector shall be a System Sensor model , listed to UL 2075 for Gas and Vapor Detectors and The detector shall be equipped with a sounder and a relay. The detector base shall be able to mount to a electrical box or direct (surface) mount to the wall ceiling. Wiring connections shall be made by means of screws. The detector shall provide dual color LED indi- which blinks to indicate normal standby, alarm, or end- When the sensor supervision is in a trouble condition, detector shall send a trouble signal to the panel. When the gives a trouble or end-of-life signal, the detector shall replaced. H-111 Initiating Devices SPECIFICATIONS Voltage: 12/24 VDC Signal: 85 dB in alarm Current: 20 mA Current: 40 mA (75 mA test) Contact Ratings: 0.5 A @ 30 VDC Contact Ratings: 0.5 A @ 30 VDC SPECIFICATIONS 5.1 x 3.3 x 1.3 Weight: 7 oz Temperature Range: 0 to 40 (32 to 104 Humidity Range: 22% to 90% RH Terminals: 14 to 22 AWG Single-gang backbox; surface mount to wall or ceil- Modes LED LED 1 per 1 per in 4 in 4 Feature: Pushing the Test/Hush button will silence the for 5 minutes (except in RealTest mode). 10/26/2010 Page 1 of 2 Feature: When the detector is in a trouble condition, it send a trouble signal to the panel via the trouble contact. Timer: After the sensor inside the detector has the end of its useful life, a trouble signal will be sent to panel. This will indicate that it is time to replace the detect- An electrochemical carbon monoxide detector life span is six years, and the detector must be replaced by date marked on the inside of the product. MODULE APPLICATIONS used in conjunction with the CO1224T, the monitor should be pro

February 7, 1997 Ionization Detector Addressable Devices Fire MEA (CP300) CP300 Addressable Ionization Detector is used ex- with the Fire(cid:149)Lite MS-9200 to sense products-of- and report the measured level of such prod- to the control panel. Since this detector is address- it will help emergency personnel quickly locate a fire its early stages, potentially saving precious rescue while also reducing property damage. Unique unipolar dual chamber provides exceptional sta- Factory preset at 1.5% nominal sensitivity for panel threshold level. Fully coated circuit boards and superior RF/transient Withstands air velocities up to 1,500 feet-per-minute triggering a false alarm. Addressable by device. Direct Decade 01-99 entry of address. 2-Wire loop connection. Visible LED (cid:147)blinks(cid:148) when the unit is addressed and on in alarm. Integral communications and built-in type identification. Compact, stylish design. Built-in functional test switch features push-pin activa- Low standby current. Listed to UL-268. Built-in tamper-resistant feature. Designed for direct surface mounting or electrical box Sealed against back pressure. 94-V0 plastic flammability rating. Removable cover and insect-resistant screen for field Remote LED output connection. Mounts to: single-gang box, 3.5″ or 4″ octagonal box, or square electrical box (using a plaster ring). Removable terminal block. Easy wiring via removable 6-pin terminal block allows for to be removed from system without loss of power remaining loop. ionization detectors in life-safety applications to pro- a broad range of fire-sensing capability, especially flaming fires. Where smoldering fires are anticipated, photoelectric sensor may provide faster response. detectors are constructed of LEXAN in an off- color. The CP300 direct-wire series of smoke detec- are designed to commercial standards and offer an appearance. is a registered trademark of GE Plastics, a subsidiary of Electric Company. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 2 CP300 Plug-In Detectors use a separate mounting to simplify installation, service and maintenance. base on box which is at least 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) Suitable boxes include: 4″ (10.16 cm) square box with plaster ring. 4″ (10.16 cm) octagonal box. 3.5″ (8.89 cm) octagonal box. Single-gang box. Because of the inherent supervision provided by the SLC end-of-line resistors are not required. Wiring (cid:147)T-taps(cid:148) or are permitted for Style 4 (Class (cid:147)B(cid:148)) wiring. CP300 uses one of 99 possible addresses on the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). It responds to regu- polls from the system and reports its type and status. CP300 Addressable Ionization Sensor(cid:146)s unique unipo- chamber responds quickly and uniformly to a broad of smoke conditions and can withstand wind gusts to 1,500 feet-per-minute without sending an alarm level Because of the unipolar chamber, the CP300 is two times more responsive than most ion- sensors. This makes it a more stable detector. range: current: current: velocity: humidity: 10% – 93% non-condensing. LINE IN

INSTALLATION AND mAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Plug-in Addressable Sensor Voltage Range: Average Standby Current: Alarm Current (LED on): Humidity Range: Temperature Range to 32 VDC 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing to 120 (0 to 49 (51 mm) installed in B350LP Base (155 mm) installed in B350LP Base oz. (153 g) FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 DESCRIPTION sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); NFPA 72. CP355 intelligent ionization sensor uses a state-of-the-art sensing cham- This sensor is designed to provide open area protection and is intended use with compatible control panels only. LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sensor indication. LED annunciator capability is available as an optional accessory (Part RA400Z). CP355 requires compatible addressable communications to function Connect this sensor to listed-compatible control panels only. recommends spacing sensors in compliance with NFPA 72. In low flow applications with smooth ceilings, space sensors 30 feet apart. For information regarding sensor spacing, placement, and special appli- refer to NFPA 72 or the System Smoke Detector Application Guide, from Fire-Lite. GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes, and any special requirements of the Authority Having Proper wire gauges should be used. The installation wires should color-coded to limit wiring mistakes and ease system trouble-shooting. Im- connections will prevent a system from responding properly in the of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram, see 1. the desired address on the sensor address switches, see Figure 2. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base turning it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit and the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. Tamper-Resistance Model CP355 includes a tamper-resistant capability that prevents its from the bracket without the use of a tool. Refer to the base for details on making use of this capability. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the system. See Figure 3. Test the sensor by positioning a test magnet against the sen- plastic in the magnet test area. The alarm level should be recognized the panel and the LED controlled by communication command from panel. Reset the sensor by communication command from the panel. covers provide limited protection against airborne dust particles during Dust covers must be removed before the sensors can sense smoke. sensors prior to heavy remodeling or construction. 1. WIRING DIAGRAm: DO NOT LOOP WIRE TERMINAL 1 OR 2. WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE OF CONNECTIONS. 2: A OPTIONAL WIRING 0 0 must be tested after installation and following periodic maintenance. before testing, notify the proper authorities that the smoke detector is undergoing maintenance and the system will be temporarily out service. Disable the zone or system undergoing maintenance to prevent alarms. methods must satisfy the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors maximum performance when tested and maintained in compliance with 72. the sensors as follows: Functional: Magnet Test (P/N M02-04-01 or

CP355 Plug-in Addressable Ionization Sensor and Maintenance Instructions DESCRIPTION sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system installation manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when installed in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association see NFPA 72. CP355 intelligent ionization sensor uses a state-of-the-art sensing chamber. This sensor is designed to provide open area protection and is intend- for use with compatible control panels only. LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sensor indication. Remote LED annunciator capability is available as an optional accessory No. RA400Z). CP355 requires compatible addressable communications to function properly. Connect this sensor to listed-compatible control panels Voltage Range: Avg. Standby Current: Alarm Current (LED on): Humidity Range: Temperature Range to 32 VDC @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec. with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC to 93% Relative Humidity, noncondensing to 49 (32 to 120 inches (43 mm) installed in B350LP Base inches (155 mm) installed in B350LP Base oz. (102 g) ANNUNCIATOR Do not loop wire under terminal 1 or 2. wire run to provide supervision of connections. recommends spacing sensors in compliance with 72. In low air flow applications with smooth ceilings, sensors 30 feet apart. For specific information regard- sensor spacing, placement, and special applications, refer NFPA 72 or the System Smoke Detector Application Guide, from Fire GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Code, applicable local codes, and any special of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Proper wire should be used. The installation wires should be color- to limit wiring mistakes and ease system trouble-shoot- Improper connections will prevent a system from respond- properly in the event of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram, see Figure 1. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches, see Figure 2. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base while turning it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit and activate the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. A OPTIONAL WIRING 1. covers provide limited protection against airborne dust particles during shipping. Dust covers must be removed before the sensors can sense Remove sensors prior to heavy remodeling or construction. Tamper-Resistance CP355 includes a tamper-resistant capability that prevents its removal from the bracket the use of a tool. Refer to the base manual for details on making use of this capability. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the system. See Figure 3. Test the sensor by positioning a test magnet against the sensor plastic in the test area. The alarm level should be recognized at the panel and the LED controlled by command from the panel. Reset the sensor by communication command from the panel. Stop 0 0 2. One Fire Place, Northford, CT 06472-1653, (203) 484-7161 cleaning, notify the proper authorities that the system is undergo- maintenance and will be temporarily out of service. Disable the system prevent unwanted alarms. Remove the sensor to be cleaned from the system. Remove the sensor cover. Press firmly on each of the four removal that hold the cover in place. Vacuum the outside of the screen carefully. If further cleaning is continue with Step 4, otherwise skip to Step 5. Use clean, compressed air to remove dust and debris from the sens- chamber. Replace the cover using the LEDs to align the c

CP355(A) Addressable Smoke Detectors CP355(A) addressable, low-profile, plug-in ionization uses a state-of-the-art ionization sensing chamber to open-area protection and is used exclusively with addressable Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACPs). ionization detector is used to sense products-of-combus- and report the measured level of such products to the fire control panel. Since this detector is addressable, it will emergency personnel quickly locate a fire during its early potentially saving precious rescue time while also property damage. Two LEDs on each sensor light to a local, visible sensor indication. Remote LED annun- capability available as an optional accessory, RA100Z(A). loop Two-wire loop connection. Unit uses base for wiring. Addressable by device. Rotary, decimal addressing: 01 99 with MS-9200, MS- and MS-9200UDLS(C) and 01 159 with MS- and MS-9600UDLS. Unique single-source, dual-chamber design to respond and dependably to a broad range of fires. communications and built-in type identification. Sleek, low-profile design. Built-in tamper-resistant feature. Removable cover and insect-resistant screen for simple cleaning. Withstands air velocities up to 1,200 feet-per-minute (6.1 m/ without triggering a false alarm. Factory preset at 1.5% nominal sensitivity for panel alarm level. Visible LED when the unit is addressed (communi- with the fire panel) and latches on in alarm. Sealed against back pressure. Direct surface mounting or electrical box mounting. Base mounts to: single-gang box, 3.5″ (8.89 cm) or 4.0″ cm) octagonal box, or 4.0″ (10.16 cm) square electri- box (using a plaster ring). ionization detectors in life-safety applications to provide a range of fire-sensing capability, especially fast, flaming Where smoldering fires are anticipated, a photoelectric may provide faster response. detectors are constructed of off-white plastic. CP355(A) low-profile smoke detectors are designed to commer- standards and offer an attractive appearance. E-260 Devices in B210LP(A) Base plug-in detectors use a detachable mounting base simplify installation, service and maintenance. base (all base types) on an electrical backbox which is least 1.5″ (3.81 cm) deep. For a chart of compatible junction see DF-60059. Because of the inherent supervision provided by the SLC end-of-line resistors are not required. Wiring or are permitted for Style 4 (Class B) wiring. CP355(A) uses one of 99 possible addresses on the MS- MS-9200UD, and MS-9200UDLS(C), or up to 318 (159 each loop) on the MS-9600 Series Signaling Line Circuit It responds to regular polls from the system and reports type and status. CP355(A) addressable ionization sensor unique unipolar responds quickly and uniformly to a broad range of conditions and can withstand wind gusts up to 1,200 (6.01 m/sec.) without sending an alarm level Because of its unipolar chamber, the CP355(A) is two times more responsive than most ionization This makes it a more stable detector. range: 15 32 VDC (peak). current: 300 @ 24 VDC. current: 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC (latched velocity: 1,200 ft./min. (6.1 m/sec.) maximum. 2.0″ (51 mm) high; base determines diameter. B210LP(A): 6.1″ (15.5 cm) diameter. B501(A): 4.1″ (10.4 cm) diameter. B200SR(A): 6.875″ (17.46 cm) diameter. B224RB(A): 6.2″ (15.748 cm) diameter. 01/05/2012 Page 1 of 2 Test magnet with telescoping handle. Detector removal tool. Allows installation and/or of detector heads from bases in high ceiling applica- Extension pole for XR2B. Comes in three 5-foot (1.524 sections. Detector removal tool without pole.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

InstallatIon anD maIntenance InstructIons relay control module Operating Voltage: Current Draw: Operating Current: Resistance: Range: to 32 VDC (LED on) direct poll; 255 group poll used to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Non-condensing H 4 W 11/4 D (Mounts to a 4 square by 21/8 deep box.) Electrical Box; CB500 Barrier FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 CRF-300 mounts directly to 4-inch square electrical boxes (see Figure 2A). box must have a minimum depth of 21/8 inches. Surface mounted electri- boxes (SMB500) are available. 2a. moDule mountIng BarrIer: 2B: InstallIng information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to control panel installation manual for detailed system information. If the will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the opera- and local authority that the system will be temporarily out of service. Dis- power to the control panel before installing the modules. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. DescrIptIon CRF-300 Relay Control Module is intended for use in addressable, two- systems, where the individual address of each module is selected using built-in rotary switches. It allows a compatible control panel to switch contacts by code command. The relay contains two isolated sets of contacts, which operate as a DPDT switch and are rated in accordance the table in the manual. Circuit connections to the relay contacts are supervised by the module. The module also has a panel controlled LED This module can be used to replace an C304 module that has been for Form-C operation. requIrements ensure proper operation, these modules shall be connected to listed com- system control panels only. 1. controls anD InDIcators: All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and When using control modules in nonpower limited applications, CB500 Module Barrier must be used to meet UL requirements for the sepa- of power-limited and nonpower-limited terminals and wiring. The bar- must be inserted into a 4 junction box, and the control module be placed into the barrier and attached to the junction box (Figure 2A). power-limited wiring must be placed into the isolated quadrant of the barrier (Figure 2B). Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and appropri- wiring diagrams. the address on the module per job drawings. Secure module to electrical box (supplied by installer), as shown in 2A. contact ratIngs: RATING VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION A A A A A A A A A A VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VAC VAC VAC VAC (L/R=5ms) (L/R=2ms) (PF=.35) (PF = .35) (PF=.35) (PF=.35) relay switch contacts are shipped in the standby state (open) state, but may have transferred to the activated (closed) state during shipping. To ensure that switch contacts are in their correct state, modules must be made to communicate with the panel before connecting circuits controlled by the module. 3. relay moDule wIrIng DIagram: NEXT MODULES TO LISTED COMPATIBLE PANELS ONLY PANEL OR DEVICE LINE CIRCUIT (SLC) VDC MAX. PAIR RECOMMENDED COMMON 2 CLOSED 2 OPEN 2 COMMON 1 CLOSED 1 ANY WIRING TO TERMINALS 4 10 IS NONPOWER THE CB500 BARRIER IS REQUIRED. THE CB500 A NONPOWER LIMITED LABEL, WHICH MUST PLACED OVER THE POWER LIMITED TERMINAL ON THE NAMEPLATE LABEL. OPEN 1 MODULE DOES NOT SUPERVISE CONTROLLED CIRCUITS ANY FAULT IN THE POWER SUPPLY IS TO THAT ZONE AND DOES NOT IN A FAULT IN A SEPARATE ZONE

CRF-300 Relay Control Module Instructions Operating Voltage: Resistance: Range: to 32 VDC used to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Noncondensing H x 4 W x 11/4 D (Mounts to a 4 square by 21/8 deep box.) Electrical Box; CB500 Barrier Installing information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to the control panel installation manual for detailed system If the modules will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the operator and local authority that the system be temporarily out of service. Disconnect power to the control panel before installing the modules. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. Description CRF-300 Relay Control Module is intended for use in addressable, two-wire systems, where the individual address of each module is using the built-in rotary switches. It allows a compatible control panel to switch discrete contacts by code command. The relay two isolated sets of Form-C contacts, which operate as a DPDT switch and are rated in accordance with the table in the manual. connections to the relay contacts are not supervised by the module. The module also has a panel controlled LED indicator. This can be used to replace an C304 module that has been configured for Form-C operation. Requirements ensure proper operation, these modules shall be connected to listed compatible system control panels only. CRF-300 mounts directly to 4 square electrical boxes (see Figure 2A). The box must have a minimum depth of 21 /8 Sur- mounted electrical boxes (SMB500) are available. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. When using control modules in nonpower limited the CB500 Module Barrier must be used to meet UL requirements for the separation of power-limited and terminals and wiring. The barrier must be inserted into a 4 /8 junction box, and the control module must placed into the barrier and attached to the junction box (Figure 2A). The power-limited wiring must be placed into the isolated of the module barrier (Figure 2B). Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and appropriate wiring diagrams. Set the address on the module per job drawings. Some panels support extended addressing. In order 2A. Module mounting with barrier: set the module above address 99 on compatible carefully remove the stop on the upper rotary with thumb in the direction shown in Figure 1. Secure module to electrical box (supplied by installer), shown in Figure 2A. 1. Controls and indicators: 865 6 7 8 9 2B: Alarms, Inc., One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 06472, 203-484-7161 Contact Ratings: RATING MAXIMUM VOLTAGE LOAD DESCRIPTION A A A A A A A A VDC VDC VDC VAC VDC VDC VAC VAC (L/R=5ms) (L/R=2ms) (PF=.35) (PF=.35) Coded Coded Coded Coded Coded relay switch contacts are shipped as shown in Figure 3, but may have transferred during shipping. To ensure that the switch con- are in their correct state, modules must be made to communicate with the panel before connecting circuits controlled by the mod- 3. Relay module wiring diagram: NEXT LINE VDC Max. PAIR RECOMMENDED MODULES TO LISTED COMPATIBLE

CRF-300(A) Module CRF-300(A) Addressable Relay Module provides the sys- with a dry-contact output for activating a variety of auxil- devices, such as fans, door holders, dampers, control etc. Addressability allows the dry contact to be through panel programming, on a select basis. is a communication protocol developed by Engineering that greatly enhances the speed of com- between analog intelligent devices. Intelligent communicate in a grouped fashion. If one of the within the group has new information, the panel CPU the group poll and concentrates on single points. The effect is response speed greater than five times that of designs. Built-in type identification automatically identifies these to the control panel. circuitry and relay powered directly by two-wire loop. LED green each time a communication is from the control panel and turns on in steady red activated. High noise immunity (EMF/RFI). Wide viewing angle of LED. SEMS screws with clamping plates for wiring ease. Direct-dial entry of address: 01 159 for MS-9600(A) series 01 99 on MS-9200UDLS(A) and MS-9050UD(A). CRF-300(A) may be programmed to operate dry contacts door holders, Air Handling Unit shutdown, etc., and to reset smoke detector power. The face plate is made of off-white heat-resistant plastic. Controls include two rotary switches for direct-dial entry of setting. The CRF-300(A) is configured for a single Class B (Style Y) Class A (Style Z) Notification Appliance Circuit. The CRF-300(A) provides two Form-C dry contacts that together. CRF-300(A) uses one of the addresses on a SLC loop. It to regular polls from the control panel and reports its and status, including the open/normal/short status of its Appliance Circuit (NAC). The LED blinks with each received. On command, it activates its internal relay. Open/short supervision is suspended with the CRF-300. switches set a unique address for each module. The may be set before or after mounting. The built-in CODE (not settable) will identify the module to the con- panel, so as to differentiate between a control module and relay module. E-400 Devices operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. SLC current draw: 6.5 mA (LED on). operating current: 230 direct poll (CLIP mode), group poll (LiteSpeed mode) with LED flashing. resistance: not used. range: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 range: 10% to 93% non-condensing. 4.5″ (11.43 cm) high x 4″ (10.16 cm) wide x (3.175 cm) deep. Mounts to a 4″ (10.16 cm) square x (5.398 mm) deep box. Contact Ratings Description Application Maximum VDC VDC VDC VAC VDC VDC VAC (L/R=5ms) (L/R=2ms) (PF=0.35) A A A A A A A 08/04/09 Page 1 of 2 Listings and Approvals some cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult fac- for latest listing status. UL: S2424 ULC: S2424 FM approved CSFM: 7300-0075:185 MEA: 72-01-E Line Information Intelligent addressable relay module. Intelligent addressable relay module, ULC listed model. Optional surface-mount backbox. For installation instructions, see document I56-1190-005 refer to the SLC Wiring Manual, document 51309. is a trademark and Fire Alarms is a registered trademark Honeywell International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use this document is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover

CRF-300-6(A) Relay Control Module CRF-300-6 six-relay control module provides an fire alarm system with six Form-C relays. first module is addressed from 01 to 154 while the remain- modules are automatically assigned to the next five higher Provisions are included for disabling a maximum of unused modules. A single isolated set of dry relay con- is provided for each module address, which is capable of wired for either a normally-open or normally-closed The module allows the control panel to switch these on command. No supervision is provided for the con- circuit. CRF-300-6 module has panel-controlled green LED indi- The panel can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or off. Six addressable Form-C relay contacts Removable 12 AWG (3.25 mm to 18 AWG (0.9 mm plug- terminal blocks Status indicators for each point Unused addresses may be disabled Rotary address switches LiteSpeed or CLIP operation Mount one or two modules in a BB-2F cabinet (optional) Mount up to six modules on a CHS-6 chassis in a CAB-4 or BB-6F cabinet (optional) Mounting hardware included current: 1.45 mA (SLC current draw with all used; if some addresses are disabled, the standby decreases) current: 32 mA (assumes all six relays have been once and all six LEDs solid ON) range: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 10% to 93% non-condensing 6.8″ (17.27 cm) high x 5.8″ (14.73 cm) wide x (2.54 cm) deep weight: 1.1 lb. (0.5 kg) including packaging options: CHS-6 chassis, BB-6F cabinet, or BB-2F gauge: 12 AWG (3.25 mm to 18 AWG (0.9 mm SLC wiring resistance: 40 or 50 ohms, panel current: 30 mA/relay pulse (15.6 ms pulse duration), under panel control contact ratings: 30 VDC; 70.7 VAC E-930 Devices ratings: 3.0 A @ 30 VDC maximum, resistive, non-coded. 2.0 A @ 30 VDC maximum, resistive, coded. 1.0 A @ 30 VDC maximum, inductive (L/R = 2 ms), coded. 0.5 A @ 30 VDC maximum, inductive (L/R = 5 ms), coded. 0.9 A @ 110 VDC maximum, resistive, non-coded. 0.9 A @ 125 VAC maximum, resistive, non-coded. 0.7 A @ 70.7 VAC maximum, inductive (PF = 0.35), non- 0.3 A @ 125 VAC maximum, inductive (PF = 0.35), non- 1.5 A @25 VAC maximum, inductive (PF = 0.35), non- 2.0 A @25 VAC maximum, inductive (PF = 0.35), non- Listings and Approvals listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in document. In some cases, certain modules or applications not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. UL Listed: S2424 ULC Listed: S2424 (CRF-300-6A) MEA Listed: 55-02-E CSFM: 7300-0075:0205 Maryland State Fire Marshall: Permit # 2099 FM Approved (Light Protective Signaling Only) 4/12/2016 Page 1 of 2 Line Information Six-relay control module Same as above with ULC Listing Optional cabinet for one or two modules. Dimensions, 9.234″ (23.454 cm) wide (9.484″ [24.089 cm] including x 12.218″ (31.0337 cm) high, x 0.672″ (1.7068 cm) BACKBOX: 9.0″ (22.860 cm) wide (9.25″ [23.495 cm] hinges), x 12.0″ (30.480 cm) high x 2.75″ (6.985 cm); (installed): 7.150″ (18.161 cm) wide overall x 7.312″ cm) high interior overall x 2.156″ (5.4762 cm) deep Optional cabinet for up to six modules mounted on chassis (below). Dimensions, DOOR: 24.0″ (60.96 cm) x 12.632″ (32.0852 cm) high, x 1.25″ (3.175 cm) deep, at bottom; BACKBOX: 24.0″ (60.96 cm) wide x 12.550″ cm) high x 5.218″ (13.2537 cm) deep Chassis, mounts up to six modules in a BB-6F cabi- is a trademark; and FireLite Alarms is a registered trademark Honeywell International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use this document is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product informat

No text preview available.

INSTALLATION ANd MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Six Relay Control Module FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 15-32 VDC 1.45 mA 32 mA (assumes all six relays have been switched once and all six LEDs solid on) Range: 10 to 93% Non-condensing 6.8 5.8 1.0 CH-6 Chassis; BB-6 Cabinet; BB-2 Cabinet 12-18 AWG 30 mA/Relay Pulse (15.6 mS pulse duration) pulse under panel control RATING VOLTAGE DESCRIPTION Operating Voltage: Current: Current: to 120 (0 to 49 Gauge: Current: A A A A A A A A A A VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VDC VAC VAC VAC VAC (L/R=5ms) (L/R=2ms) (PF=.35) (PF = .35) (PF=.35) (PF=.35) include: 1 3 Terminal Blocks 1 4 Terminal Blocks 11/4 Stand offs Machine Screws Shunt (NOTE: For the disable position, not more than one shunt shall be at the same time) Nuts REQUIREMENTS ensure proper operation, this module shall be connected to a compat- Fire system control panel (list available from Fire are descriptions of the CRF-300-6 mounting frameworks. There are mounting options for CRF-300-6 modules: Up to six CRF-300-6 modules can be installed on a CH-6 in a BB-6 One or two CRF-300-6 modules can be installed in a BB-2 cabinet relay switch contacts are shipped in the standby state (open) state, but have transferred to the activated (closed) state during shipping. To en- that the switch contacts are in their correct state, modules must be made communicate with the panel before connecting circuits controlled by the INSTALLING information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to appropriate Fire control panel installation manual for detailed sys- information. If the modules will be installed in an existing operational inform the operator and local authority that the system will be tempo- out of service. Disconnect the power to the control panel before install- the modules. This system contains static sensitive components. Always yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that charges are removed from the body. The module housing should also grounded. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. DESCRIPTION CRF-300-6 Six Relay Control Module is intended for use in an intelligent system. Each module is intended for Form-C switching applications, do not require wiring supervision for the load circuit. A single isolated of dry relay contacts is provided for each module, which is capable of wired for either normally open or normally closed for each operation. module has its own address. A pair of rotary code switches is used to set address of the first module from 01 to 154. The remaining modules are au- assigned to the next five higher addresses. Provisions are included disabling a maximum of three unused modules to release the addresses to used elsewhere. Each CRF-300-6 module also has panel controlled green indicators. The panel can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or latch off. STEPS CH-6 chassis is used to mount CRF-300-6 modules in a BB-6 cabinet. It up to six CRF-300-6 modules in a single cabinet row three wide and two modules deep. 1. Ch-6 ChASSIS: Cabinet Mounting 3. TYPICAL MOUNTING hOLE LOCATIONS: BB-2 cabinet has a built-in chassis that will accommodate one or two modules. 2. BB-2 CABINET: a clean, dry area, mount the backbox using the four holes provided in the surface of the cabinet. Chassis Installation CH-6 chassis is mounted in the BB-6 cabinet. It is shipped with two self- screws, which are used to fasten the chassis to the back wall of the (see Figure 4). 4. MOUNTING ThE Ch-6

I FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Duct Smoke Detector Temperature: Temperature: Velocity: Footprint Dimensions: Footprint Dimensions: Voltage Range: Current: Alarm Current (LED on): to 158 ( to 70 to 120 (0 to 49 with module installed in the D355PL to 158 ( to 70 to 93% Relative Humidity Non-condensing to 4000 ft./min. (0.5 to 20.3 m/sec.) in L in W in D (37 cm L cm W cm D) in L in W in D (19.7 cm L cm W cm D) pounds; 0.82 kg to 32 VDC @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC CURRENT LOADS AT 24 VDC Max. Max. Max. The D355PL come with the sensor head factory installed, part number SD355R. of Contents Limitations of Duct Smoke Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Contents of the Duct Smoke Detector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Detector Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Sampling Tube Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Measurement Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Verification of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Dectector Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 INSTALLINg the System Sensor Guide for Proper Use of Smoke Detectors in Duct Appli- (A05-1004), which provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this manual available online at www.systemsensor.com. NFPA Standards 72 and 90A also be referenced for detailed information. This manual shall be left with the owner/user of this equipment. This detector must be tested and maintained regularly following 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at least once a year. Of DUCT SMOkE DETECTORS National Fire Protection Association has established that DUCT DETEC- MUST NOT BE USED AS A SUBSTITUTE FOR OPEN AREA DETECTOR as a means of providing life safety. Nor are they a substitute for warning in a building regular fire detection system. Sensor supports this position and strongly recommends that the user NFPA Standards 90A, 72, and 101. The D355PL Air Duct Smoke Detectors listed per UL 268A. device will not operate without electrical power. Fire situations may an interruption of power. The system safeguards should be discussed your local fire protection specialist. device will not sense smoke unless the ventilation system is operating the cover is installed. this detector to function properly, it MUST be installed according to the in- in this manual. Furthermore, the detector MUST be operated within electrical and environmental specifications listed in this manual and the head installation manual. Failure to comply with these requirements prevent the detector from activating when smoke is present in the air duct. DESCRIPTION introduced into this air duct system will be distributed throughout the building. Smoke detectors designed for use in air duct systems are used sense the presence of smoke in the duct. D355PL Air Duct Smoke Detector utilizes photoelectric technology for detection of smoke. This detection method, when combined with an ef- housing design, samples air passing through the duct and allows detec- of a developing hazardous condition. When sufficient smoke is sensed, alarm signal is initiated at t

I FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Duct Smoke Detector Temperature: Temperature: Velocity: Footprint Dimensions: Footprint Dimensions: Voltage Range: Current: Alarm Current (LED on): to 158 ( to 70 to 120 (0 to 49 with module installed in the D355PL to 158 ( to 70 to 93% Relative Humidity Non-condensing to 4000 ft./min. (0.5 to 20.3 m/sec.) in L in W in D (37 cm L cm W cm D) in L in W in D (19.7 cm L cm W cm D) pounds; 0.82 kg to 32 VDC @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC CURRENT LOADS AT 24 VDC Max. Max. Max. The D355PL come with the sensor head factory installed, part number SD355R. of Contents Limitations of Duct Smoke Detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Contents of the Duct Smoke Detector Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Detector Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Sampling Tube Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Measurement Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Verification of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Dectector Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 INSTALLINg the System Sensor Guide for Proper Use of Smoke Detectors in Duct Appli- (A05-1004), which provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. Copies of this manual available online at www.systemsensor.com. NFPA Standards 72 and 90A also be referenced for detailed information. This manual shall be left with the owner/user of this equipment. This detector must be tested and maintained regularly following 72 requirements. The detector should be cleaned at least once a year. Of DUCT SMOkE DETECTORS National Fire Protection Association has established that DUCT DETEC- MUST NOT BE USED AS A SUBSTITUTE FOR OPEN AREA DETECTOR as a means of providing life safety. Nor are they a substitute for warning in a building regular fire detection system. Sensor supports this position and strongly recommends that the user NFPA Standards 90A, 72, and 101. The D355PL Air Duct Smoke Detectors listed per UL 268A. device will not operate without electrical power. Fire situations may an interruption of power. The system safeguards should be discussed your local fire protection specialist. device will not sense smoke unless the ventilation system is operating the cover is installed. this detector to function properly, it MUST be installed according to the in- in this manual. Furthermore, the detector MUST be operated within electrical and environmental specifications listed in this manual and the head installation manual. Failure to comply with these requirements prevent the detector from activating when smoke is present in the air duct. DESCRIPTION introduced into this air duct system will be distributed throughout the building. Smoke detectors designed for use in air duct systems are used sense the presence of smoke in the duct. D355PL Air Duct Smoke Detector utilizes photoelectric technology for detection of smoke. This detection method, when combined with an ef- housing design, samples air passing through the duct and allows detec- of a developing hazardous condition. When sufficient smoke is sensed, alarm signal is initiated at t

InnovairFlex Non-Relay Photoelectric Smoke Detector E-650 Addressable Devices Fire InnovairFlex D355PL(A) intelligent non-relay duct smoke detector and DNRW watertight non- photoelectric duct smoke detector feature a pivoting that fits both square and rectangular footprints capa- of mounting to a round or rectangular duct. duct smoke detector, with its NEMA-4 rating, is listed a watertight, UV resistant enclosure providing protection falling dirt, rain, and windblown dust, splashing and directed water, allowing operators to use the detector in most extreme environments. units sense smoke in the most challenging conditions, in airflow speeds of 100 to 4,000 feet per minute (0.5 20.32 m/s), temperatures of -4 to 158 (-20 to 70 a humidity range of 0 to 95 percent (non-condensing.) improved cover design isolates the sensor head, which for ease of maintenance. A cover tamper feature indi- a trouble signal for a removed or improperly installed cover. The Fire InnovairFlex housing provides a 3/ conduit knockout and ample space to facilitate easy wir- and mounting of a relay module. Fire InnovairFlex duct smoke detector can be custom- to meet local codes and specifications without additional The new InnovairFlex product line is compatible with all Innovair models, including remote test accessories. Photoelectric, integrated low-flow technology. Air velocity rating from 100 ft/min to 4,000 ft/min (0.5 m/s to m/s). Versatile mounting options: square or rectangular configu- Broad ranges for operating temperature (-4 to 158 – to 70 and humidity (0% to 95% non-condensing). Patented sampling tube installs from front or back of the with no tools required. Cover tamper signal. wiring space with a newly added 3/4 conduit Available space within housing to accommodate mounting a relay module. Easily accessible code wheels on sensor head (sold sepa- Clear cover for convenient visual inspection. Remote testing capability. Requires com line power only. Accommodates the installation of an addressable relay sold separately, (CRF-300) for applications requir- a Form-C relay. (Rectangle) 14.38 in (37 cm) Length; 5 in (12.7 cm) 2.5 in (6.6 cm) Depth. (Square) 7.75 in (19.7 cm) Length; 9 in (22.9 cm) Width; in (6.35 cm) Depth. 1.6 lb (0.73 kg). Temperature Range: -4 to 158 (-20 to Temperature Range: -22 to 158 (-30 to Humidity Range: 0% to 95% relative humidity Duct Velocity: 100 to 4,000 ft/min (0.5 to 20.32 m/s). provides system flexibility with a variety of accesso- including two remote test stations and different means of and audible system annunciation. As with our duct detectors, all duct smoke detectors accessories are UL and DNRWs with a date code of 0013 or higher do require external 24VDC for remote test applications when with a remote-test-capable detector. CURRENT LOADS AT 24 VDC mA Max Max Listings and Approvals product manual for lists of compatible UL-Listed In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Con- factory for latest listing status. UL: S1059. ULC: S1059 12/18/2012 Page 1 of 2 CSFM: 3242-1653:0209. FM approved. Line Information Intelligent non-relay photoelectric low flow smoke housing. Includes SD355R Detector. Watertight intelligent non-relay photoelectric low flow smoke detector housing. Does not include detector head. Remote test capable addressable low-profile smoke detector. Addressable low-profile photoelectric smoke de

D365PL(A) and DNRW Non-relay Photoelectric Smoke Detectors Fire(cid:129)Lite D365PL(A) intelligent non-relay photoelectric duct detector and DNRW watertight non-relay photoelectric duct detector feature a pivoting housing that fits both square and footprints capable of mounting to a round or rectangular DNRW duct smoke detector, with its NEMA-4 rating, is listed as watertight, UV resistant enclosure providing protection against fall- dirt, rain, and windblown dust, splashing and hose directed allowing operators to use the detector in the most extreme units sense smoke in the most challenging conditions, oper- in airflow speeds of 100 to 4,000 feet per minute (0.5 m/s), temperatures of -4 158 (-20 70 and a range of 0 93 percent (non-condensing). improved cover design isolates the sensor head, which allows for of maintenance. A cover tamper feature indicates a trouble sig- for a removed or improperly installed sensor cover. The housing a 3/4-inch conduit knockout and ample space to facilitate wiring and mounting of a relay module. Fire(cid:129)Lite D365PL(A) duct smoke detectors can be customized meet local codes and specifications without additional wiring and compatible with all previous models, including remote test Photoelectric, integrated low-flow technology Air velocity rating from 100 ft/min 4,000 ft/min (0.5 m/s 20.32 Versatile mounting options: square or rectangular configuration Broad ranges for operating temperature (-4 158 -20 and humidity (0% 93% non-condensing) Sampling tube installs from front or back of the detector with no required Cover tamper signal wiring space with a newly added 3/4″ conduit knockout Easily accessible code wheels on sensor head (Included with Clear cover for convenient visual inspection (D365PL(A) only) Remote testing capability Requires com line power only Housing accommodates an addressable relay module, sold sepa- (CRF-300) for applications requiring a Form-C relay (Rectangle) 14.38 in (37 cm) Length; 5 in (12.7 cm) Width, 2.5 (6.6 cm) Depth (Square) 7.75 in (19.7 cm) Length; 9 in (22.9 cm) Width; 2.5 in cm) Depth 1.6 lb (0.73 kg) Temperature Range: -4 158 (-20 70 Temperature Range: -22 158 (-30 70 Humidity Range: 0% 93% relative humidity (non-con- Duct Velocity: 100 4,000 ft/min (0.5 20.32 m/s) Devices provides system flexibility with a variety of accessories, two remote test stations and different means of visible and system annunciation. As with our duct smoke detectors, all smoke detectors accessories are UL listed. CURRENT LOADS AT 24 VDC Max Max Listings and Approvals product manual for lists of compatible UL-Listed devices. In cases, certain modules may not be listed by certain approval or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest list- status. UL: S1059 ULC: S1059 CSFM: 3242-0075:0508 FM approved Line Information suffix indicates ULC listed model. Intelligent non-relay photoelectric low flow smoke housing. Includes SD365R(A)-IV detector. Watertight intelligent non-relay photoelectric low flow duct detector housing. Requires photoelectric smoke detector separately). NEMA-4 rated. Remote test capable addressable low-profile photo- smoke detector; ivory; supports CLIP and LiteSpeed pro- Remote test capable addressable low-profile photo- smoke detector; white; supports LiteSpeed protocol only Addressable low-profile photoelectric smoke detector; supports CLIP and LiteSpeed protocols Addressable low-profile photoelectric smoke detector; supports LiteSpeed protocol only Addressable low-profile photoelectric smoke detector a built-in 135

MS-9050UD(E) Alarm Control Panel DACT Fire MS-9050UD(E) is a Fire Alarm Control Panel and Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter (DACT) into one circuit board. This compact, intelligent control panel supports up to 50 addressable of any type of detectors and modules. With an exten- list of powerful features, the MS-9050UD programs just like larger products, yet fits into applications previously only by conventional panels. MS-9050UD integral DACT transmits system status troubles, AC loss, etc.) to a Central Station via the pub- switched telephone network. It also allows remote and local of the control panel using the PK-CD Upload/ utility. In addition, the control panel may be pro- or interrogated off-site via the public switched tele- network. Any personal computer with Windows 95 or and compatible modem with a speed of 14.4 kbps or and Fire Upload/Download software kit PK-CD, may as a Service Terminal. This allows download of the entire or upload of the entire program, history file, walk-test current status and system voltages. power supply and all electronics are contained on a single board supported on a new quick install chassis and in a metal cabinet. Available accessories include local remote upload/download software, remote annunciators, reverse polarity/city box transmitter. (4XTMF) options include a UL listed printer, PRN-6F and the new Internet Monitoring module.The FireWatch Series inter- monitoring modules IPDACT-2 and IPDACT-2UD permit of alarm signals over the Internet, saving the monthly of two telephone lines. Although not required, the second- telephone line may be retained providing backup communi- over the public switched telephone line. Unless otherwise specified, the term MS-9050UD is used this data sheet to refer to both the MS-9050UD and the MS- FACPs. For MS-9050UDC, refer to DF-60445. Listed to UL Standard 864, 9th edition. Auto-program mode) two devices set to the same address. On-board DACT. Two independently programmable Style Z (Class A) or Style Selectable strobe synchronization for System Sensor, Whee- (Class B) NAC circuits. and Gentex devices. monitor modules. Remote Acknowledge, Silence, Reset and Drill via address- Two programmable relays and one fixed trouble relay. Built-in Programmer. Telephone Line Active LEDs. EIA-232 PC interface. Real-time clock/calendar with automatic daylight savings 80-character LCD display with backlighting. History file with 500 event capacity. Automatic detector sensitivity testing (NFPA 72 compliant). Automatic device type-code verification. A1-20 Point trouble identification. Waterflow selection per module point. Alarm verification selection per detector point. Maintenance alert warns when smoke detector dust accumu- is excessive. One-person audible or silent walk test with walk-test log and System alarm verification selection per detector point. PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) and Pre-signal per point 72 compliant). Up to eight ANN-BUS annunciators Remote Acknowledge, Alarm Silence, Reset and Drill via modules or remote annunciator. Upload/Download (local or remote) of program and data via DACT. COMMUNICATION LOOP Single addressable SLC loop which meets NFPA Style 4, 6 7 requirements. 50 addressable device capacity (any combination of address- detectors and modules). Compatible with Fire addressable devices (refer to SLC Manual). APPLIANCE CIRCUITS (NACS) Two independently programmable output circuits. Circuits be configured for the following outputs: Style Y (Class B) Style Z (Class A) Door Holder Service (cannot be used for notification appliances) Aux Power Source (cannot be used for notification app

DAYR7.S624 – Central-station Fire Alarm System Units Certified for Canada Guide OD Home Contact Us ULC Home Fire Alarm System Units Certified for Canada Bottom Fire Alarm System Units Certified for Canada General Information for Central-station Fire Alarm System Units Certified for Canada ALARMS Fire-lite Pl CT 06472 USA Premises Unit for Central Station, Remote Station and Proprietary: Models ES-50XC, ES-200XC control Unit. Input 50/60Hz 3.25amps Models IPOTS-COM Input 24VDC 61mA, PWRMOD24 Input 24VDC 24mA Replacement Only – Complies with CAN/ULC-S559-04: MS-9050UDC-FR MS-9600LSC-FR of Services 60Hz, 3.0A CS(PPU) 60Hz, 3.0A A, CS(PPU) MS-5UD-7C-FR, MS-10UD-7C, MS-10UD-7C-FR 60Hz, 1.0A CS(PPU), A Updated on 2017-12-28 this page of Use Top 2018 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada Inc. the UL Leaf Mark is on the product, or when the word “Environment” is included in the UL Mark, please search the UL database for additional information regarding this product certification. appearance of a company name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been under ULC Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the ULC Mark should be considered to be Listed and under ULC Follow-Up Service. Always look for the Mark on the product. permits the reproduction of the material contained in the ULC Online Directories subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide Designs and/or Listings (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-misleading manner, without any of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement “Reprinted from the ULC Online Directories with permission from Laboratories of Canada Inc.” must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material must a copyright notice in the following format: “Copyright 2018 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada Inc.” 5:04:13 PM]

GENERAL System Sensor DH400ACDC samples air currents through a duct. It gives dependable performance management of fans, blowers and air conditioning sys- preventing the spread of toxic smoke and fire gases the protected area. Sensor(cid:146)s DH400ACDC 4-wire duct detector hous- will accommodate either the 1451DH ionization sensor the 2451 photoelectric sensor. The twist-in, twist-out heads allow easy removal for quick cleaning and or a change in application without removing duct housing. The System Sensor DH400ACDC Duct Detector is supplied with either the 1451DH Sensor (order or the 2451 Photoelectric Sensor (order 24 VDC operation. Accommodates ionization or photoelectric heads. Simple change-out of detector heads: twist in, twist out. Easy to maintain. Powered outputs for remote LED and Sounder/Strobe. Air velocity rating from 500 to 4,000 feet per minute (3.175 25.4 m./sec.). UL 268A listed. Reset time: 0.3 seconds (maximum). Clear polycarbonate cover for convenient visual inspec- of sampling tube filters. Rugged plastic housing (mounting portion). Remote test station option. Easy and quick mounting to round or rectangular ducts 1 to 12 (0.305 to 3.66 m) wide. Three-year limited warranty. detectors are designed to operate on 24 VDC, VAC, 120 VAC, or 240 VAC. Alarm and supervisory contacts are available for control panel interface initiation), HVAC control, and other auxiliary func- These detectors are NOT designed for 2-wire appli- detectors are: NOT a substitute for open area smoke detectors. NOT a substitute for early warning detection. NOT a replacement for a building(cid:146)s regular fire detection to NFPA 90A for additional duct detector application 18, 1998 Series Duct Detector Housings for and Photoelectric Sensors Conventional Initiating Devices Fire Duct Detector Housing 2451 Photoelectric Sensor AND INSTALLATION twist-in, twist-out detector and base allow the removal detectors easily and quickly for cleaning and mainte- In addition, detector heads can be changed to fit application without removing the duct housing. The comes with built-in exhaust tube. Sampling are available to fit ducts from 1 to 12 feet (0.305 to meters) wide. LIMITS 32(cid:176)F to 120(cid:176)F (0(cid:176)C to 49(cid:176)C). NOT INSTALL where normal ambient temperatures 120(cid:176)F (50(cid:176)C). humidity: 10% to 93%. velocity: 500 to 4,000 ft./min. (3.175 to 25.4 m./sec.). SPECIFICATIONS 14.5 inches (36.83 cm). 5 inches (12.70 cm). (installed): 4 inches (10.16 cm). 4.5 pounds (2.041 kg). document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 2 i

DIM-485 Installation Drawing 50380 Rev A 10/30/95 ECN 95-458 power before installing the DIM-485. Insert the plastic standoff, supplied with the DIM-485, into the hole near the J11 connector on the top right side of the MS-9200 main circuit board. Align the connector on the board with J11 on the MS-9200 main circuit board and align the hole on the DIM-485 with the standoff into the main circuit board. Carefully seat the DIM-485 connector on the main circuit board J11 connector press to seat the DIM-485 on the standoff. to Note 2) Main Circuit Board in grounded box Core P/N Required VDC TB4 3 (+) 4 (-) in grounded box in grounded box Core P/N Required EIA-485 EIA-485 (-) Please be certain to secure the DIM-485 module to the MS-9200 and to keep all wiring from mechanically interfering with the DIM-485. Disconnect all power from the MS-9200 before installing and wiring the DIM-485 module. Earlier versions of the MS-9200 main circuit board do not have a hole near connector J11, preventing insertion of the standoff. Ferrite Core P/N 29090 is required to meet FCC Part 15 requirements if the EIA-485 wiring is not in conduit. Twisted, shielded is recommended for the EIA-485 communications loop. Six conductor overall shielded wire may be used for the four EIA-485 wires and the two power wires. It is, however, strongly that the power and communication wires be separate whenever possible.

Your Product is marked with the following label: Document Chart, Column _____ required instructions: L601:AV revision of documentation that pertains to your product is below in the column referenced in this area of the label. Chart Ext Page Zone Page Zone Split Series Series Series Series Series Series Command Combination Operating Installation Utility 911A 1000 200 2000 Signaling LIne Circuit Detectors Wireless 2F

The DP-4XF Kit includes the dress panel, screws, and four stand-offs. To install DP-4XF on the 4X backbox, you must determine which type of backbox you Installation Drawing 15619 Rev:A 11/24/92 15619:A ECN 92-197 Type A: This backbox has PEM on the rails inside the box. Screw the 1-15/16″ standoffs into the nuts in the Then secure the dress panel with the provided. Panel these holes for A these holes for A A: nuts in rail A: nuts in rail Dress Panel Backbox Panel Type B: This backbox has no nuts in the rails but rather, has holes the top and bottom flanges. Secure the panel to the backbox with the screws If the meter option is not to be used, the plate with the two screws pro- over the meter hole. these holes for B B: in flanges these holes for B Dress Panel B: in flanges Backbox 15619 Rev:A 11/24/92 P/N 15619:A

No text preview available.

Duct Smoke Detector smoke detector accessories add functionality to the duct system by allowing quick, convenient inspections at eye and effective audible and visual notification options. All Sensor duct smoke detectors and accessories are UL PIEZO ANNUNCIATOR APA151 piezo annunciator, which replaces the APA451 a new, improved look, provides an audible alarm signal, a LED to indicate alarm status, and a green LED to indicate status. It is intended for use with System Sensor 4-wire duct smoke detector applications without a system panel, to comply with NFPA 90A. SpectrAlert Advance Mini-Horns Piezo Annunciator Voltage Voltage Alarm Current Range Humidity Gauge 24 VDC to 33 VDC mA to 120 (0 to 49 to 93%, non-condensing to 18 AWG H x 2.9 W x .45 D MINI-HORNS MHR and MHW SpectrAlert Advance mini-horns feature or continuous tones at high and low volume settings. small footprint allows mounting to single-gang back for applications where a small device is desired. Current Draw Range Range Sounder Frequency Gauge 12 DC or FWR (Full Rectified) or Regulated VDC or FWR to 33 VDC (9 to 33 VDC with Module) mA RMS max. at 8 to 17.5 DC mA RMS max. at 8 to 17.5 FWR mA RMS max. at 16 to 33 DC mA RMS max. at 16 to 33 FWR to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% non-condensing kHz to 18 AWG x 2.9 x 0.45 1/27/12 Page 1 of 4 REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS RA100Z and RA100ZA remote annunciators are designed both conventional and intelligent applications. Their red LED visual indication of an alarm condition. Remote Annunciator Range Alarm Current System: 3.1 to 32 System: 18 to 32 mA x 2.8 x 1.3 REMOTE TEST STATIONS RTS151 and RTS151KEY remote test stations are auto- fire detector accessories designed to test duct smoke from a convenient location. For 4-wire detectors, the test station features a multi-colored LED that alter- between steady green and red. For 2-wire detectors, the illuminates red for alarm. Remote Test Station with Key Requirements Response Time Range Humidity Gauge LED (Green): 14 to 35 12 mA max. LED (RED): 2.8 to 32 12 mA max. seconds max. to 140 (-10 to 60 non-condensing to 18 AWG x 2.75W x 1.8 MULTI-SIGNALLING ACCESSORIES RTS2 and RTS2-AOS multi-signaling accessories are to work with InnovairFlex 4-wire conventional duct detectors. These accessories include a key switch that be used to select one of two connected sensors to be reset, or both by a push button switch. They also enable measurements using the SENS-RDR sensitivity (sold separately). The AOS (Add-On Strobe) is an accessory included with the RTS2-AOS model. and RTS-AOS Multi-signaling Accessory Requirements Range Humidity Gauge to 29 VDC 3.0 mA max. 16.0 mA max. without Strobe: 30 mA with Strobe: 55 mA max. dBA at 10 ft. to 140 (-10 to 60 non-condensing to 22 AWG x 5.3 x 1.6 Remote Test Station Requirements Switch Switch Response Time Range Humidity Gauge LED 2.8 to 32 VDC, 10 max. Current: 95 mA max. VA @ 32 VDC VA @ 32 VDC seconds

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

ECC-50/100(E) Command Center ECC-50/100 and ECC-50/100E are multipurpose emer- voice evacuation panels for fire applications, mass notification or both. The Primary Operating Consoles (POCs) 50 or 100 watts of audio power for distribution to up to eight circuits (i.e. zones). The ECC-50/100(E) comes standard a single speaker circuit and a built-in 25Vrms, 50 watt amplifier. secondary 50 watt amplifier (ECC-50W-25/70V) can be added for speaker circuit backup or to increase system capacity to two circuits and an additional 50 watts of audio power. An ECC-CE6 module added to the ECC-50/100(E) will upgrade system to a maximum of eight speaker circuit outputs. All output circuits can be wired in either Style Y (Class B) or Z (Class A) configuration. The ECC-50/100(E) has fourteen programmable messages (up to 60 seconds each), built-in field pre- and post-announce tone generators and a fully Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) with 2.0 amps of NAC power. The ECC-50/100(E) includes three built- Form-C relay contacts, (AC power, trouble and MNS active) a follower input for triggering the on board NAC circuit and special application power. A built-in power supply with switch technology delivers operational power to the panel and an battery charger supports charging up to 26AH batteries cabinet holds up to 18AH batteries). fire protection applications, the ECC-50/100(E) is an adjunct to any UL listed FACP, providing reverse polarity or contact can be used as a stand-alone unit for non-fire applications. seamless integration between fire and mass notification, the can be directly activated via serial communication the ES-200X, MS-9600(UD)LS, or MS-9200UDLS. Activa- of the ECC-50/100(E) via other FACPs uses the eight on board Input Circuits (CMDs). Two of the eight CMD circuits 1 & CMD 2) can be individually field programmed for activa- by an FACP Notification Appliance Circuit reverse polarity and eight can be activated by a contact closure. In addition, the ECC- can be activated from a building Private Branch (PBX) with the integral night ring feature. ECC-50/100(E) programming is done by using a simple, built-in utility accessed from any laptop. For added flexibility, ECC-50/100(E) supports both 25Vrms and 70.7Vrms speaker operation. By adding a 70V transformer conversion module or an additional 70.7 volt secondary amplifier the system supports 70.7 volt speaker devices. ECC-50/100(E) can expand in order to accommodate larger or complex installations. To add more control and increase sys- capacity, any combination of up to eight external remote con- (including the ECC-LOC, ECC-RPU, and ECC-RM) and up to distributed audio amplifiers (including the ECC-50DA(E), ECC- and ECC-125-DA(E) can be connected on the external data and audio riser data bus to create a fully integrated command A fully loaded system supports up to 1100 watts of total audio and up to 24 speaker circuit outputs. APPLICATIONS Schools Theaters Auditoriums Dormitories Healthcare Facilities Military facilities Places of Worship Factories Office Buildings Restaurants C-200 Communications UL Listed to UL 2572 Communication (Control Units Mass Notifi- Systems) and UL 864 (emergency voice evacuation for Modular design for system flexibility and easy expansion Removable terminal blocks for ease of servicing and module 50 watts of 25V audio power (expandable to 100 watts) RMS 2 amp Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) output, sync genera- or follower for System Sensor, Wheelock or Gentex protocols Optional 70.7VRMS conversion transformer available for the pri- amplifier. (Note that speaker wiring continues to be super- in standby, alarm and when background music is playing this optional transformer installed) Eight Command Input Circuits to activate messages 1 to 8: CMD1 and CMD2 are field selectable to be activated from 12 or VDC Notification Appliance Circuits (reverse polarity) or con- closures CMD3-CMD8 are a

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

ECC-50DA(E) Audio Amplifiers ECC-50DA(E), ECC-50BDA, and ECC-125DA(E) are 50 watt, 100 watt, and 125 watt amplifiers that are with the ECC-50/100(E) Emergency Command Center. distributed audio amplifiers amplify an audio message distribution throughout a facility when additional audio is required. They are designed as self-contained units can be conveniently installed near an area of protection to wiring demands for speaker circuit outputs. ECC-50DA(E) is capable of producing 50 watts of total and includes four built-in, fully supervised speaker cir- The ECC125DA(E) is capable of producing 125 of total power with four built-in, fully supervised speaker Both amplifiers are expandable to include eight circuits when an optional ECC-CE4 module is installations that require survivability, the ECC-50BDA pro- 50 watts or 100 watts of primary power along with 50 of backup power and comes standard with eight built-in, supervised speaker circuits/zones. combination of up to eight, ECC-50DA(E)s, ECC- or ECC-125DA(E)s can be connected to the ECC- to provide a total output of 1100 watts of audio and up to 24 speaker circuit outputs. These distributed amplifiers are wired to the data bus and the Audio-Riser of the ECC-50/100(E) primary operating console. They their own power supplies with built-in battery charger and both fully supervised by the ECC-50/100(E) for any trouble The ECC-50DA(E) and ECC-125DA(E) units come stan- with four onboard fully supervised speaker circuit and are expandable to eight circuits when an ECC-CE4 module is added. The ECC-50BDA includes eight onboard fully supervised circuits/zones. Any combination of up to eight ECC-50DA(E)s, ECC- or ECC-125DA(E)s per system can be used with ECC-50/100(E) for a total of 1100 watts of audio power 24 speaker circuit outputs. The ECC-50BDA can be used in the following configura- 50 Watts primary / 50 Watts back up 100 watts primary / No back up 100 watts primary / 50 Watts backup (Optional ECC- required) The ECC-50BDA supports the use of low frequency sound- per UL 464. Refer to the Device Compatibility Docu- #15384 for compatible devices. Supports both Class A (Style Z) and Class B (Style Y) wir- Easy setup and configuration by using a simple, built-in based programming utility on the ECC-50/100(E). UL2572 (Communication and Control Units Mass Notifica- Systems). UL 864 (Emergency Voice Evacuation for C-210 Communications Built-in power supply and battery charger that supports up 35AH. (For batteries larger than 18 AH, use the BB-26 or Battery Box.) ECC-50DA(E) and ECC-50BDA are field selectable for or 70.7Vrms of operation. Sturdy, scratch resistant cabinet. SUITABLE APPLICATIONS Schools Theaters Auditoriums Dormitories Healthcare Facilities Factories Military Facilities Places of Worship Restaurants Office Buildings ECC-50DA(E), ECC-50BDA, and ECC-125DA(E) can be or flush mounted. ECC-50DA(E), ECC-50BDA, and ECC-125DA(E) are only with the ECC-50/100(E) Emergency Command Specifications AC POWER: ECC-50DA: 120VAC, 60Hz, 1200mA (max). ECC-50DAE: 240VAC, 50Hz, 600mA (max). ECC-50BDA: 120VAC, 60Hz, 2470mA (max). ECC-125DA: 120VAC, 60Hz, 2200mA (max). ECC-125DAE: 240VAC, 50Hz, 1250mA (max). 6/30/2015 Page 1 of 4 70V Transformer conversion module for 70V Local Operator Console (Complete user interface), refer to the data sheet DF-60762 for more information. Remote Page Unit Hand held microphone, 14 buttons. Please refer to the data sheet DF-60761 for information. Remote Microphone only. Please refer to the data DF-60760 for more information. Fire Fighter Telephone System. Please refer to the sheet DF-60765 for more information. Remote Ph

Distributed Audio Amplifiers Manual LS10027-000FL-E Rev: LS10027-000FL-E:D 15-270 Alarm & Emergency Communication System Limitations a life safety system may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for life and property insurance! automatic fire alarm system made up of smoke by escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materi- etc.). heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning and a fire alarm control panel (FACP) with remote notifi- detectors do not sense particles of combustion and alarm capability provide early warning of a developing fire. when heat on their sensors increases at a predetermined a system, however, does not assure protection against or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise heat detec- damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this emergency communication system made up of the rate-of-rise feature of each detector should be tested least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist. automatic fire alarm system (as described above) and a life detectors are designed to protect property, not life. communication system that may include an autonomous unit (ACU), local operating console (LOC), voice commu- Smoke detectors must be installed in the same and other various interoperable communication meth- as the control panel and in rooms used by the system for broadcast a mass notification message. Such a connection of alarm transmission wiring, communications, however, does not assure protection against property and/or power. If detectors are not so located, a devel- or loss of life resulting from a fire or life safety event. fire may damage the alarm system, compromising its abil- to report a fire. Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat be located throughout a protected premises following warning devices such as bells, horns, strobes, recommendations of the current edition of the National Fire and displays may not alert people if these devices Association Standard 72 (NFPA 72), manufacturer located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or State and local codes, and the located on another floor of a building. Any warning device contained in the Guide for Proper Use of fail to alert people with a disability or those who have Smoke Detectors, which is made available at no charge consumed drugs, alcohol, or medication. Please note all installing dealers. This document can be found at http:// A study by the Federal An emergency communication system may take priority over Management Agency (an agency of the United government) indicated that smoke detectors may not go in as many as 35% of all fires. While fire alarm systems are to provide early warning against fire, they do not warning or protection against fire. A fire alarm system not provide timely or adequate warning, or simply may not for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. second-floor detector, for example, may not sense a first-floor basement fire. of combustion or from a developing fire not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, chim- even wet or humid areas may inhibit particle or smoke fire alarm signal, do not respond to or comprehend the of the signal. Audible devices, such as horns and can have different tonal patterns and frequencies. It is property owner responsibility to conduct fire drills and training exercises to make people aware of fire alarm and instruct them on the proper reaction to alarm sig- rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can cause or permanent hearing loss. requirements as defined by NFPA, local codes, and Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Studies have shown that certain people, even when they hear Language and instructional requirements

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

ECC-50/100C Command Center ECC-50/100C is a multipurpose emergency voice panel for fire applications, mass notification appli- or both. The Primary Operating Consoles 50 or 100 watts of audio power for distribution up to eight speaker circuits (i.e. zones). The ECC-50/100C standard with a single speaker circuit and a built-in 50 watt amplifier. A secondary 50 watt amplifier can be added for single speaker circuit or to increase system capacity to two speaker circuits an additional 50 watts of audio power. An optional ECC- module added to the ECC-50/100C will upgrade the sys- to a maximum of eight speaker circuit outputs. All speaker circuits can be wired in either Class B or Class A config- The ECC-50/100C has fourteen field programmable (up to 60 seconds each), built-in field configurable and post-announce tone generators and a fully super- Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) with 2.0 amps of NAC power. The ECC-50/100C includes three Form-C relay contacts, (AC power, trouble and MNS a NAC follower input for triggering the on board NAC and 500mA special application power. A built-in power with switch mode technology delivers operational to the panel and on board battery charger supports up to 26AH batteries (ECC cabinet holds up to 18AH fire protection applications, the ECC-50/100C is an adjunct to most ULC listed FACPs or as a stand-alone unit for applications. For seamless integration between fire mass notification, the ECC-50/100C can be activated by MS-9600LSC(-FR) and MS-9200UDLSC(-FR) when con- to the serial communication bus. Activation of the ECC- via other FACP uses the eight on board Command Circuits (CMD Two of the eight CMD circuits (CMD 1 CMD 2) can be individually field programmed for activation an FACP Notification Appliance Circuit reverse polarity and eight can be activated by a contact closure. In addition, the can be activated from a building Private Exchange (PBX) with the integral night ring feature. ECC-50/100C programming is done by using a simple, programming utility accessed from any laptop. For flexibility, the ECC-50/100C supports both 25Vrms and speaker output operation. By adding a 70V trans- conversion module (ECC-XRM-70V) or an additional volt secondary amplifier (ECC-50W-25/70V) the system 70.7 volt speaker devices. To add more control and increase system capacity, any com- of up to eight external remote consoles (including the APPLICATIONS ECC-50/100C is used in applications that require single- voice evacuation for buildings with an occupancy than 1,000 occupants. Modular design for system flexibility and easy expansion Removable terminal blocks for ease of servicing and mod- replacement DF-60815:B Communications 50 watts of 25V audio power (expandable to 100 watts) 2 amp Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) output, sync or follower for System Sensor, or Wheelock pro- Optional 70.7V RMS conversion transformer available for primary amplifier. (Note that speaker wiring continues to supervised in standby, alarm and when background is playing with this optional transformer installed) Eight Command Input Circuits to activate messages 1 to 8: CMD1 and CMD2 are field selectable to be activated from or 24 VDC Notification Appliance Circuits (reverse or contact closures CMD3-CMD8 are activated by contact closures Speaker Circuits Single Class B or Class A speaker Circuit Two Class B or Class A speaker circuits (with optional Audio Amplifier installed) Eight Class B or Class A speaker circuits (with optional and ECC-CE6 installed) ECC-50/100C can be controlled by an FACP via the ANN/ (EIA-485) link. Compatible FACPs include the MS- and MS-9200UDLS Certified for seismic applications when used with the appro- seismic mounting kit supervised microphone Microphone time-out feature which reverts back to prere- message if emergency page exceeds the pro- time

No text preview available.

ECC-FFT Telephone ECC-FFT is a Fire Fighter telephone system that pro- secure and reliable communications for firefighters. This system is capable of providing annunciation and for local and remote telephone handsets. It includes a in display and keypad that provide an indication of phone as well as corresponding trouble conditions. For flexibility, 24 remote telephone connections are offered can be monitored individually or as a group of multi-phone The auto-program feature automatically recognizes all fire fighter phone jacks on the system and immedi- configures the system for full operation and supervision. ECC-FFT allows for up to ten users to plug in to a remote jack (FPJ-F) and communicate simultaneously a building. An onboard SLC circuit (capable of being in Class B (Style 4) or Class A (Style 6)) allows for con- monitoring of the telephone jacks connected to the It is housed in a lockable cabinet that includes multiple locations for field wiring. APPLICATIONS Schools Theaters Auditoriums Dormitories Healthcare Facilities Military facilities Places of Worship Factories Office Buildings Restaurants Provides supervision control and annunciation of up to 24 telephone jacks. Built-in Auto-program feature. Simple and straightforward user interface. Telephone circuit supervised with 4.7K End of line resis- when wired in Style Y, Class B operation. Full System status LED display. Onboard SLC circuit can be wired for class A (Style 6 or 7) or class B (Style 4) configuration. Full system status LED display. Supports Multi-Phone Jack Audio Circuit supervision. Certified for seismic applications Onboard Form-C system trouble relay. Allows simultaneous operation of up to 10 Fire Fighter handsets (FHS-F when connected to the ECC-FFT. Fire Fighter Phone Jack (FPJ-F provides a plug-in location the FHS-F. Fire Fighter Handset Cabinet (FHSC-RF/SF) is used to five Fire Fighter Handsets (FHS-F). Accessories FPJ-F: Remote Phone Jack which mounts to a single-gang box. FHS-F: Fire Fighter Handset used to communicate over the circuit connected to the ECC-FFT. FHSC-RF: Fire Fighter Handset Cabinet (recess mount) is. to store five Fire Fighter Handsets (FHS-F). C-260 Communications FHSC-SF: Optional Fire Fighter Handset Cabinet (surface is used to store five Fire Fighter Handsets (FHS-F). MMF-301: Addressable monitor module that can be used to the connection of the Fire Fighter Telephone handset (FHS-F). Up to 24 of these modules are by the ECC-FFT. Fault Isolator module used to protect the ECC-FFT wire-to-wire short circuits on the SLC loop. It is between each device or the SLC loop to isolate a problem between the Remote Phone Jacks when Class A (Style 7) wiring is required and indicators BUTTON CONTROLS Auto-program: Searches the SLC loop on the ECC-FFT devices. When a device is found, the active LED will in each zone. Accept: Used to accept the configuration after an auto-pro- is initiated. Answer Call: Will connect the local handset to a phone cir- for communication when a remote handset is plugged a (FPJ-F phone jack. Trouble Silence: Used to silence a system type trouble has occurred in the ECC-FFT system. INDICATORS (VISIBLE WITH DOOR AND DRESS OPEN) Status LED: Will blink at a 50% on/off rate until FFT initial- is complete (which takes approximately 20 sec- Once initialization is complete, the status LED will at a 10% on and 90% off rate. 7/28/2015 Page 1 of 4 Answer Call: When a remote handset is connected to the channel, this LED will blink and the piezo will sound. operator at the FFT then picks up the local handset presses the Answer button which causes the Answer LED to remain on steady and t

ECC-LOC Operator Console ECC-LOC is an optional Local Operator Console that compatible with the ECC-50/100(E) Emergency Command for fire protection applications and mass notification. It part of a family of external remote consoles that allows for the ECC-50/100(E) display and control to remote within a building. It consists of a complete operator that is identical to the ECC-50/100 main console as as a built-in microphone with a push-to-talk feature for CALL paging. It is housed in a cabinet with a keyed or an thumb lock to prevent unauthorized access. The local console requires an external data bus connection, an audio riser connection, and an external operator inter- power connection (24 Volts DC) from the ECC-50/100 console. APPLICATIONS Schools Theaters Auditoriums Dormitories Healthcare Facilities Military facilities Places of Worship Factories Office Buildings Restaurants Provides messaging status and control of the ECC-50/ primary operator console Complete operator interface that is identical to the ECC-50/ that includes a built-in microphone for ALL CALL UL 864 (Emergency Voice Evacuation for Fire) listed Certified for seismic applications A maximum of eight ECC-LOCs can be connected to an primary operating console Built-in microphone with push-to-talk feature that can be for ALL CALL paging Fourteen programmable message buttons that can be used activate all speaker circuits remotely Sturdy cabinet design with a keyed lock to prevent unautho- access. Optional thumb lock available Simple and straightforward user interface Specifications POWER REQUIREMENTS: 24VDC non-resettable power from the ECC50/100(E). Operator Interface Power (Non-supervised). ECC-50/100(E) Product Manual P/N LS10001-000FL-E standby and alarm current requirements as well as battery Specifications 19.0″ (48.26 cm) high x 16.65″ (42.29 cm) wide x 5.2″ deep 19.26 (48.92cm) high x 16.821 (42.73cm) wide x 670 deep C-220 Communications Ring (TR-CE): 22.00″ (55.88 cm.) high x 19.65″ (49.91 wide Specifications 18.44 lbs (8.36 kg) Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the ECC-LOC Local Console. In some cases, certain modules may not be by certain approval agencies or listing may be in pro- Consult factory for latest listing status. UL Listed S2424 CSFM: 7300-0075 FDNY: COA #6152 and Codes ECC-LOC complies with the following UL Standards, 72 Fire Alarm system requirements, International Build- Codes, and California Building Codes. UL S2424. UL 2572 2012, IBC 2009, IBC 2006, IBC 2003, IBC 2000 (Seis- CBC 2007 (Seismic) 7/28/2015 Page 1 of 4 options amplifier expander Circuit Circuits & TB21 firefighter telephone local console remote unit remote battery – J7 audio 50W amplifier 125W amplifier 50W amplifier CHG-120F charger charger Emergency Command Center (Possible Configurations) 2 of 4 DF-60762:C 7/28/2015 (VISIBLE WITH DOOR and Indicators BUTTON CONTROLS All Call MNS Control System Control Speaker Select 1-24 Message Select Buttons 1-8 Diagnostic Select Trouble Silence Console Lamp Test STATUS Fire System Active (green) MNS Control (green) System Control (green) System in Use (green) Speaker Zone 1-24 Active (green) Speaker Zone 1-24 Fault (yellow) OK to Page (green

ECC-LOC Operator Console ECC-LOC is an optional Local Operator Console is compatible with the ECC-50/100 Emergency Command for fire protection applications and mass notification. It part of a family of external remote consoles that allows for the ECC-50/100 display and control to remote loca- within a building. It consists of a complete operator inter- that is identical to the ECC-50/100 main console as well a built-in microphone with a push-to-talk feature for ALL paging. It is housed in a cabinet with a key or an optional lock to prevent unauthorized access. The local operator requires an external data bus connection, an external riser connection, and an external operator interface connection (24 Volts DC) from the ECC-50/100 main APPLICATIONS ECC-LOC is used in applications that require single-chan- voice evacuation for buildings with an occupancy greater 1,000 occupants. Provides messaging status and control of the ECC-50/100 operator console. Complete operator interface that is identical to the ECC-50/ that includes a built-in microphone for ALL CALL pag- Certified for seismic applications A maximum of eight ECC-LOCs can be connected to an primary operating console. Built-in microphone with push-to-talk feature that can be for ALL CALL paging. Fourteen programmable message buttons that can be used activate all speaker circuits remotely. Sturdy cabinet design with a keyed lock to prevent unautho- access. Optional thumb lock available. Simple and straightforward user interface. Specifications POWER REQUIREMENTS: 24VDC non-resettable power from the ECC50/100. Operator Interface Power (Non-supervised). ECC-50/100 Product Manual P/N LS10001-000FL-E for and alarm current requirements as well as battery cal- Specifications 19.0″ (48.26 cm) high x 16.65″ (42.29 cm) wide x 5.2″ deep. 19.26 (48.92cm) high x 16.821 (42.73cm) wide x 670 deep. Ring (TR-CE): 22.00″ (55.88 cm.) high x 19.65″ (49.91 wide DF-60814:B Communications Specifications 18.44 lbs (8.36 kg). Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the basic ECC-50/ Fire emergency voice evacuation system. In some cases, modules may not be listed by certain approval agen- or listing may be in process. Consult factory for latest list- status. UL/ULC Listed S2424. FM Listed. and Codes ECC-LOC complies with the following ULC Standards, NFPA 72 Fire Alarm system requirements, and Interna- Building Codes. CAN/ULC-S527. 2012, IBC 2009, IBC 2006, IBC 2003, IBC 2000 (Seis- 7/28/2015 Page 1 of 4 Circuit Circuits & TB21 amplifier expander battery – J7 operator console CHG-120F charger charger Emergency Command Center (Possible Configurations) 2 of 4 Canadian DF-60814:B 7/28/2015 (VISIBLE WITH DOOR and Indicators BUTTON CONTROLS All Call MNS Control System Control Speaker Select 1-24 Message Select Buttons 1-8 Diagnostic Select Trouble Silence Console Lamp Test STATUS Fire System Active (green) MNS Control (green) System Control (green) System in Use (green) Speaker Zone 1-24 Active (green) Speaker Zone 1-24 Fault (yellow) OK to Page (green) Microphone Trouble (yellow) Message 1-8 Active (red) Message 1-8 Fault (yellow) Remote Amplifier 1-8 Fault (yellow) LOC/RM 1-8 Fault (yellow) LOC/RM 1-8 Active (green) Main Console Fault (yellow) AC Power (green) Ground Fault (yellow) Charger Fault (yellow) Battery Fault (yellow) Data Bus Fault (yellow) NAC Fault (yellow) NAC Active (green)

ECC-RM Microphone ECC-RM is an optional Remote Microphone that is with the ECC-50/100(E) Emergency Command for fire protection applications. It is part of a family of remote consoles that allows for extending the opera- interface to remote locations within a building. It is housed a cabinet with a keyed or an optional thumb lock to limit to qualified personnel. ECC-RM remote microphone allows for ALL CALL paging be broadcast over the speaker circuits when depressing the push-to talk switch. The RM requires an external bus connection, an external audio riser connection, and external operator interface power connection (24 Volts DC) the ECC-50/100 main console. APPLICATIONS Schools Theaters Auditoriums Dormitories Healthcare Facilities Military facilities Places of Worship Factories Restaurants Office Buildings External remote console that provides ALL CALL paging over the speaker zones of the ECC-50/100(E) operating console. Modular design for maximum system flexibility and easy Supports both Class A (Style Z) and Class B (Style Y) wir- A maximum of eight ECC-RMs can be connected to an primary operating console. Built-in microphone with push-to-talk feature that can be for ALL CALL paging. Sturdy cabinet design with a keyed lock to prevent unautho- access. Optional thumb lock is available. Simple and straightforward user interface. Specifications POWER REQUIREMENTS: 24VDC non-resettable power from the ECC-50/ External Operator Interface Power (Non-supervised). ECC-50/100(E) Product Manual P/N LS10001-000FL-E standby and alarm current requirements as well as battery Requirements Product Installation Document PN: LS10029-000FL-E detailed wiring requirements. Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the ECC-RM Microphone. In some cases, certain modules may not C-240 Communications listed by certain approval agencies or listing may be in pro- Consult factory for latest listing status. Listed S2424 6912-0075:0228 COA #6152 Approved and Codes ECC-RM complies with NFPA 101 Life Safety Code and the following UL Standards and with NFPA 72 Fire Alarm requirements. 864. and Humidity ranges system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49 F and at a relative humidity 93% 2% RH (non- at 32 2 (90 3 However, the useful of the system’s standby batteries and the electronic com- may be adversely affected by extreme temperature and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this and its peripherals be installed in an environment with normal room temperature of 15-27 C/60-80 F. Specifications (21.082 cm) high x 6.080 (15.44 cm) wide x 4.337 (11.02 deep (Door attached and closed). Specifications 4 lbs (1.81 kg). 6/23/2015 Page 1 of 4 Amplifier options Circuit Expander Circuit Circuits & TB21 Firefighter Telephone Operator Console Paging Unit Microphone battery – J7 audio remote amplifier remote amplifier remote amplifier CHG-120F charger charger Emergency Command Center (Possible Configurations) 2 of 4 DF-60760:C 6/23/2015 (VISIBLE WITH DOOR and Indicators BUTTON CONTROLS Microphone Push to talk switch STATUS System in Use (green) OK to Page (green) AC Power (green) Data Trouble (yellow) Audio Trouble (Yellow) Microphone Trouble (yellow) Line Information (Ordering Remote Microphone only.

No text preview available.

ECC-RPU Page Unit ECC-RPU is an optional Remote Page Unit that is com- with the ECC-50/100(E) Emergency Command Center fire protection applications. It is part of the family of external consoles that allows for extending the ECC-50/100(E) and control to remote locations within a building. It is in a cabinet with a keyed or an optional thumb lock to access to qualified personnel. ECC-RPU includes a built-in microphone and 8 selection that can be pushed to activate the system remotely. CALL paging can be broadcast over the speaker circuits depressing the microphone’s push-to talk button. As an benefit, the 9th button on the RPU can be used to acti- an MMF-300 monitor module that may be installed inside ECC-RPU cabinet to be used for applications such as shutdown. The ECC-RPU requires an external data bus an external audio riser connection, and an exter- operator interface power connection (24 Volts DC) from the main console. APPLICATIONS Schools Theaters Auditoriums Dormitories Healthcare Facilities Factories Military Facilities Places of Worship Restaurants Office Buildings Provides messaging status and control of the ECC-50/ primary operator console. Modular design for maximum system flexibility and easy Supports both Class A (Style Z) and Class B (Style Y) wir- A maximum of eight ECC-RPUs can be connected to an primary operating console. Built-in microphone with push-to-talk feature that can be for ALL CALL paging. Up to fourteen programmable messaging functions that can activated over speaker zones remotely. Sturdy cabinet design with a keyed lock to prevent unautho- access. Optional thumb lock available. Simple and straightforward user interface. Additional 9th button can be used to activate an optional monitor module installed inside the cabinet for such as HVAC shutdown. Specifications POWER REQUIREMENTS: 24VDC non-resettable power from the ECC-50/ External Operator Interface Power (Non-supervised). ECC-50/100(E) Product Manual P/N LS10001-000FL-E standby and alarm current requirements as well as battery C-230 Communications Requirements Product Installation Document PN: LS10030-000FL-E detailed wiring requirements. Accessories TR-6-R: Trim ring for ECC-RPU (Red). 17.624 x 16 provides a 1.5 wall coverage around the box). MMF-300: Monitor module used to supervise dry contact ECC-THUMBLTCH: Optional Thumb Latch. (Non UL- devices. and Indicators BUTTON CONTROLS All Call Button Message Select Buttons 1-14 Microphone Push to talk switch Message Button 9 STATUS System in Use (green) OK to Page (green) Mic Trouble (yellow) Message 1-8 Active (red) Message 1-8 Fault (yellow) Power (green) Data Bus Fault (yellow) Audio Riser Fault (yellow) Board Fault (yellow) (VISIBLE WITH DOOR 6/30/2015 Page 1 of 4 options amplifier Circuit Circuits & TB21 circuit expander firefighter telephone local console remote unit remote battery – J7 audio 50W amplifier 125W amplifier remote CHG-120F charger charger Emergency Command Center (Possible Configurations) 2 of 4 DF-60761:C 6/30/2015 Line Information (Ordering Remote Page Unit Hand held microphone, 14 buttons. (Primary operating Console) 50 Watt, 25VRMS speaker zone emergency voice evacuation system, microphone, built in tone generator and 14 recordable

No text preview available.

ECC-RTZM Telephone Zone Module ECC-RTZM is a Remote Telephone Zone Module that for secure access to the ECC-50/100(E) Emergency Center via cell phone or a remote telephone Authorized personnel can broadcast live or prere- messages over selected speaker zone(s) on the ECC- by calling into the ECC-RTZM and initiating events. ECC-RTZM adds another level of accessibility to the for triggering mass notification events for non listed applications. In the event of an emergency, a trained would have the ability to dial into the ECC-RTZM to initiate prerecorded messages or perform a live by using touch tone based activation through DTMF multi-frequency.) For an added level of security, the provides password based authentication so that users who are issued a four digit password can be access to the system. faster pre-approved access, Seamless Caller-ID based will allow up to five telephones to be any pre- for immediate paging without password authentica- required. ECC-RTZM easily mounts in the ECC-50/100(E) cabinet the batteries and plugs into a J9 connector on the main board. Use of the RTZM with the ECC-50/100(E) the approval of local authority having jurisdiction. It is UL 864 or UL 2572 listed. Allows for secure and remote activation of the ECC-50/ Accessible from any land line or cellular phone. Seamlessly mounts into the ECC-50/100 cabinet with mini- effort required. Web based programming for fast commissioning. DTMF) Touch Tone based activation and control of mes- message activation or live paging on the ECC-50/ Connects to a remote telephone line on a PBX System. Allows for All Call or Selective Zone activation. (Up to 24 zones). 16 Programmable Speaker Zone groups for initiating multi- speaker zones simultaneously. Live messaging or pre-programmed messages can be acti- security. Provides password based authentication for limited access Seamless Caller-ID based authentication for up to five pre- phone numbers. Can be configured for English, Spanish, French and Portu- capability during ECC-RTZM programming. C-260 Communications SUITABLE APPLICATIONS Schools Theaters Auditoriums Dormitories Military facilities Places of Worship Factories Restaurants Office Buildings ECC-RTZM mounts inside of the ECC-50/100(E) cabinet. product installation document PN LS10034-000FL-E for on installation and setup. ECC-RTZM is compatible with the ECC-50/100 and the Emergency Voice Evacuation system. Specifications Standby current draw: 0.055 amps. Alarm current draw: 0.060 amps. to the ECC-50/100(E) manual for the complete system draw table. Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the basic ECC- In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by approval agencies or listing may be in process. Consult for latest listing status. No agency listings 6/30/2015 Page 1 of 2 and Humidity ranges system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49 F and at a relative humidity 93% 2% RH (non- at 32 2 (90 3 However, the useful of the system’s standby batteries and the electronic com- may be adversely affected by extreme temperature and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this and its peripherals be installed in an environment with normal room temperature of 15-27 C/60-80 F. Requirements Product Installation Document part number: LS10034- for detailed wiring requirements. Specifications Weight: 0.61 lbs (.276kg). Line Information Remote Telephone Zone Module. (Primary operating Console) 50 Watt, 25VRMS speaker zone emergency voice evacuation system. microphone, built in tone generator and 14 reco

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

EntryScan 22 Door Stand Alone Access Control System Fire-Lite EntryScan 22 is an outstanding 2-door, stand access control system. The EntryScan 22 offers fea- usually found only in much larger systems. Elevator English language programming via an integral key- with LCD display, built-in printer interface, multiple technologies, and 4,000 cardholder capacity make EntryScan 22 an extremely versatile and powerful 2- system. 2 Readers-Weigand, Magnetic Stripe, Proximity, Keypad, Combination 1 Exit Switch Input per Door 4,000 Cardholders Batch or Single Card Entry/Void 2 Door Strike Relays-Form C contacts Door Relay Unlock Timer 0-30 Seconds Real Time Clock Calendar-Battery Protected Unlock/lock doors based on Time & Date Holiday Schedule with up to 32 Holidays 32 Character LCD Display Integral Programming Keypad English Language Menu Driven Prompts Card Range 1- 65,000 Built-in Surge Suppression & EMI/RF Filtering Built-in Battery Charger Can Daisy Chain 4 Units to a single printer Built-in Printer Interface Printer Port Selectable Baud Rate 2400, 1200, 600, & 300 Elevator Control 64 Output Groups Dimensions: 18 1/4″ X 15 1/8″ X 4 1/8″ Enclosure: hinged door with keylock Weight: 17 lbs. without battery, 19 lbs. with battery Power Requirements: 12VAC, 40VA; power supply & battery included Color: red backbox and door with blue overlay EntryScan 22 with a 4,000 Cardholder capacity and control to 24 floors make it an ideal choice for: Professional Office Suites Health Clubs Condominiums system may be used for not only controlling access to elevators, and other physical areas, but may also be to control various building systems such as lighting HVAC. This can be accomplished through the use of EntryScan 22 Output Group functions and optional Relay Output Modules. This tremendous flexibility the EntryScan an extremely valuable addition to facility! Clintonville Road CT 06472 (203) 484-7161 484-7118 in the U.S.A. 1 of 2 26, 1994 LINE INFORMATION 22: 2-door stand-alone access control system battery and transformer. 80 column serial printer. 120VAC 60Hz required. Keypad module: Allows the use of keypads with the 22. Keypads may be stand-alone or keypad/ combinations. Alarm Bypass Module: Provides shunting of door on a reader-controlled door to prevent alarms upon card entry. Provides two shunts (one per door). Relay Output Module: Provides six form C relay for the control of Elevators, air handlers, lighting or other building systems upon card entry. Up to 105A modules may be connected to the EntryScan 22 a maximum of 24 outputs. Remote Relay Cabinet: Allows for the mounting of to four 105A Relay Output Modules. Includes power and one 105A module. Requires T102 transformer B1240 battery. Ribbon Cable Connector: Attaches one 105A to the EntryScan 22. One required for each 105A Length: 50 inches. Transformer: 24VAC 40VA transformer. Battery: 12VDC 4AH sealed lead-acid battery. Proximity Reader Power Supply: For use with readers requiring greater than 5 vdc operating T102 transformer required. Use one B1240 for 12 operation or two B1240s for 24 volt operation. try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover specific applications or anticipate all All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact

DF-60957:C Fire Alarm Control Panels Addressable FACP Communicator ES-200X is the latest intelligent addressable Fire Alarm Control (FACP) from Fire Alarms and is a direct replacement for MS-9200UDLS. The ES-200X comes with a pre-installed com- and supports up to 198 addressable devices (99 detec- and 99 modules). With an extensive list of powerful features, the programs just like Fire other addressable products, fits into applications previously served only by conventional pan- pre-installed IPOTS-COM is a dual technology (POTS and IP) The POTS transmits system status (alarms, troubles, loss, etc.) to a Central Station via the public switched telephone The IP communicator internet monitoring capability sends signals over the Internet saving the monthly cost of two dedi- business telephone lines. Although not required, the second- telephone line may be retained providing backup communication the public switched telephone line. Optional cellular reporting is using the CELL-MOD or CELL-CAB-FL. and local programming of the control panel is possible using FS-Tools Upload/Download utility. Programming databases can uploaded/downloaded via the panel USB port (and USB cable) via an ethernet connection using the IPOTS-COM communicator. USB port also allows for the download or upload of the entire history file, walk-test data, current status and system volt- by means of a USB flash drive. power supply and all electronics are contained on a circuit supported on a new quick install chassis and housed in a cabinet. Available accessories include local and remote software, remote annunciators, and reverse polar- box transmitter (4XTMF). Listed to UL Standard 864, 10th edition Pre-installed IPOTS-COM Ethernet IP and POTS (Plain Old Tele- Service) Central Station Communicator over AlarmNet Optional CELL-MOD or CELL-CAB-FL GSM Central Station over AlarmNet Automated activation of the ECC-50/100 Emergency Command ECC-FFT Firefighter Telephone option Compatible with SWIFT wireless devices Auto-programming (learn mode) reduces two devices set to the same address Four built-in, independently programmable Style Z (Class A) or Y (Class B) NAC circuits Selectable strobe synchronization for System Sensor, Wheelock, Gentex devices Notification Appliance Circuit End of Line resistor matching Four programmable function keys for ease of maintenance Two programmable relays and one fixed trouble relay Built-in Programmer Real-time clock/calendar with automatic daylight savings control History file with 1,000 event capacity Addressable sounder base compatibility Multi-criteria detector (smoke, heat, CO) with programmable 80-character LCD display with backlighting Control module delay timer Automatic detector sensitivity testing (NFPA 72 compliant) Automatic device type-code verification Point trouble identification Waterflow selection per module point Single addressable SLC loop which meets NFPA Class B and is excessive compliant) Alarm verification selection per detector point Maintenance alert warns when smoke detector dust accumula- One-person audible or silent walk test with walk-test log and System alarm verification selection per detector point PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) and Pre-signal per point (NFPA Up to 16 ANN-BUS annunciators- 8 per each ANN-Bus Remote Acknowledge, Alarm Silence, Reset and Drill via modules or remote annunciator Upload/Download of program and data via USB with optional FS- Programming Utility COMMUNICATION LOOP Supports LiteSpeed and CLIP protocols SLC operates up to 10,000 ft. (3,000 m) in LiteSpeed mode with unshielded wire A requirements modules) Wiring Manual) 198 addressable device capacity (99 addressable detectors and Compatible with Fire addressable devices (refer to the APPLI

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

DF-60953:C Fire Alarm Control Panels Addressable FACP Communicator ES-50X is the latest intelligent addressable fire alarm control (FACP) from Fire Alarms and is a direct replacement for MS-9050UD/LS. The ES-50X comes with a pre-installed and supports up to 50 addressable devices in any of detectors or modules. With an extensive list of features, the ES-50X programs just like Fire other panels, yet fits into applications previously served only by panels. pre-installed IPOTS-COM is a dual technology (POTS and IP) The POTS transmits system status (alarms, troubles, loss, etc.) to a Central Station via the public switched telephone The IP communicator internet monitoring capability sends signals over the Internet saving the monthly cost of two dedi- business telephone lines. Although not required, the second- telephone line may be retained providing backup communication the public switched telephone line. Optional cellular reporting is using the CELL-MOD or CELL-CAB-FL. and local programming of the control panel is possible using FS-Tools Upload/Download utility. Programming databases can uploaded/downloaded via the panel USB port (and USB cable) via an ethernet connection using the IPOTS-COM communicator. USB port also allows for the download or upload of the entire history file, walk-test data, current status and system volt- by means of a USB flash drive. power supply and all electronics are contained on a circuit supported on a new quick install chassis and housed in a cabinet. Available accessories include local and remote software, remote annunciators, and reverse polar- box transmitter (4XTMF). Listed to UL Standard 864, 10th edition Pre-installed IPOTS-COM Ethernet IP and POTS (Plain Old Tele- Service) Central Station Communicator Optional CELL-MOD or CELL-CAB-FL GSM Central Station over AlarmNet Compatible with SWIFT wireless devices Auto-programming (learn mode) reduces two devices set to the same address Notification Appliance Circuit End of Line resistor matching Four programmable function keys for ease of maintenance Two programmable relays and one fixed trouble relay Built-in Programmer Real-time clock/calendar with automatic daylight savings control History file with 1,000 event capacity Addressable sounder base Multi-criteria detector (smoke, heat, CO) with programmable 80-character LCD display with backlighting Control module delay timer Automatic detector sensitivity testing (NFPA 72 compliant) Automatic device type-code verification Point trouble identification Waterflow selection per module point Alarm verification selection per detector point unshielded wire Two independently programmable, built-in Style Z (Class A) or A requirements Selectable strobe synchronization for System Sensor, Wheelock, and modules) Y (Class B) NAC circuits Gentex devices Maintenance alert warns when smoke detector dust accumula- is excessive One-person audible or silent walktest with walktest log & printout System alarm verification selection per detector point PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) and Pre-signal per point (NFPA compliant) Up to 16 ANN-BUS annunciators- 8 per each ANN-Bus Remote Acknowledge, Alarm Silence, Reset and Drill via modules or remote annunciator Upload/Download of program and data via USB with optional FS- Programming Utility COMMUNICATION LOOP Supports LiteSpeed and CLIP protocols SLC operates up to 10,000 ft. (3,000 m) in LiteSpeed mode with Single addressable SLC loop which meets NFPA Class B and 50 addressable device capacity (any combination of addressable Compatible with Fire addressable devices (refer to the Wiring Manual) APPLIANCE CIRCUITS (NACS) Two independently programmable output circuits. Circuits can be

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

The FC-PSM(E) Power Supply/Battery Charger Module can be used to stand-alone power to the Voice Evacuation Control Panel. The requires 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 1.0 amps. The FC-PSME requires VAC, 50 Hz, 0.5 amps. In addition to supplying operating the modules are capable of charging 7 AH to 17 AH batteries. Evacuation Control Panel Power Supply/Battery Module Installation Drawing 50612 Rev B 8/8/97 ECN 97-303 Make certain all power (AC and DC) is removed before any connections are made. Power Supply/Battery Charger Module Installation Remove two mounting screws from the top left and bottom left corners of the main circuit board (largest circuit board closest to cabinet back). Install two short metal standoffs, which are supplied with the FC-PSM(E) Power Supply/Battery Charger Module, by screw- them into the top left and bottom left corners of the main circuit board, where the screws were removed in Step 1. Install the two supplied long metal standoffs by screwing them onto the threaded mounting studs in the top and bottom rails in the back box. The mounting studs are located to the far left on each rail (refer to illustrations on following Remove the factory installed jumper from connector P7 of the main circuit board. P7 is located on the bottom left corner the main circuit board (refer to illustration below). Carefully align connector J1 on the FC-PSM(E) Power Supply/Battery Charger Module with connector P7 on the main board and press the FC-PSM(E) securely into place. Make certain the pins are properly aligned to prevent bending or any pins. Secure the FC-PSM(E) to the standoffs using the two screws removed in Step 1 and two supplied screws. It is important that module be secured with the metal screws in order to help protect against lightning electrical transients. Continue with the FC-PSM(E) transformer installation as described on the following page. 2, 3 Standoff 1, 2, 3 factory jumper installing the Module 2, 3 Standoff 1, 2, 3 Standoff Power Supply/ Charger Module Evacuation Control Panel Circuit Board Remove two mounting screws from main board upper and lower left corners Main Circuit Board Install four metal standoffs by screwing place (note two different lengths) Install FC-PSM(E) Module and with four screws Circuit Main Circuit Board Backbox Mounting Rails Backbox Mounting Rails Backbox Mounting Rails Make certain all power (AC and DC) is removed before any connections are made. Transformer Installation Locate two threaded mounting studs in the bottom left corner of the backbox (refer to backbox illustration below). Position XRM-24(E)Transformer Assembly over mounting studs. Transformer should be oriented so the cable assembly is the left as illustrated below. Secure Transformer to the studs with the two supplied nuts. Do not tighten one nut until the next step. Connect a wire from a solid earth ground to one of the Transformer mounting studs and tighten the nut. This connection is in order to provide proper lightning and transient protection for the panel. Plug the XRM-24(E) Transformer cable assembly into connector P1 which is located in the lower left corner of the Power Supply/Battery Charger Module. Note that the Transformer cable connector is keyed to prevent connection. Complete the installation by connecting the AC power wires to the Hot, Neutral and Earth terminals of TB1 on the Power Supply/Battery Charger Module. If batteries are being used, connect the batteries (17 AH max.) to connector P2 located to the left center of the FC-PSM(E) Supply/Battery Charger Module. Apply power to the panel. Connector – Connector – Ground Connection AC Terminal Transformer Assembly Evacuation Control Panel (VECP) Backbox Mounting Rail – Top Mounting Locations Mounting Rail – Bottom Mounting Studs Backbox of 2 50612 Rev B ECN 97-303 8/8/97

The optional FC-XRM70 Transformer Module can be used to the 25 V connector J1 plugs into amplifier connector P1. amplifiers to 70.7 V amplifiers. Evacuation Control Panel Transformer Module Installation Drawing 50615 Rev A 2/26/97 ECN 97-079 Make certain all power (AC and DC) is removed before any connections are made. Transformer Module Installation Remove three mounting screws from the top left, top right and bottom right corners of the Audio Amplifier Module(s) FCC- Refer to the illustration below. Carefully unplug the Audio Amplifier Module(s) from the main circuit board connector. If two Audio Amplifier Modules are note where each is positioned on the main circuit board. (Switch S1 on each amplifier may be set differently). to the illustration below. Install the three metal standoffs supplied with the FC-XRM70 Module by inserting the threaded male end of each standoff the three holes on the component side of the FCC-AAM25 Audio Amplifier Module(s). Secure each standoff in place a supplied nut. Refer to the illustration on following page for the location of the mounting holes. Reinstall the Audio Amplifier Module(s) by carefully aligning the Amplifier J1 connector with the P4 or P3 (depending on it was removed from in step 2) connector on the main circuit board. Press the Audio Amplifier Module securely into making certain not to bend or break any connector pins. Secure the Audio Amplifier Module(s) with the screws removed in step 1. Remove the two factory installed jumpers from connector P1 of the Audio Amplifier Module(s). Refer to the illustration on following page. Carefully align the J1 connector on the FC-XRM70 Transformer Module(s) with the P1 connector on the Audio Amplifier and press securely into place. Make certain the pins are properly aligned to prevent bending or breaking of any pins. Secure the FC-XRM70 Transformer Module(s) to the Audio Amplifier Module(s) with the supplied screws. It is important the supplied screws be used in order to help protect against electrical transients. S1 – Backup Select (Step 2) mounting screws (Step 1) Supply/ Audio Module – connector P3 of main circuit board 4 & 5) Audio Module -on P4 of the circuit board 4 & 5) mounting screws (Step 1) Evacuation Control Panel Circuit Board Standoff 3) Standoff 3) of board Audio Modules with nut 3) Standoff 3) Standoff 3) Audio Modules Standoff 3) Audio Modules Factory Installed Jumpers on P1 Each Amplifier Module Must be to Install the FC-XRM70 Module (Step 6) Module 7 & 8) of 2 50615 Rev A ECN 97-079 2/26/97

12 Clintonville Road CT 06472 203-484-7118 Charger/Power Supply Operation and Application Manual #50079 Rev: 50079:D ECN 97-145 Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Further- all types of

Field Charger/Power Supply & FCPS-24FS8 & FCPS-24FS8E & FCPS-24FS8C Manual 51883-L8 Rev: 51883-L8:J1 13-201 detector is necessarily best and a given type of detector not provide adequate warning of a fire. detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate of fires caused by arson, children playing with (especially in bedrooms), smoking in bed, and violent (caused by escaping gas, improper storage of materials, etc.). detectors do not sense particles of combustion and only when heat on their sensors increases at a predeter- rate or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of each detector be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire pro- specialist. Heat detectors are designed to protect not life. Smoke detectors must be installed in the room as the control panel and in rooms used by the sys- for the connection of alarm transmission wiring, communi- signaling, and/or power. If detectors are not so a developing fire may damage the alarm system, its ability to report a fire. warning devices such as bells, horns, strobes, and displays may not alert people if these devices located on the other side of closed or partly open doors or located on another floor of a building. Any warning device fail to alert people with a disability or those who have consumed drugs, alcohol, or medication. Please note An emergency communication system may take priority Alarm & Emergency Communication System Limitations a life safety system may lower insurance rates, it is not a substitute for life and property automatic fire alarm system made up of detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible devices, and a fire alarm control panel (FACP) with notification capability provide early warning of a fire. Such a system, however, does not assure against property damage or loss of life resulting a fire. emergency communication system made up an automatic fire alarm system (as described above) and a safety communication system that may include an autono- control unit (ACU), local operating console (LOC), voice and other various interoperable communica- methods broadcast a mass notification message. a system, however, does not assure protection against damage or loss of life resulting from a fire or life event. Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat be located throughout a protected premises the recommendations of the National Fire Protection Standard 72 (NFPA 72), manufacturer’s State and local codes, and the contained in the Guide for Proper Use of Smoke Detectors, which is made available at no to all installing dealers. This document can be found at A study by the Emergency Management Agency (an agency of the States government) indicated that smoke detectors not go off in as many as 35% of all fires. While fire alarm are designed to provide early warning against fire, do not guarantee warning or protection against fire. A fire system may not provide timely or adequate warning, or may not function, for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. second-floor detector, for example, may not sense a first- or basement fire. of combustion or from a developing fire not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, Voice messaging systems must be designed to meet intelli- requirements as defined by NFPA, local codes, and Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). a fire alarm system in the event of a life safety emer- Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures Language and instructional requirements must be clearly people with conditions such as epilepsy. on any local displays. even wet or humi

No text preview available.

FCPS-24FS6 Volt, 6 Amp Power Supply Fire FCPS-24FS6(C/E) is a compact, cost-effec- 6-amp remote power supplies with battery charger. The may be connected to any 12 or 24 volt fire control panel (FACP) or may stand-alone. Primary appli- include notification appliance (bell) circuit (NAC) (to support ADA requirements and NAC synchroni- or auxiliary power to support 24 volt system accesso- The FCPS provides regulated and filtered 24 VDC power four notification appliance circuits configured as either two B (Style Y) and Class A (Style Z, with ZNAC-4 option or four class B only. Alternately, the four outputs may configured as any combination of resettable/non-resettable outputs (optimal for powering four-wire smoke detec- The FFCPS-24FS6(C/E) also contains a battery charger of charging up to 7.0 Amp hour batteries. FCPS- is ULC-listed. Unless otherwise specified, the term FCPS-24FS6 used in document refers to the standard FCPS-24FS6, FCPS- FCPS-24FS6E UL-Listed Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) synchroniza- using System Sensor, Wheelock, or Gentex appliances. Operates as a or as a See note on page 2. Contains two fully-isolated input/control circuits – triggered FACP NAC (NAC expander mode) or jumped perma- (stand-alone mode). Two Class B (Style Y) or Class A (Style Z, with ZNAC-4 NACs (circuits 1 & 3) 6-amp full load output, with 3 amps maximum/circuit, in expander mode (UL 864). 4-amp continuous output in stand-alone mode (UL 1481). Compatible with coded inputs; signals passed through. Optional power-supervision relay (EOLR-1). stand-alone mode, output power circuits may be config- as: resettable, (reset line from FACP required), or a mix of two and two. Fully regulated and filtered power output – optimal for pow- four-wire smoke detectors, annunciators, and other peripherals requiring regulated/filtered power. Power-limiting technology meets UL power-limiting require- Form-C normally-closed trouble relay. Fully supervised power supply, battery, and NACs. Selectable earth fault detection. AC trouble report selectable for immediate 2-hour delay. Works with virtually any UL 864 fire alarm control which uti- an industry-standard reverse-polarity notification cir- (including unfiltered and unregulated bell power). Requires input trigger voltage of 9 – 32 VDC. Self-contained in compact, locking cabinet – 15 x 14.5 2.75 (cm: 38.1H x 36.83W x 6.985D). D-025 Supplies/Accessories integral battery charger capable of charging up to AH batteries. Cabinet capable of housing 7.0 AH batter- Battery charger may be disabled via DIP switch for applica- requiring larger batteries. Fixed, clamp-type terminal blocks accommodate up to 12 (3.1mm2) wire. (AC) Power: FCPS-24FS6: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 3.2A maximum. FCPS-24FS6/E: 240 VAC, 50 Hz, 1.6A maximum. Wire Size: minimum #14 AWG (2.0mm2) with 600 V insula- 16 V). Input Circuit: Trigger Input Voltage: 9 to 32 VDC. Trigger Current: 2.0 mA (16 – 32 V); Per Input: 1.0 mA (9 Contact Rating: 5 A at 24 VDC. Power Output: Specific application power 500 mA Circuits: +24 VDC filtered, regulated. 3.0 A maximum for any one circuit. Total continuous current for all outputs (stand-alone mode): Total short-term current for all outputs (NAC expander mode): FCPS-24F: 4.0 A maximum. FCPS-24F: 6.0 A maximum. 5/17/13 Page 1 of 4 Listings and Approvals listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in document. In some cases, certain modules or applications not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. UL Listed: S2424, S1287 ULC Listed: S2424

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

FIREFIGHTER HANDSET STORAGE BOX INSTALLATION DRAWING 50767 Revision A 97-139 09/29/97 1 Placing Door on Trim Ring Instructions for Firefighter(cid:146)s Handset Storage Box. 1. Place door on trim ring, positioning the two holes at the bottom of the door onto the bottom studs of the trim ring (refer to Figure 1). 2. Install trim ring with door attached onto backbox with 6-32 wing nuts (refer to Figure 2 hole positions). The hinge knuckles should rest on the trim ring (refer to Figure 3). 3. Tighten wing nuts. 4. Mount the assembled box in a readily-accessible area approximately five feet the floor using the holes on the back wall of the box. 2 Backbox Dimensions 3 Hinge Position Hole Locations 97-139 Document No. 50767, Revision A 09/29/97

firealarmresources.com

Fire Trim Ring Installation Drawing 50728 Rev A 6/17/97 ECN 97-166 Trim Ring Installation Open Trim Ring hardware kit which contains six (6) screws and six (6) drywall anchors. Remove Voice Evacuation Control Panel (VECP) cabinet door by sliding door upward off pin style hinges. Place FC-TR trim ring around VECP cabinet making certain that the hinge cutouts are on the left hand or hinged of the cabinet. Making certain that the trim ring is placed around the VECP cabinet maintaining an equal distance from all four of the cabinet, mark the centers of all six FC-TR mounting holes. Remove the trim ring and drill the holes where marked on the wall. Install the six (6) supplied drywall anchors into the drilled holes. Place the FC-TR trim ring around the VECP cabinet and secure in place using the six (6) supplied screws. Cutout Cutout

GENERAL Series electromagnetic door holders are designed for any remote door release application. They are pri- used to hold fire and smoke barrier doors open until by a remote smoke detector or other switching The complete assembly consists of: an armature plate with adjustable pivot mounting for installation the door, and a heavy-duty electromagnet, in a durable enclosure, mounted on the wall or floor behind the A separate closing device is required. All models support 12 VDC, 24 VAC/VDC, or 120 VAC. applied voltage does not damage the unit. Spacing kit for odd angles. 25 to 40 pounds (11.3 kg) holding power. Magnet protected against transients and surges up to volts (AC models). Fail-safe operation; power failure releases door to close. Positive release button initiates closing motion. Two-year warranty. Floor- and wall-mount models. Used in hospitals, schools, offices, nursing homes, and buildings. where required by code, where doors may be used confine smoke or fire, or wherever remote control or closing doors are required. Ensure that door hardware and trim projections are com- with total projection of door release. Anchor the electromagnet firmly, as the wall portion will as a doorstop. Locate magnet approximately 6″ (15.24 cm) in from the stile at the door. Wall magnets should be mounted two to four feet (0.61 to 1.22 meters) above floor for optimum performance. Door-mounted contact plate includes hardware for or concealed mounting. Spotting template included with unit assures correct align- 14 AWG (2.0 mm maximum wire size. 17, 2005 (cid:127) I-100 Series Door Holders Miscellaneous FM998) Fire INFORMATION floor-mount model for single 12 VDC, 24 VAC/VDC, 120 VAC. wall-mount model; 12 VDC, 24 120 VAC. wall-mount model; 12 VDC, 24 120 VAC. kit. kit, 90 1/2″ (1.27 cm). 3/4″ (1.905 cm). Spacer, 1″ (2.54 cm). Alarms is a Honeywell company. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product informa- up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. specifications are subject to change without notice. more information, contact Fire(cid:127)Lite Alarms, One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, Connecticut 06472. Phone: 627-3473, Toll-Free FAX: (877) 699-4105. 03/17/05 Page 1 of 2 980 Door Concealed wiring. Total floor space required: (168 mm). Mounting requirements: connects to floor plate. UL-Listed door holder. Voltage/current: VAC, 60 Hz, 0.020 amp. VAC/VDC, 60 Hz, 0.020 amp. VDC, 0.040 amp. Shipping weight: 4 lbs. (1.8 kg). 996 Wiring Total projection: 4-1/8″ (105 mm). Mounting requirements: (38 mm) deep adapter housing. UL-Listed door holder. Voltage/current: VAC, 60 Hz, 0.020 amp. VAC/VDC, 60 Hz, 0.020 amp. VDC, 0.040 amp. Shipping weight: 3 lbs. (1.4 kg). 998 Doors Wiring 2 of 2 DF-51410 (cid:127) 03/17/05 Total projection: 3-5/8″ (92 mm). Mounting requirements: x 4″ x 1-3/4″ (51 x 102 x 45 mm) box. Wall must be properly reinforced and box adequately fastened. UL-Listed door holder. Voltage/current: VAC, 60 Hz, 0.020 amp. VAC/VDC, 60 Hz, 0.020 amp. VDC, 0.040 amp. Shipping weight: 2-1/2 lbs. (1.1 kg).

FSYE.S2424 – Emergency Alarm System Accessories Quick Guide Contact Us UL.com Alarm System Accessories Alarm System Accessories Bottom General Information for Emergency Alarm System Accessories ALARMS Fire-lite Pl CT 06472 USA modules, Models (1) ANN-LED, ANN-RLED. module, Model (1) ANN-RLY. Model ANN-LC (2) fiber module Fire Alarm and Emergency Signaling Equipment, Model CELL-CAB-FL Cellular transmitter. These models are complementary Listed to QVAX, SYSW and UOXX. These models are complementary Listed to QVAX and UOXX. this page of Use Top Updated on 2018-02-21 2018 UL LLC appearance of a company name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been under UL Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and under UL Follow-Up Service. Always look for the Mark on the product. permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and a non-misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement “Reprinted from the Online Directory with permission from UL” must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material include a copyright notice in the following format: ” 2018 UL LLC”. 5:26:04 PM]

FSZI.S624 – Emergency Alarm System Control Units Quick Guide Contact Us UL.com Alarm System Control Units Alarm System Control Units Bottom General Information for Emergency Alarm System Control Units ALARMS Fire-lite Pl CT 06472 USA class A conversion module, intended for use with compatible control units as described in the control installation manual, Model(s) CAC-5X*, ZNAC-92# power supply modules, intended for use with compatible control units as described in the control unit manual, Model(s) FLPS-3*, FLPS-7* transformers, intended for use with compatible control units as described in the control unit installation Model(s) XRM-24B, XRM-24BE Model(s) IPOTS-COM, PWRMOD24 AM and SM control units, Model(s) ES-200X, ES-50X, MS-10UD-3 (a), MS-10UD-3E (a), MS-10UD-7 (a), MS-10UD-7C (a), (a), MS-10UD-7E (a), MS-5UD-3 (a), MS-5UD-3E (a), MS-5UD-7 (a), MS-5UD-7C (a), MS-5UD-7C-FR (a), MS-5UD- (a) AM and SM control units, Model(s) MS-9050UD, automatically or manually actuated to produce local alarm annunciation due the following conditions: Hazard and Medical Alert.* AM and SM control units, Model(s) MS-9050UDE, automatically or manually actuated to produce local alarm annunciation due the following conditions: Hazard and Medical Alert.# AM and SM control units, Model(s) MS-9200UDLS (a), MS-9200UDLSE (a) – Complementary Listed to DAYRC, QVAX, UOJZ and UOJZC. – Automatically or manually actuated to produce local alarm annunciation due to the following conditions: Hazard/Tornado and Alert; Complementary Listed to QVAX and UOJZ. – Complementary Listed to QVAX and UOJZ. this page of Use Top Updated on 2017-12-26 2018 UL LLC appearance of a company name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been under UL Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Certified and under UL Follow-Up Service. Always look for the Mark on the product. permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Information, Assemblies, Constructions, Designs, Systems, and/or Certifications (files) must be presented in their entirety and a non-misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). 2. The statement “Reprinted from the Online Directory with permission from UL” must appear adjacent to the extracted material. In addition, the reprinted material include a copyright notice in the following format: ” 2018 UL LLC”. 5:26:24 PM]

July 28, 1998 AVP Retrofit Strobes Audio/Visual Devices Gentex AVP Series is designed to make ADA retrofits snap, allowing the combination of existing audible appli- with ADA-compliant strobes. FEATURES 24 VDC xenon visible appliances. UL 1971 listed. Flash rate of 1 Hz. 15/75 and 30/75 models provide 75 candela minimum Accepts most audible appliances: front-mount horn, bell output. or speakers. Tamper-resistant lens. Polarized in/out wiring. Complies with ADA 4.28.3 mounting requirements of 80″ m) from floor. Available in Fire Alarm Red. Strobes available in wall-mount configurations only. Textured finish. Flying leads. INFORMATION 1) (cid:147)WR(cid:148) = Wall-mount, Red faceplate. 2) ALL 24 VDC MODELS operate from 21 – 30 VDC -20%/+10%. At 24 VDC, 15/75 candela units have a startup current of 130 mA and a peak operating current of 110 mA; 30/75 units have a startup current of 120 mA and a peak operating current of 160 mA; 110 candela units have a current of 148 mA and a peak operating current of 240 mA. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 2 All strobes are designed to flash as specified with continuous applied voltage. appliance is NOT recommended for use on coded or pulsing signaling cir- CONDUCTIVITY 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) (cid:151) 60 AWG (1.30 mm2) (cid:151) 95 AWG (2.00 mm2) (cid:151) 153 AWG (3.25 mm2) (cid:151) 244 Power is supplied when control panel is latched. WIRE DISTANCE* (in feet) = Panel Voltage (cid:151) Device Minimum Voltage Wire Conductivity wire distance includes wire to and from device. Current Draw Equation above applies only to regulated devices. Each wire run must be broken to provide supervision signal circuit. mounting boxes: 4″ (10.16 cm) square metal or non-metallic switch/outlet 1-1/2″ (3.81 cm) deep minimum. Gangable: 2-gang switch/masonry outlet boxes, 1-1/2″ cm) deep minimum. guidelines: Mount one box for each signaling device. Run insulated conductor from the signaling circuit in the Use UL-listed Class 1 wire. 2 of 2 (cid:151) DF-51924

July 28, 1998 AVS44 Control Module the GOT/GOS Series Horn & Horn/Strobe Audio/Visual Devices Vol. XII Fire Gentex AVS44 Synchronization Control Module is to provide an easy way to synchronize multiple as well as strobe light flashes using only two wires in rare instances where a synchronized flash is required. control module has the ability to synchronize mul- horn signals with: a Code 3 temporal pattern at 800 or 2400 Hz; the 800/1000 Hz alternating tone; the chime and the ability to silence the horn while allowing the to continue flashing. incorporating the control module as shown in the wiring (page 2), the control module will control power to horns to produce synchronized operation. When using strobes or horn/strobes in parallel mode, synchro- may also be attained without using a control mod- if the fire alarm control panel is capable of providing power with a minimum power-off time of 10 mS and maximum power-off time of 20 mS and with a repetition of 1 second (see figure 2, page 2). In parallel mode, horn cannot be silenced while maintaining strobe op- Option to silence the horn while strobes continue to flash. Synchronize horn and strobe using only two wires. Operates GOS (cid:147)Z(cid:148) horn/strobe. Easy to install. INFORMATION Module is rated for 3 Amps at 24 VDC. Synchronizes to 1 Hz flash rate. Dimensions: 3.321″ (84.3534 mm) high x 2.896″ mm) wide x 1.190″ (30.2260 mm) deep. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 2 DIAGRAMS NOTE: Do NOT loop wires under terminals. Use in-and-out wiring method. FIGURE 1: For INDEPENDENT (Z-Series) strobes and horn. FIGURE 2: For synchronized temporal horn ONLY, PARALLEL horn/strobe operation. 1 2 ON JUMPERS: using the AVS44 control module, J5 and on the GOS must be in the top position. jumpers are in the top position when from the factory. DIAGRAM AT RIGHT. 3 2 of 2 (cid:151) DF-51933

November 30, 1998 GMH/GMS Series Electro-Mechanical & Horn/Strobes Audio/Visual Devices Vol. VII with: NFPA 72 ADA 4.28.3 30/75, cd) S3406 (GMH24R, Fire of Chicago FEATURES Low-frequency penetrating sound output. Low operating current. Screw terminals, separate in/out field wiring (12 AWG/ mm Textured plastic high-impact faceplate. Separate horn and strobe functions (jumper wires). Variety of standard mounting options. Supplied with beauty plugs to accommodate mounting Strobe maintains constant flash rate regardless of input Flush mounting. Outdoor use listed (GMH and WGMS). 15/75, 30/75 and 110 candela strobe options meet or the requirements of ADA 4.28.3. UL 464/UL1971 listed for fire protection service/signal for impaired. No mechanical contacts. Flash rate 1 Hz (60 flashes per minute). Gentex 4″ low-frequency electromechanical horn/ series meets and exceeds code requirements for fire alarm systems for the hearing impaired. GMH/GMS Series are quality electromechanical sig- appliances that offer both dependable evacuation and visual alarms by means of simple screw- wiring connections. GMH/GMS Series is designed to be used for both new and retrofit projects. With the Gentex trim the GMH/GMS can be mounted to a double-gang box in retrofit or new construction. devices are suited for areas having high ambi- noise levels where higher audible output is required. Z synchronized strobes require the use of the ZMS4 GMH/GMS appliances are UL 464 and UL 1971 listed use with fire protective signaling systems. GMH/GMS warranted for two years from the date of purchase. & ENGINEERS(cid:146) alarm signal shall be Gentex model GMH or GMS or equivalent, and shall be listed by Underwriters per UL 464, and when combined with the option, the strobe shall also be listed per UL 1971. notification appliance shall also be listed with the State Fire Marshal (CSFM) and MEA (NYC). notification appliance shall produce a peak sound of 105 dBA or greater as measured in an anechoic visual signal shall have a flash rate of 1 Hz regardless input voltage. notification appliance shall be provided with screw for in-and-out field wiring and the strobe shall be of operating independently after the audible has silenced. notification appliance shall be capable of mounting to 4″ (10.16 cm) square backbox and a two-gang switch with the Gentex trim ring. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Fire-Lite Place, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 2 *INRUSH CURRENT: for less than 0.2 micro

GENERAL Gentex GOT/GOS Series 4″ multi-tone electronic horns horn/strobes meet code requirements for supervised fire systems for the hearing impaired and ADA, and other signaling code requirements to include code 3 tempo- pattern. GOT/GOS Series are quality electronic signaling devices offer you both dependable evacuation, trouble, or distinc- signals and visual alarms, or a combination of both by terminal wiring. The GOS Series can also be wired to independent operation of both horns and strobes (see diagrams). This can be simply done by removing two plugs located on circuit board (see installation manual details). GOT/GOS Series devices are easily field-changeable the 800 Hz alarm signal to any other tones by removing jumper plugs. Changing from low sound output to sound output does not prevent reverting back to the tone at a later date. All units are shipped from the in (cid:147)high(cid:148) sound output and (cid:147)steady(cid:148) alarm mode set- the GOT/GOS Series is used with the AVS44 control the temporal patterns, chime, and high/low tones can synchronized. Using only two wires to the signal, the horn be silenced while the strobes continue to flash (NFPA 72 or 1-5.7.1). GOT/GOS Series devices are designed to be used for new construction or retrofit projects by easily mounting 4″ (10.16 cm) electrical boxes or two-gang old workboxes mounting diagrams). GOT/GOS devices are UL 464/1971 listed for use with fire systems and are warranted for two years from the of purchase. FEATURES Selectable frequency output. Low current consumption. Wide voltage range. Screw terminals, separate in/out wiring option for both horn strobe (12 AWG/3.25 mm Multiple tones to select from: 800 Hz, 2400 Hz, Chime, Slow 800/1000 Hz Alternating, or Siren. Low dB or high dB selectable. Temporal pattern or continuous tone at 800 and 2400 Hz. Silence horn while strobes remain energized using only two wires (when used with the AVS44 control module). Xenon strobe maintains constant flash rate (1 Hz) regardless input voltage. Textured finish high-impact plastic faceplate. Wide variety of mounting options for new construction and applications when trim plate is used. 30, 1998 GOT/GOS Series Multi-Tone Electronic and Horn/Strobes Audio/Visual Devices Fire with: NFPA 72 ADA 4.28.3 (15/75, 30/75, 110 cd) Supplied with beauty plugs to accommodate a variety of Flush or semi-flush mounting without the need of a trim plate. 15/75 candela strobe option (GOS24-1575) meets ADA requirements. 30/75 candela strobe option on GOS24-3075 meets new requirements for single visual and ADA 4.28.3 require- All 110 cd models exceed requirements of 4.28.3 of the ADA. UL 464/UL 1971 listed for fire protective service/signal for impaired. audible or audible/visual shall be Gentex model GOT or or approved equivalent, and shall be listed by Underwrit- Laboratories per UL 464, and when combined with the option shall be listed per UL 1971. The notification document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Fire-Lite Place, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 3 shall also be listed with the California Fire Marshal (CSFM) and the Bureau of Stan- and Appeals (NYC). notification appliance shall produce a peak sound of 90 dBA or greater as measured in an chamber. The multi-tone audible appli- shall have the capa

July 28, 1998 ZMS4 Control Module 1971 Compliant Audio/Visual Devices Vol. XII Gentex ZMS4 Synchronization Control Module is to provide an easy way to synchronize multiple light flashes in those rare instances where a syn- flash is required. The control module also has ability to synchronize multiple horn signals with a Code temporal pattern. For the horn to operate correctly, it produce a continuous tone when powered from a source of rated supply without the control mod- By incorporating the control module as shown in the diagrams (page 2), the control module will control power to the horns to produce the synchronized tem- pattern. using the Z-Series strobe lights, synchronization may be attained without the use of a control module if the alarm control panel is capable of providing pulsed power a minimum power-off time of 10 mS and a maximum time of 50 mS and with a repetition rate of 1 sec- Synchronize Code 3 temporal pattern. Operates Gentex Horn and Horn/Strobe Series that gen- a continuous tone: GXS, GX90/GX90S, and GMH/ Also operates the HG/SHG Series manufactured 2/16/98. Use AVS44 with the GOS/GOT Series. Easy to install. Module is rated for 3 Amps at 24 VDC. Synchronizes to 1 Hz flash rate. INFORMATION document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 2 AND DIMENSIONS ZMS4 works with all the Gentex Z-Series strobes except the GOS Series. Use the AVS44 for the GOS Series. 3.321″ (84.3534 mm) high x 2.896″ (73.5584 mm) wide x 1.190″ (30.2260 mm) deep. DIAGRAMS NOTE: Do NOT loop wires under terminals. Use in-and-out wiring method. FIGURE 1: synchronized (Z-Series) strobes only. 1 FIGURE 2: synchronized (Z-Series) strobes and temporal horn. 2 FIGURE 3: synchronized temporal horn only. 3 2 of 2 (cid:151) DF-51942

GTPR.R14531 Door Holders Door Holders 1 of 1 – Fire Door Holders Bottom General Information for Fire Door Holders ALARMS FIRE-LITE PL CT 06472 USA DH150A, -154A, -158A rated 24 v, ac/dc. DH150N, -154N, -158N rated 120 v, ac. Updated on 2007-07-13 door holders, rated 0.068 amp, 24 v, dc, 0.017 amp, 120 v. FM980, -996, -998 may be followed by 24 or 120 rated 0.068 amp, 24 v, dc, 0.180 amp, 12 v, dc, 0.017 amp, 120 v, ac, 0.080 amp, 24 v, ac, amp 12 v, ac, 0.009 amp, 250 v, ac, 277 v, ac. of Disclaimer Top appearance of a company name or product in this database does not in itself assure that products so identified have been manufactured under Follow-Up Service. Only those products bearing the UL Mark should be considered to be Listed and covered under UL Follow-Up Service. Always for the Mark on the product. permits the reproduction of the material contained in the Online Certification Directory subject to the following conditions: 1. The Guide Information, and/or Listings (files) must be presented in their entirety and in a non-misleading manner, without any manipulation of the data (or drawings). The statement “Reprinted from the Online Certifications Directory with permission from Underwriters Laboratories Inc.” must appear adjacent to the material. In addition, the reprinted material must include a copyright notice in the following format: “Copyright 2008 Underwriters Inc. 2008 Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

Installation and Maintenance Instructions for Plug-in Model H350 Thermal Sensor DESCRIPTION H350 is an addressable sensor that uses a state-of-the-art thermistor sensing circuit for fast response. This sensor designed to provide open area protection with 50 foot spacing capability, and is intended for use with compatible control only. LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sensor indication. Remote LED annunciator capability is avail- as an optional accessory (Part No. RA400Z). Temperature: Humidity Range: Range: Current: Current: Temperature Setpoint: GUIDE inches (155 mm) installed in B310LP inches (51 mm) ounces (150 gm) to 100 ( to 38 to 93% Relative Humidity Noncondensing flanged base to 32 Volts DC Peak @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec.with LED blink enabled) 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC (57 to the installation instructions for the plug-in base being used. Bases are equipped with screw terminals for power, ground, remote annunciator connections. See Figure 1. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. Verify that all sensor bases are installed and that the wiring polarity is correct at each base. Disconnect the power from the loop before installing sensors. installing sensors, please thoroughly read the system wiring and installation manual, which provides detailed in- on sensor spacing, placement, zoning, and special applications. Copies of these manuals are available from NFPA standard 72 should also be referenced. refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems Statement device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not in- and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 4 I56-038-00R Fire One Fire Place, Northford, CT 06472 Do not loop wire under terminals 1 or 2. Direct Heat Method (Hair dryer of 1000 1500 watts) wire run to provide supervision of connections. From the side of the detector, direct the heat toward the sensor. Hold the heat source about 6 inches (15 cm) away prevent damage to the cover during testing. The LEDs on the detector should light when the temperature at the detector reaches the alarm setpoint. If the LEDs to light, check the power to the detector and the wiring in the detector base. Reset the detector at the system control panel. that fail these tests should be returned for repair. 3. Views showing position of test magnet. TEST MARKER 1 Install Sensors: Verify that the sensor type matches the type written on the label in the base. Set the address on the sensor per job drawings. Some panels support extended addressing. In order to set sensor abov

Installation and Maintenance Instructions for Plug-in Model H350R of Rise Temperature Sensor with Fixed Temperature Alarm DESCRIPTION H350R is an addressable sensor that uses a state-of-the-art thermistor sensing circuit for fast response. This sen- is designed to provide open area protection with 50 foot spacing capability, and is intended for use with compatible panels only. The sensor responds to rate of rise conditions of greater than 15 The sensor also provides temperature alarm detection at 135 LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sensor indication. Remote LED annunciator capability is avail- as an optional accessory (Part No. RA400Z). Temperature: Humidity Range: Range: Current: Current: Temperature Setpoint: of Rise Detection: GUIDE inches (155 mm) installed in B310LP inches (51 mm) ounces (150 gm) to 100 ( to 38 to 93% Relative Humidity Noncondensing flanged base to 32 Volts DC Peak @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec.with LED blink enabled) 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC (57 to greater than 15 to the installation instructions for the plug-in base being used. Bases are equipped with screw terminals for power, ground, remote annunciator connections. See Figure 1. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. Verify that all sensor bases are installed and that the wiring polarity is correct at each base. Disconnect the power from the loop before installing sensors. installing sensors, please thoroughly read the system wiring and installation manual, which provides detailed in- on sensor spacing, placement, zoning, and special applications. Copies of these manuals are available from NFPA standard 72 should also be referenced. refer to insert for the Limitations of Fire Alarm Systems Statement device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not in- and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 4 I56-037-00R Fire One Fire Place, Northford, CT 06472 Do not loop wire under terminals 1 or 2. Direct Heat Method (Hair dryer of 1000 1500 watts) wire run to provide supervision of connections. From the side of the detector, direct the heat toward the sensor. Hold the heat source about 6 inches (15 cm) away prevent damage to the cover during testing. The LEDs on the detector should light when the temperature at the detector reaches the alarm setpoint. If the LEDs to light, check the power to the detector and the wiring in the detector base. Reset the detector at the system control panel. that fail these tests should be returned for repair. 3. Views showing position of test magnet. TEST MARKER

Series Addressable Detectors E-710 Devices Fire Alarms H355(A) Series thermal detectors are sensors that use a state-of-the-art thermistor circuit for fast response. These sensors provide open- protection and are intended for use with Fire Fire Alarm Control Panels (FACPs). H355(A) and H355R(A) sensors provide fixed tempera- alarm detection at 135 (57 The H355R(A) sensor responds to rate-of-rise conditions of greater than 15 per minute. The H355HT(A) is a fixed high-tempera- detector that activates at 190 (88 These thermal provide addressable property protection in a variety applications. LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sen- indication. Remote LED annunciator capability is available an optional accessory, the RA100Z. loop: Two-wire SLC loop connection. Unit uses base for wiring. Addressable by device. Rotary, decimal addressing: 01 159 with MS-9600 series, 99 with MS-9200 series. Sleek, low-profile, stylish design. State-of-the-art thermistor technology for fast response. communications and built-in device-type identifica- Built-in tamper resistant feature. Built-in functional test switch activated by external magnet. Factory preset at 135 (57 for the H355(A) and 190 (88 for the H355HT(A). Rate-of-rise triggers at 15 (8.3 per minute for the 360 viewing angle of the visual alarm indicators (two LEDs). LEDs blink red in Normal condition and turn steady red in Alarm. Visible LEDs every time the unit is addressed. Sealed against back pressure. SEMS screws for wiring of the separate base. Designed for direct-surface or electrical-box mounting. Plugs into separate base for ease of installation and main- Separate base allows interchange of photoelectric, ioniza- and thermal sensors. system features: Remote test feature from the panel. Walk test with address display. Low standby current. in B210LP(A) Base 94-5V plastic flammability rating. Remote LED output connection to optional RA100Z remote annunciator. Flanged surface mounting kit. Series plug-in intelligent thermal detectors use a base to simplify installation, service and mainte- Installation instructions are shipped with each detector. base (all base types) on an electrical backbox which is least 1.5″ (3.81 cm) deep. For a chart of compatible junction see DF-60059. Because of the inherent supervision provided by the SLC end-of-line resistors are not required. Wiring or are permitted for Style 4 (Class wiring only. thermal detectors for protection of property. detectors are constructed of off-white fire-resistant The H355(A) Series plug-in intelligent thermal detec- are designed to commercial standards and offer an attrac- appearance. H355(A) Series detector uses one of 159 (MS-9600 or 99 (MS-9200 series) possible addresses on a con- panel SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from the con- panel and reports its type and the status. If it receives a command from the panel (or a local magnet test), it stimu- its electronics and reports an alarm. It blinks its LEDs polled and turns the LEDs on when commanded by the The H355(A) Series offers features and performance represent the latest in thermal detector technology. 5/17/2013 Page 1 of 2 BASES suffix indicates ULC Listed model. The detector plug-in base can be changed off for special For details about intelligent bases and their mount- see DF-60059. Plug-in detector ba

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS H355R, and H355HT Plug-In Temperature Sensors Temperature: Humidity Range: Range: Current: Current: Temperature Rating: of Rise Detection: (155 mm) installed in B350LP (51 mm) ounces (137 gm) to 100 ( to 38 H355 and H355R; to 150 ( to 66 H355HT to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing flanged base to 32 Volts DC Peak @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with LED blink enabled) 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC (57 H355 and H355R; 190 (88 H355HT to greater than 15 H355R FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); NFPA 72. installing sensors, please read the system wiring and installation man- thoroughly. This manual provides detailed information on sensor spac- placement, zoning, and special applications. Copies of these manuals are from Fire-Lite. DESCRIPTION H355, H355R, and H355HT are intelligent sensors that utilize a state- thermistor sensing circuit for fast response. These sensors are de- to provide open area protection with 50 foot spacing capability. For which must comply with FM3210, see note below. Model H355 is fixed temperature sensor with 135 F fixed temperature alarm. Model H355R a rate-of-rise temperature sensor with 135 F fixed temperature alarm. H355HT is a high temperature sensor with 190 F fixed temperature LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sensor indication. LED annunciator capability is available as an optional accessory (Part RA400Z). H355, H355R, and H355HT require compatible addressable com- to function properly. Connect these sensors to listed-compat- control panels only. Per FM3210 H355 and H355HT are classified as fixed temperature thermal detectors: thermal detector that responds when the operating element of the detector a specified temperature. The actual temperature surrounding the sens- element is often much greater than the rated temperature due to the ther- lag. H355R is classified as a rate-compensated thermal detector: A thermal that responds to a specified fixed temperature, regardless of the rate of rise. GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Proper wire should be used. The installation wires should be color coded to limit mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Improper connections will a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram, Figure 1. the desired address on the sensor address switches, see Figure 2. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base turning it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit and the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. 1. WIRING DIAGRAM: DO NOT LOOP WIRE TERMINAL 1 OR 2. WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE OF CONNECTIONS. 2: A OPTIONAL WIRING 0 0 RESISTANCE sensor base includes a tamper proof feature which when activated pre- removal of the sensor without the use of a tool. See the installation manual for the sensor base for details in using this feature. SENSITIVITY testing, notify the proper author

No text preview available.

INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS H365-IV, H365R, H365HT, and H365HT-IV Programmable Temperature Sensors Voltage Range: Current @ 24 VDC: Alarm Current: Current: Humidity Range: Temperature: Temperature Rating: Heat Temperature Rating: Rise Detection: to 32 Volts DC Peak uA (one communication every 5 seconds with green LED blink on communication) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with red LED solid on) mA @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 seconds with amber LED solid on) to 93% Relative Humidity, Non-condensing for fixed-temperature or rate-of-rise (ROR): to 100 ( to 38 for high-heat: to 150 ( to 66 (57 (88 to greater than 15 or 135 (8.3 or 57 (51 mm) installed in B300-6 Base (156 mm) installed in B300-6 Base oz. (95 g) FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 The heat sensor operates as a programmable heat detector. NOTE: In panels where this feature is not available, the H365 and will default to a 135 fixed heat detector. H365R and H365R-IV default to a 135 fixed heat detector and rate-of-rise. H365HT and will default to a 190 high temperature heat detector. programmable temperature sensors require compatible addressable to function properly. Connect these sensors to listed-compat- control panels only. GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Proper wire should be used. The installation wires should be color coded to limit mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Improper connections will a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) as shown in the wiring (See Figure 2.) Set the desired address on the rotary dial switches. (See Figure 1.) Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base turning it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit and the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. 2. WIRING DIAGRAM: Do not loop wire under 1 or 2. Break wire run to connections. 521 listed for Heat Detectors sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system manual. The installation must meet the requirements of the Au- Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when in compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); NFPA 72. installing sensors, please read the system wiring and installation man- thoroughly. This manual provides detailed information on sensor spac- placement, zoning, and special applications. Copies of these manuals are from FireLite. DESCRIPTION H365, H365-IV, H365R, H365R-IV, H365HT, and H365HT-IV are field intelligent sensors that utilize a state-of-the-art thermistor circuit for fast response. These sensors are designed to provide open protection with 50-foot spacing capability as approved by UL 521. The temperature sensor can be programmed as either a 135 fixed sensor, a rate of rise and 135 fixed temperature sensor or a high temperature sensor through the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sensor indication. LED annunciator capability is available as an optional accessory No. RA100Z). Rotary dial switches are provided for setting the sensor’s (See Figure 1.) 1: ROTARY ADDRESS SWITCHES 0 0 panels offer different feature sets across different models. As a re- cert

H365 Series Heat Detectors Fire Alarms H365(A), H365R(A), and H365HT(A) plug-in thermal detectors are designed for both perfor- and aesthetics and are a direct replacement for the H355 A new modern, sleek, contemporary design and advanced technologies make the H365(A) Series ideal for both system and building design. for use with Fire addressable fire alarm control the H365(A) Series point ID capability allows each detector to be set with rotary, decimal address switches, providing detector location for emergency personnel to quickly locate a during its early stages, potentially saving precious rescue time also reducing property damage. Two LEDs on each sensor to provide a local, visible sensor indication. H365(A) Series includes fixed temperature, rate-of-rise and heat fixed temperature detectors that provide effective, intelli- property protection for a variety of applications. Detectors are for both LiteSpeed and CLIP applications as designated. LOOP: Two-wire SLC loop connection Unit uses base for wiring Addressable by device Rotary, decimal addressing to the Fire panel manuals for device capacity.) communications and built-in device-type identification Designed to meet UL 268 7th Edition Sleek, low-profile, stylish design State-of-the-art thermistor technology for fast response Built-in tamper resistant feature Built-in functional test switch activated by external magnet Fixed temperature model (H365(A)) factory preset to 135 Rate-of-rise model (H365R(A)), 15 (8.3 per minute High-temperature model (H365HT(A)) factory preset to 190 360 viewing angle of the two visual alarm indicators, LEDs red in Normal condition and turn on steady red in Alarm LEDs blink every time the unit is polled Sealed against back pressure SEMS screws for wiring of the separate base Designed for direct-surface or electrical-box mounting Plugs into separate base for ease of installation and maintenance Separate base allows interchange of photoelectric, ionization and sensors SYSTEM FEATURES: Remote test feature from the panel Walk test with address display Low standby current Devices Remote LED output connection to optional RA100Z remote LED Series plug-in intelligent thermal detectors use a detachable to simplify installation, service and maintenance. Installation are shipped with each detector. detector base (all base types) on an electrical backbox which at least 1.5″ (3.81 cm) deep. For a chart of compatible junction see DF-60059. Because of the inherent supervision provided by the SLC loop, resistors are not required. Wiring or branches are for Style 4 (Class wiring only. using relay or sounder bases, consult the I300(A) installation I56-3626 for device limitations between isolator modules and iso- bases. thermal detectors for protection of property. For further informa- refer to I56-6525, Applications Manual for System Smoke which provides detailed information on detector spacing, zoning, wiring, and special applications. detectors are constructed of fire-resistant plastic. The H365 plug-in intelligent thermal detectors are designed to commer- standards and offer an attractive appearance. H365 Series detector uses one of the panel addresses (total is panel dependent) on the Fire Signaling Line Circuit It responds to regular polls from the control panel and reports type and the status. If it receives a test command from the panel a local magnet test), it stimulates its electronics and reports an It blinks its LEDs when polled and turns the LEDs on when by the panel. The H365 Series offers features and per- that represent the latest in thermal detector technology. 6/26/2019 Page 1 of 3

No text preview available.

April 1, 1998 Detectors Conventional Initiating Devices Fire HD622) (HD621, HD601, HD602) (HD603, HD604) (HD622, HD623) (HD624) HD-600 Heat Detector is attractive, durable, and fea- combination rate-of-rise and fixed-temperature de- Heat detectors are available in 135(cid:176)F (57(cid:176)C) and (94(cid:176)C) temperature ratings. elements detect heat by quickly responding to temperature increase. HD-600 detectors use the reliable pneumatic rate-of-rise element used in former but offer added aesthetic appeal. The pneumatic element responds to a rapid rise in tempera- approximately 15(cid:176)F (8(cid:176)C) per minute, by expansion air within the sealed chamber faster than it can escape a calibrated vent. The resultant increase in pres- depresses the diaphragm, causing the electrical con- to close the circuit. HD-600 rate-of-rise units have a spacing allowance of 50-foot (15.24-meter) centers. Specifications table (page 2) for details. elements react to heat by responding a specific temperature setting. The fixed-temperature uses a fusible alloy. When activated, the external collector drops away to provide quick visual confirma- that the element has operated. units protrude only 1-3/8″ (34.925 mm) from the ceil- surface with a junction box mounting. They have pleas- contours and an all-white finish that conforms to ceiling Rate-of-rise and fixed-temperature. One- or two-circuit, normally open. Easy installation. Low-profile design. Visual indication. Operation testing. detector includes a patented reversible mounting In one position, it easily attaches to a 3-1/4″ (82.55 octagonal box or 4″ (101.60 mm) junction box. reverse, the plate can be used for open wiring without a box. A 1/4″ (6.35 mm) space between detector mounting surface allows for wire connections. All screws are concealed. detector attaches simply to the mounting plate with a and twist motion. No special tools are required. mounting plate is molded of white self-extinguishing rated at 105(cid:176)C. The plate is extremely strong, adapts to uneven mounting surfaces. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 2 SERIES TESTING METHODS Models HD-601/HD-621 and HD-602/HD-622 can be tested by the application of quick heat from any convenient A portable hair dryer is recommended. However, do not apply heat that exceeds the fixed-temperature rating the detector. Models HD-603/HD-623 and HD-604/HD-624 cannot be tested. However, the fusible alloy element is generally con- so reliable that testing is not necessary.

No text preview available.

APPLICATIONS Gentex HG/SHG Series horns are quality electronic devices that offer you both dependable evacua- signals and visual alarms or a combination of both by terminal wiring. The SHG Series can also be wired have independent operation of both horn and strobes Wiring Diagrams on page 2). This can be simply by removing two jumper plugs located on circuit (see installation manual for details). HG/SHG Series horns are easily field-changeable a steady low-frequency alarm signal to a pulsing low- alarm signal by simply removing a jumper Changing from a steady tone to a pulsing tone does prevent reverting back to the original tone at a later All units are shipped from the factory in the steady mode. HG/SHG Series horns are designed to be used for new construction or retrofit projects. They easily to 4″ electrical boxes or 2-gang outlet work boxes back for details). devices are UL 464/1971 listed for use with fire systems. HG devices are UL 464 listed. HG/ devices are warranted for 2 years from the date of FEATURES Low-frequency penetrating output. Low current consumption: 17 mA @ nominal voltage Wide voltage range. Screw terminals, separate in/out wiring option for both and strobe. Steady or pulsing tone. Textured finish high-impact plastic faceplate. Wide variety of mounting options for new construction retrofit applications. Supplied with beauty plugs to accommodate a variety of of input voltage. Strobe maintains constant flash rate (1 per sec.) regard- Flush or semi-flush mounting without the need of a trim 15/75 & 30/75 candela strobe option (SHG12-1575 and Meets ADA 4.28.3 requirements. All 110 cd models exceed requirements of ADA 4.28.3. UL 464/UL1971 listed for fire protective service/signal for impaired. 29, 1997 Series Electronic Horns Audio/Visual Devices Fire SHG24-60) & ENGINEERS alarm signal shall be Gentex model approved equal and shall be listed by Underwriters for Fire Protective Service for the hearing shall also be listed The model the California State Fire Marshal and the Bureau of and Appeals (NYC). alarm signals shall produce a sound output of 90 dBA greater peak as measured in an anechoic chamber. alarm signal shall be capable of changing from a tone to pulsing without permanent alteration to the current consumption at 24 VDC for alarm horn shall not exceed 17 milliamps and the maximum consumption for horn/strobe using 15 candela shall exceed 226 mA @ 12 VDC and 95 mA @ 24 VDC. For applications requiring the higher candela output with alarm horn, the strobe output shall be 75 The current consumption of the strobe (1575) not exceed 93 milliamps @ 24 VDC and 209 mA @ VDC @ 1 Hz, and combined with alarm horn shall not 110 mA @ 24 VDC and 226 mA @ 12 VDC. alarm signal shall be provided with screw terminals in-out field wiring, the strobe shall be capable of opera- independently after horn has been silenced. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, Fire Alarms, One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, Connecticut 06472. Phone: (800) 627- Toll Free FAX: (877) 699-4105, FAX Back:(888) 388-3299 www.firelite.com Page 1 of 2 bined Rated bined Rated MODELS Num ber G124 H G12-15-1 H G12-1575 H G24-15-1 H G24-1575-W H G24-3075-W H G24-1575-C – 30 – 16 – 16 – 30 – 30 – 30 – 30 Candela (UL 1971) (UL 1638) (UL 1971) (UL 1638) (UL 1971) (UL 1638) (UL 1971) (UL 1638) at inal m A

Seismic Certification Achieved Valued Customer, Alarms is pleased to announce that we have achieved International Building Code seismic certification at a higher level of Sds=2.5*g for the listed Addressable/ Supplies/Suppression and Voice Evacuation/Mass Notification Control The IBC requires that life safety equipment continue to operate after a seismic event. certification is governed by International Building Code (IBC), developed by the Code Council (ICC), and can be a competitive advantage. certification is required in many applications worldwide and is determined by the Seismic and Occupancy Categories assigned to a facility (please refer to the Seismic Design Geographic Map for the U.S.). Fire-Lite Alarms has made it possible for you and your to comply with seismic requirements of IBC and eliminate testing the equipment on a by project basis. a minimum, IBC seismic certification and installation details are required for the following facilities in specific geographic regions of the country: Hospitals and other healthcare facilities Fire, rescue and police stations Designated earthquake, hurricane or other emergency shelters 911 communication, data switching, and operation centers Most power generating stations and other public utility facilities Structures containing highly toxic materials Buildings and structures with critical national defense functions Most water treatment facilities Aviation control towers, air traffic control centers, emergency aircraft hangers and some terminal buildings Alarms One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 06472 www.firelite.com of 3 that need seismic certification require kits that include specific enclosure mounting and battery brackets (for Power Sonic batteries only). The seismic kits are specific the enclosure that is being installed and are listed below: Number kit for the FCPS-24FS6/8, MS-2 and MS-4. Includes bracket for two 7AH batteries kit for the MS-5UD-3, MS-10UD-7, MS-9050UD, MS- MS-9600UDLS, MRP-2001, MRP-2002 and ECC- Includes battery bracket for two 7AH, 12AH or 18AH kit for the BB-17F. Includes battery bracket for two 18AH kit for the BB-26. Includes battery bracket for two 26AH kit for the BB-100. Includes battery bracket for two batteries. Remote Power Supply with yellow seismic battery bracket installed Alarms One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 06472 www.firelite.com of 3 Information more details on seismic certification, refer to the Certificate of Compliance on firelite.com. resources are available to assist you with discussing seismic certification with A&Es and in your market. In addition, refer to the seismic documentation on Firelite.com for battery cabinet installation procedures, and other seismic requirements. certification information in the healthcare market in California or any facility under the of the California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD), view the OSP-0071-10 (OSP Preapproval document) on the OSHPD website. contact your Regional Sales Manager or Fire-Lite Alarms Customer Service Representative 1-800-627-3473, if you have any questions regarding this announcement. you for your business and continued support. Brosig Manager Alarms One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 06472 www.firelite.com of 3

No text preview available.

HFS-DPR(A) Low-Profile Detector Honeywell HFS-DPR(A) intelligent plug-in smoke detector integral communication provides point location for alarm and selective maintenance. Honeywell HFS-DPR(A) photoelectric detector unique sensing chamber is engineered to sense smoke pro- by a wide range of combustion sources. The HFS- is specifically a remote test capable detector for use the HFS-D(A) duct smoke detector. Detector sensitivity be programmed in the control panel software. Sensitivity is monitored and reported to the panel. Point ID allows each detector address to be set with easy-to- rotary code switches to provide exact detector locations selective maintenance when chamber contamination an unacceptable level. UL and ETL listed to UL 268 ULC listed to ULC S529 Sleek, low-profile design Analog communications Low standby current Rotary address switches Superior EMI protection Dual LEDs for 360 visibility SPECIFICATIONS Height: 2.0 in (51 mm) Diameter: 4.1 in (104 mm) Shipping Weight: 5.2 oz (147 g) Operating Temperature: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 UL Listed Velocity Range: 0 4000 fpm (0 20 m/sec) for installation in ducts) Operating Humidity Range: 10% to 93% noncondens- SPECIFICATIONS Voltage Range: 15 to 32 volts DC peak Standby Current (max. avg.): 300 @ 24VDC (one every 5 seconds with LED enabled) LED Current (max.): 6.5 mA @ 24 VDC (on) (cid:129) E-965 Devices Information Photoelectric smoke detector, remote test capa- for use with HFS-D(A) duct smoke detectors Remote LED annunciator Remote test station Remote test station with key Detector test magnet Telescoping test magnet Detector removal tool (T55-127-010 included) Extension for XR2 (5 to 15 ft) Detector removal head Use versions for Canadian applications. Listings UL Listed: S24850 ULC Listed: S6959 ETL (US): #100037402CHI-002 06/15/2010 Page 1 of 2 Alarms and System Sensor are registered trademarks of International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use this document is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. specifications are subject to change without notice. more information, contact Fire(cid:129)Lite Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. in the U.S. A. 2 of 2 DF-60622:B (cid:129) 06/15/2010

CONSTRUCTION Shell, door, and handle are molded of durable LEXAN with a textured HR-10 Releasing Station & HRA-10 Station HR-10 and HRA-10 are non-coded, dual-action, manual pull stations for release of Halon. OF HR-10 Highly visible. Easily operated. Attractive shape and a textured finish. Semi-flush mounts to a standard single-gang, double-gang, or 4″ square box (2.125″ minimum depth). Handle latches in down position to clearly indicate the station has been Terminal block for ease of wiring. Surface back box is available. OF HRA-10 all the features of the HR-10 listed above plus: Released and power LED indication Abort switch with guard Four gang vertical, brushed aluminum wall plate. Surface back box available. 16 gauge steel back plate. the handle down causes it to latch in the down position. The handle is manually by using a mechanical key which allows the top of the case pivot forward and the spring-loaded handle to return to its normal position. case can then be pivoted back to its normal position and secured with the SPECIFICATIONS Rated at 3 Amps @ 30 VAC/VDC HR-10 will mount semi-flush to an SB-10 surface back-box. HRA-10 will mount semi-flush to an SBA-10 surface back-box. LINE INFORMATION unit. Dual action. Works with, or without, a fiber of the HR-10 features plus the following features: Released and Power LED indication. Abort switch. Four gang vertical, brushed aluminum wall plate. back box for use with HR-10. back box for use with HRA-10. 711 HRA-10 Releasing Station Clintonville Road Connecticut 06472 484-7161 484-7118 1 of 2 9, 1992 try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover specific applications or antici- all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact

HW-TG7LAF02 / HW-TG7LVF02 LTE Commercial Fire Alarm Communicators for AT&T and Verizon dialer capture solution to connect fire systems to central monitoring and the CLSS Cloud. by cooperation between Telguard and Honeywell the HW-TG7L Fire Series starts Telguard model TG-7FS and adds the powerful capabilities of Honeywell Connected Safety Services (CLSS) Cloud. CLSS LTE Fire Communicator transmits alarm signals from the fire panel over the LTE of AT&T (HW-TG7LAF02) and Verizon (HW-TG7LVF02) to the designated station while leveraging connectivity with CLSS to enable powerful tools. with 2019 and earlier editions of NFPA 72, the CLSS LTE Fire Communicator can as the sole communication path. For existing installations, all landlines dedicated to master control unit can be replaced with a single CLSS LTE Fire Communicator because its 5 or 60-minute supervision modes. CONNECTED LIFE SAFETY SERVICES (CLSS) CLSS is an innovative, all-in-one cloud platform that enables systems integrators facilities managers to deliver an enhanced fire safety service, while maximizing the efficiencies offered by Honeywell trusted detection and alarm systems. The platform enables users to: Get a eye view of all accounts Obtain real-time information on event generation, enabling diagnosis before dispatch Conduct tests and inspections using a mobile app (available in select markets) Provide end users with multi-site asset information and event alerts INTERNET PORTAL makes adopting cellular easy with a secure internet portal that provides total management of UL-listed Telguard cellular alarm communicators. Quickly access services 24/7. CELLULAR SERVICE Cellular Service provides AT&T and Verizon LTE network coverage for all Telguard In Canada, cellular service may be provided by Rogers, Bell, TELUS, or SaskTel. Communication Center is UL compliant and provides seamless connectivity the alarm panel, the Telguard family of products, and the central station. Telguard support provides a single point of contact for both cellular service and Telguard questions. AND BENEFITS Integration with CLSS enables monitoring event transmission data & management device inventory from the CLSS mobile and web portal (available only when Contact ID and point-based Alarm format support for contact ID, SIA2, (3×1, 4×2), modem lle, IIIa, and DMP Certified for use on the AT&T and Verizon networks Minimizes false alarms by providing dual for self-tests Falls back to 3G/4G if an LTE network is not for extended network coverage 60- or 5-minute cellular supervision 180-seconds available in Canada Telephone line monitor built-in, with line security Automatic self-test (daily or 6-hour) Available relay output for tripping the alarm Meets UL 864 requirements for sole or backup path communications panel when a trouble condition powerful software platform that Honeywell to provide real- data and intelligence in its for connected buildings. Locking, red metal enclosure Two programmable supervisory trip outputs Allows full data reporting for unlimited signal details and maximum power for superior in-building / HW-TG7LVF02 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Power Consumption: 40 mA (Standby) EXDL-0: External Omnidirectional LTE mA (Transmission) with link supervision Source: 12 VAC, 800mA UL listed plug-in (included) Dimensions: 7.5 (190.5 mm) H x 11.5″ (292 W x 3.5″ (89 mm) D Shipping Weight: 8 lbs. (3.63 kg) Operating Environment: 32 (0 to (50 up to 95% humidity (non- Transceiver Transmit Power: 200 mW in all bands LTE Bands: 2, 4 & 17 3G Bands: 2 & 5 Antenna: 9″ dipole with 2dBi gain 12 ft of and universal mounting bracket FCC: Part 15, 22, 24, 27 and 68 compliant INFORMATION CLSS LTE Fire

HWF2-COM SERIES / IP Single or Dual Path Commercial Fire Communicators HWF2-COM Series LTE / IP fire are single or dual path fire alarm communicators that Contact ID reporting with any FACP (fire control panel) with a built-in dialer. include: (AT&T LTE & IP) (Verizon LTE & IP) models connect directly to the primary or secondary communication ports of a fire digital alarm communicator transmitter (DACT). selectable reporting paths include: LTE cellular only, IP only, or IP primary with LTE backup. All signals from the HWF2-COM Series are delivered to the AlarmNet control center which routes highly encrypted, cybersecured Ethernet data packets a customer-provided Internet connection or LTE cellular network to the appropriate station. The AlarmNet network control center is fully redundant and monitored Installation and programming are easy using the handheld 7720P Programming AND BENEFITS LTE and IP connection tested every day Three selectable reporting paths: LTE only, IP only, or IP Primary with LTE backup Requires no change to the existing FACP Connects directly to the primary and telephone ports of a DACT Plan choices range from 5 minute, 60 6 hour, and 24 hour supervision (LAN or WAN), DSL model or modem Data transmits over standard Contact ID but is secured with the industry encryption standard (AES 256 Supports both dynamic (DHCP) or public private Static IP addressing Reliable connection: IP and cellular tested every day Built-in, standalone power supply module. Operates over the following communication LTE, HSPA+(4G) HSPA (3G) Works over any type of customer provided charging circuit design battery backup. Includes power and battery supervision 10/100 based network Diagnostic LEDs indicate signal strength status Choice of LTE provider services QOS: Quality of Service diagnostics via conveys vital communicator including signal strength, path used, and when the message received 7720P Handheld programmer for easy HWF2-COM LTE / IP fire communicators operate over the most and common cellular networks including LTE, 4G and3G. Primary Subscriber ID (four digits), obtained from your monitoring Communication Module MAC ID, and MAC CRC number located on outside of the box and inside of the module parameters are assigned by the monitoring station. communications technology provides a highly reliable for the transmission of alarm signals. The network extensive coverage in the United States and Canada. The Network Control Center processes signals from powerful in multiple locations equipped with 24/7 infrastructure Redundant hardware servers, real-time backup databases, generators with battery backup at all locations ensure of service. Signals from AlarmNet are transmitted to station receivers using multiple communication paths of the Internet, LTE radio network, or toll free plain old service (POTS). Visit AlarmNet.com to learn more. REQUIREMENTS, UL COMPLIANCE meet UL864/NFPA requirements, ensure the following: HWF2-COM Series must be installed in accordance with the National Protection Association (NFPA) standards 70 and 72 HWF2-COM Series must be mounted in the same room and within feet of the fire panel. HWF2-COM Series and all equipment used for the IP connection router, hub, modem, etc) must be UL-listed, powered from an branch circuit, and be provided with appropriate standby HWF2-COM Series must use the 7AH battery (not included) to 24 hour backup capability connect to any customer provided Ethernet 10/100 base connection (LAN or WAN), DSL or cable modem. Selectable path feature allows the radios to be configured for a single dual path, while providing appropriate supervision intervals on NFPA 72 requirements. Selectable paths and supervision intervals include: Cell

i3 Series Smoke Detectors Sensor i Series photoelectric and photoelectric/ smoke detectors represent a significant advancement conventional detection, incorporating three key features: ease, intelligence, and instant inspection. ease. The i Series redefines installation ease with plug-in design. This allows an installer to pre-wire the bases with the heads. The large wire-entry port and in-line provide ample room for neatly routing the wiring the base. The base accommodates a variety of backbox methods, as well as direct mounting with drywall To complete the installation, i Series heads plug into base with a simple Stop-Drop Lock action. i Series detectors offer a number of intelligent to simplify testing and maintenance. Drift compensa- and smoothing algorithms, to minimize nuisance alarms, standard in the i Series. When connected to the 2W-MOD test/maintenance module, two-wire i detectors are capa- of generating a remote maintenance signal when they cleaning. This signal is indicated by LEDs located at the and at the panel. To read the sensitivity of i detectors, SENS-RDR is a wireless device that displays sensitivity in of percent-per-foot obscuration. inspection. The i Series provides wide-angle red and LED indicators for instant inspection of detector condi- The LEDs indicate: normal standby, out-of-sensitivity, or freeze trouble conditions. The Walk loop test is available on two-wire i Series detectors when con- to the 2W-MOD loop test/maintenance module. The Walk feature verifies the initiating loop wiring by providing status indication at each detector. Plug-in detector line mounting base included. Large wire-entry port. Mounts to octagonal and single-gang backboxes, 4″ (101.6 terminals with SEMS screws. square backboxes, or directly to ceiling. Stop-Drop Lock attachment to base. Removable detector cover and chamber for easy cleaning. Built-in remote maintenance signaling. Drift compensation and smoothing algorithms. Simplified sensitivity measurement. Wide-angle, dual-color LED indication. Loop testing via Walk feature. Built-in test switch. SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Range: For models 2W-B and 4W-B: to 120 (0 to 49 for thermal models 2WT-B and 32 to 100 (0 to 37.8 Humidity Range: 0% 95% RH, non-condensing. Sensor: 135 (57.2 fixed (models 2WT-B, F-505 Initiating Devices Trouble: 41 (5 (models 2WT-B and 4WT-B). 2.5%/foot (0.762%/meter) nominal. Terminals: Utilize 14 to 22 AWG wire. (including base): 5.3″ (134.62 mm) diameter, inches (50.8 mm) high. 6.3 oz. (178.6 grams). Options: 3.5″ (88.9 mm) octagonal backbox; 4″ mm) octagonal backbox; single-gang backbox; 4″ mm) square backbox with a plaster ring; or direct mount ceiling. SPECIFICATIONS Voltage: 12/24 V non-polarized nominal; 8.5 V 35 V maximum. Alarm Current For two-wire models: 130 mA lim- by control panel; For four-wire models: 20 mA @ 12 V, 23 @ 24 V. Contact Ratings: For four-wire models: 0.5 A @ 30 not applicable for two-wire models. Modes Up LED every 10 sec- LED every 10 sec- (Standby) Blink every 5 sec- of Sensitivity OFF Trouble every 5 sec- every 10 sec- ON Up Sequence for LED Indication LED Status Indication Seconds 4/13/2012 Page 1 of 2 detector shall be a System Sensor i Series model ________, Listed to Underwriters Laboratories UL Fire Protection Signaling Systems. The detector shall be a type (models 2W-B, 4W-B

I I300 FAULT ISOLATOR MODULE INSTRUCTIONS information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to the appropriate Fire-Lite control panel installation for detailed system information. If the modules will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the operator local authority that the system will be temporarily out of service. Disconnect power to the control panel before installing the This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. DESCRIPTION FAULT ISOLATOR MODULES enable part of the communications loop to continue operating when a short circuit occurs it. An LED indicator blinks in the normal condition and turns on during a short circuit condition. The module will automatically the entire communications loop to the normal condition when the short circuit is removed. (The isolator module does have decade switches.) REQUIREMENTS insure proper operation, these modules must be connected to addressable, listed compatible Fire-Lite control panels only. modules mount directly to 4 inch square electrical boxes. The box must have a min. depth of 21 /8″. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and the wiring diagram in Figure 1. Secure module to electrical box (supplied by installer). LINE FIRE-LITE PRODUCT ISOLATOR FOR SPECIFICATIONS WIRING SHOWN IS SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED. ISOLATOR ( (+) ( (+) UL LISTED COMPATIBLE PANEL ISOLATOR ( (+) ( (+) ( (+) ( (+) OF ADDRESSABLE DEVICES ARE SEPARATED BY FAULT ISOLATOR ANY COMBINATION OF COMPATIBLE, DEVICES MAY BE MIXED WITHIN A GROUP. PAIR OF FAULT ISOLATOR MODULES WILL DISCONNECT A OF DEVICES IF A SHORT CIRCUIT OCCURS ON THE LINE CIRCUIT WITHIN THAT GROUP. ( (+) ( (+) ( (+) ( (+) ( (+) ( (+) ( (+) ( (+) ISOLATOR 1. I300 FAULT ISOLATOR MODULE WIRING Fire Alarms, Inc. One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 06472, 203-484-7161

No text preview available.

I300(A) Isolator Module Fire I300(A) Fault Isolator Module is used with addressable fire alarm control panels (FACPs) to the system against wire-to-wire short circuits on the loop. The I300(A) should be placed between each device the SLC loop to isolate a short-circuit problem between the It is required for true Style 7 operation so that other can continue to operate normally in the event of a on the SLC. Powered by SLC loop directly, no external power required. Mounts in standard junction boxes (4.0″/10.16 cm square, cm deep). LED blinks to indicate normal condition. Illuminates when short circuit condition is detected. High noise (EMF/RFI) immunity. Fault Isolator Modules should be spaced between groups sensors in a loop to protect the rest of the loop. Use to iso- short circuit problems within a section of a loop so that sections can continue to operate normally. The I300(A) a maximum of 25 devices in-between isolators, when using relay bases. LOADS PER RELAY BASE AND ISOLATORS/ISOLATOR The maximum number of addressable devices between (or B224BIA isolator bases) is 25 devices. DEVICES base base relay bases draw more current than other intelligent When calculating the 25-device maximum, B224RB rep- 2.5 DEVICES; see example on page 2. ON MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DEVICES: See the SLC (51309) for information on loss of addresses due to current Each module or base added reduces the capacity of positions in an SLC. All SLC field devices must have been after February 1995 to meet the aforementioned If the SLC field devices were purchased prior to 1995, each isolator used reduces the capacity of an SLC two address positions. Requirements differ as applied to relay see note above. Operating voltage: 15 32 VDC (peak). Maximum current upon activation due to short circuit: to the manual for the main FACP. Standby current: 450 maximum; I300(A) is not isolating relay closed. Temperature range: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 Relative humidity: 10% to 93%. Weight: 5 oz. (150 grams). E-940 Devices Dimensions: 4.5 x 4.5 x 0.25 D (11.43 cm H x cm W x 0.635 cm D). face plate is made of off-white plastic. Module includes LED indicator that pulses when normal and illuminates when a short is detected. opens circuit when the line voltage drops below volts. Fault Isolator Modules should be spaced between of addressable devices (maximum 25, see notes on 1) in a loop to protect the rest of the loop. If a short between any two isolators, then both isolators immedi- switch to an open circuit state and isolate the groups of between them. The remaining units on the loop con- to fully operate. Style 4 loops, the I300(A) is generally used at each T-tap to limit the effect of short circuits on a branch to the on that branch. The LED indicator is on continuously a short circuit condition. I300(A) Fault Isolator Module automatically restores the portion of the communications loop to normal. Mount on a standard junction box (4.0″/10.16 cm square) is at least 2.125″/5.398 cm deep. Terminal screws are provided for and out wiring. Surface-mount box is available as an option. instructions are provided with each module. 01/05/2012 Page 1 of 2 Specifications Isolator Modules shall be provided to automatically iso- wire-to-wire short circuits on an SLC loop. The Fault Isola- Module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the Fault Isolator Module automatically open-circuit (disconnect) the SLC loop. the short circuit condition is corrected, the Fault Isolat

InnovairFlex Duct Smoke Detectors Fire InnovairFlex photoelectric smoke detector fea- a pivoting housing that fits various applications: both and rectangular footprints mount to round or rectangu- duct work. new duct smoke detector senses airflow speeds ranging 100 to 4,000 feet per minute with proven precision. The built into this model improve false alarm immu- (with plug-in sensor head); broaden operating temperature to 158 -17 to 70 and humidity (0 to 95 percent condensing) ranges; while simplifying installation and These advance features can detect smoke even the harshest duct applications. new design provides more wiring space with an added 3/4 conduit knockout. Numbers and labels for terminal desig- are consistent with previous Innovair models. The new tube can be clicked into position with one smooth from either the front or the back of the detector. Fire InnovairFlex duct smoke detector has signals to trouble and maintenance conditions. Additionally, a tamper feature is incorporated to indicate a trouble con- when the sensor cover is removed or improperly An improved cover design, with an integrated low- feature, isolates the sensor head from the low-flow tech- for simple maintenance. Fire InnovairFlex series is designed for greater flexi- and reliable smoke detection to simplify installation and The new InnovairFlex product line is backward to existing Innovair models, including remote test Photoelectric, integrated low-flow technology. Air velocity rating from 100 ft/min to 4,000 ft/min (0.5 m/s to m/sec). Versatile mounting options in square or rectangular configu- with modular construction. Plug-in sensor. Superb false alarm immunity with the latest sensor technol- Broader ranges for operating temperature (-4 to 158 to 70 and humidity (0% to 95% non-condensing). Patented sampling tube installs from front or back of the with no tools required. A cover tamper feature to indicate a trouble condition for or improperly installed sensor cover. wiring space with a newly added 3/4 conduit LED status. 24 VDC. Backward compatibility with existing Innovair products, remote accessories. F-650 Initiating Devices WARNING: Duct smoke detectors have limitations. Smoke Detectors are: NOT a substitute for an open area smoke NOT a substitute for early warning detection, and NOT a replacement for a building regular fire system. (Rectangle) 14.38 in (37 cm) Length; 5 in (12.7 cm) 2.5 in (6.36 cm) Depth. (Square) 7.75 in (19.7 cm) Length; 9 in (22.9 cm) Width; in (6.35 cm) Depth. 1.8 lb (0.82 kg). Temperature Range: (-4 to 158 -17 to Temperature Range: -22 to 158 (-30 to Humidity Range: 0% to 95% relative humidity Duct Velocity: 100 to 4,000 ft/min (0.5 to 20.32 m/s). RATINGS supply voltage: 8.5-35 VDC. capacitance: 0.1uF max. voltage: 2.5 VDC min. time (with RTS151): 0.03 to 0.3 seconds. time (by power down): 0.3 seconds max. up time: 35 seconds max. response time: 15 seconds. Requirements: (Using No Accessories) Peak standby current: 120uA. Max standby current: 60uA (average). Max alarm current: 130mA. 10/5/2011 Page 1 of 2 The flexible housing of the duct smoke detector fits square and rectangular footprints. The detector shall oper- at air velociites of 100 ft/min to 4,000 ft/min (0.5 m/sec to 20/ m/sec). The unit shall be capable of providing a trouble signal the event that the sensor cover is removed or improperly It shall be capable of local testing via magnetic switch remote testing using the RTS151KEY remote test st

Installation and Maintenance Instructions for H355R, and H355HT Intelligent Plug-In Temperature Sensors sensor must be installed in compliance with the control panel system installation manual. The installation must the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when installed compliance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); see NFPA 72. installing sensors, please read the system wiring and installation manual thoroughly. This manual provides information on sensor spacing, placement, zoning, and special applications. Copies of these manuals are from Fire DESCRIPTION H355, H355R, and H355HT are intelligent sensors that utilize a state-of-the-art thermistor sensing circuit for fast These sensors are designed to provide open area protection with 50 foot spacing capability. Model H355 is a temperature sensor with 135 F fixed temperature alarm. Model H355R is a rate-of-rise temperature sensor with F fixed temperature alarm. Model H355HT is a high temperature sensor with 190 F fixed temperature alarm. LEDs on each sensor light to provide a local, visible sensor indication. Remote LED annunciator capability is avail- as an optional accessory (Part No. RA400Z). H355, H355R, and H355HT require compatible addressable communications to function properly. these sensors to listed-compatible control panels only. Temperature: Humidity Range: Range: Current: Current: Temperature Rating: of Rise Detection: inches (155 mm) installed in B350LP inches (51 mm) ounces (137 gm) to 100 ( to 38 H355 and H355R to 150 ( to 66 H355HT to 93% Relative Humidity Noncondensing flanged base to 32 Volts DC Peak @ 24 VDC (one communication every 5 sec.with LED blink enabled) mA @ 24 VDC (57 H355 and H355R (88 H355HT to greater than 15 H355R One Fire Place, Northford, CT 06472 Do not loop wire under terminals 1 or 2. wire run to provide supervision of connections. 1 GUIDE wiring must be installed in compliance with the National Electrical Code, local codes and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Proper wire should be used. The installation wires should be color coded to limit mistakes and ease system troubleshooting. Improper connections will a system from responding properly in the event of a fire. power from the communication line before installing sensors. Wire the sensor base (supplied separately) per the wiring diagram, Stop 0 0 Figure 1. Set the desired address on the sensor address switches, see Figure 2. Install the sensor into the sensor base. Push the sensor into the base while turning it clockwise to secure it in place. After all sensors have been installed, apply power to the control unit and activate the communication line. Test the sensor(s) as described in the TESTING section of this manual. 2 RESISTANCE sensor base includes a tamper proof feature which when activated prevents of the sensor without the use of a tool. See the installation instruction for the sensor base for details in using this feature. SENSITIVITY testing, notify the proper authorities that the system is undergoing maintenance, and will temporarily be out of Disable the system to prevent unwanted alarms. sensors must be tested after installation and periodically thereafter. Testing methods must satisfy the Authority Having (AHJ). Sensors offer maximum performance when tested and maintained in compliance with NFPA 72. Test Magnet (p/n M02-04-01 or M02-09-00) Place the optional test magnet against the cover in the magnet test area, as shown in Figure 3, to activate the test The LEDs should latch on within 10 seconds, indicating alarm and annunciating the panel. Reset the detector at the system control panel. Direct Heat Method (Hair dryer of 1000

Intelligent Bases Relay, Isolator, Sounder, Low-Frequency Sounder Bases meet local code and application requirements, Fire-Lite offers 4″ and 6″ bases, as well as, specialty base designs includ- relay, isolator, sounder and low frequency sounder options for new 365 Series of addressable detectors as well as previous standard 4″ and 6″ bases offer a plug-in detector base intended use in intelligent systems, with screw terminals provided for (+ and and remote annunciator connections. Communica- takes place over the power (+ and lines. The 4″ base offers a design while the 6″ base provides compatibility with a wider of junction boxes. specialty bases support application driven requirements. These employ a separate mounting plate that installs on various box sizes to eliminate unsightly surface-mount boxes. The plate enables pre-wiring of all connections to speed and installation. bases (B224RB-WH/B224RB-IV) provide one form-C contact for control of auxiliary functions, such as door closure and ele- recall. The relay can operate in two different modes (short and delay). The activation time for the short delay is 60-100 milli- while the activation time for the long delay is 6-10 sec- A shunt with pin headers, located on the base PC board, is to set the delay timing. bases (B224BI-WH/B224BI-IV) allow the Signaling Line Cir- (SLC) loop to operate under fault conditions created from a circuit preventing an entire communication loop from being dis- The base isolates the section of the loop containing the short from the remainder of the circuit and automatically restores the fault is corrected. and low frequency (-LF) sounder bases are designed for and existing dwelling unit applications. They offer maximum in installation, configuration, and operation to meet or UL 268 and UL 464 requirements. The low frequency bases are designed to meet the NFPA 72 sleeping space to produce a fundamental frequency of 520 Hz +/- 10% a square wave or its equivalent. Studies show that a lower fre- centered around 520 Hz, is the most ideal to wake sleeping even those with mild to severe hearing loss. B200SR sounder and -LF sounder bases (B200SR-WH/ are fully compatible existing B501BH Series sounder base installations. The device users to select one of two B501-supported tones (ANSI 3 or Continuous) through a jumper. B200S sounder and -LF sounder bases (B200S-WH/B200S-IV/ adopt the same address as the detec- but use a unique device type on the loop. The Fire Alarm Control (FACP) can use that address to command an individual or a group of sounders to activate. The command set the FACP can be tailored to multiple event-driven tone outputs selection of volume (75 or 85 dBA), tone (ANSI Temporal 3, Temporal 4, or March Time) and group. In addition, some will enable custom tone patterns. The B200S series sounder recognize the System Sensor synchronization protocol. This them to be used as a component of the general evacuation along with other System Sensor AV appliances when to a power supply or FACP output capable of generating System Sensor synchronization pulses. E-265 Devices Standard Base (White) Standard Base (Ivory) Base (White) Low- Sounder Base (White) Flangeless Base (White) Flangeless Base (Black) Specifications applies to all model variants -WHITE. See Product Line Information for detailed model descrip- B501-WHITE: 4″ (10.16 cm) diameter. B300-6: 6.1″ (15.49 cm) diameter. B224BI, B224RB: 6.2″ (15.748 cm) diameter. B200S, B200SR: 6.875″ (17.46 cm) diameter. gauge: B224BI, B224RB: 14 to 24 AWG. B300-6, B501, B200S, B200SR: 12 to 24 AWG range: B224BI, B224RB, B200S, B200SR: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 B300-6, B501: -4 to 150 (-20 to 66

IPCHSKIT Installation Document 53294:A1 09/21/2009 09-628 IPCHSKIT comes with all hardware necessary to mount the IP Communicator onto a chassis. mounting plate two (2) female, #4-40 x 0.75 standoffs, P/N 42042 four (4) #4-40 x 0.25 screws, P/N 38134 four (4) 1-1/8 Snap-in support posts, P/N 42215 plastic wiring label/cover, P/N 53255 mounting for the IPDACT is in a CHS-4 Series chassis positioned with the required UDACT oriented as below. The IPDACT must always be placed in the 4th position and in the front location for access to wiring. After the plastic cover to the IPDACT with the snap-in support posts, secure the mounting plate to the back of the Then, insert the tab at the bottom of the plate into the slot on the chassis and attach as shown. plate 2 screws required 1.75 standoffs and (2) 0.25 screws ship with UDACT. standoffs and 2 screws required plate 4th position cover to IPDACT, then to mounting plate Chassis 4th position cover to IPDACT, then to mounting plate 4 total screws required screw locations plate Installation on a CHS-M2 the same as the CHS-M3 2 screws required plate cover to then to plate 4th position 2 screw locations If mounting the in this configuration, the must be mounted in a chassis directly below one and in the 4th position. applications where the is installed in the 4th of the NFS2-640 chassis, the IPDACT in the 4th of a separate chassis. 4th position cover to IPDACT, then to mounting plate

No text preview available.

IPDACT-CONFIGURATOR Application Instructions Dm 379-Iv2 Requirements PC III processor or higher. Minimum RAM memory: 128 Mbytes. Operating system: Windows XPTM , Windows 2000TM. Minimum screen resolution: 800×600, 256 colors. hard disk space: 30 Mbytes. 10/100BT network card. IPDACT, IPDACT-2 or IPDACT-2UD IPDACT-Configurator application is compatible with: versions 4 and 5 or above. version 5 or above. version 5 or above. IPDACT versions 4.1 and 5.0 and above can be identified via the sticker shown in the following figure. 1 the application the installation CD into the PC CD reader. This disk starts up automatically. once you have inserted the CD, the following window will appear on PC screen. 2 the the tool option to begin the installation. The first screen to appear the welcome screen which recommends you close all programs before starting the process. This is to prevent conflicts with files that are in execution when files from the installation CD to the hard disk. 3 on to continue installation. The next screen permits you to select the hard file to install the IPDACT-Configurator application. The installation program a default file. Should you not want to use this, you can select a different file to the application using the button. 4 to continue installation. The subsequent window shows the application default name: Configurator 5 the application through the WindowsTM Start up menu: programs Configurator next window displays a summary on the previously selected options before out the actual installation. 6 you wish to change any of the options, just click on the button until you find window containing the option you wish to change. button initiates the installation process for the files in the selected file. 7 the files have been copied, a window appears indicating the installation has successfully completed. 8 Connection between PC and IPDACT the IPDACT-Configurator has been correctly installed, you need to check that between the PC and the IPDACT can be carried out. The steps to are as follows: 1 that both the IPDACT and the PC are connected to the same Ethernet. 2 that the IPDACT has detected the Ethernet when the Ethernet connector LEDs up. Likewise, check that the WindowsTM in the PC indicates the status of the area network connection is connected. 3 the PC is connected to the IPDACT through a crossover Ethernet cable then you configure a static IP address, which is on the same network as the IPDACT, in PC. In any other case, go to STEP 5. the IPDACT is configured with factory settings the IP address for the IPDACT is with mask 255.255.255.0. Configure the PC network interface with an pertaining to the IPDACT subnet which does not have any other network i.e. any address 192.168.0.X with mask 255.255.255.0, where X is a value 1 and 254 with the exception of value 100 which is assigned to the IPDACT. procedure to configure the IP interface in a Windows XPTM is as follows: Access Start Panel Connections in the PC. With the right hand mouse button, select Explorer. Select Area With the right hand button, select The configuration screen that appears is as follows: Using the mouse, double click on Protocol (TCP/IP) and a window where you can enter the IP address, mask and Default Gateway: 9

IPDACT-Configurator Application (V5.0) User Guide Dm 378-Iv3 Requirements PC III processor or higher. Minimum RAM memory: 128 Mbytes. Operating system: Windows XPTM , Windows 2000TM. Minimum screen resolution: 800×600, 256 colors. hard disk space: 30 Mbytes. 10/100BT network card. IPDACT, IPDACT-2 or IPDACT-2UD IPDACT-Configurator application is compatible with: versions 4 and 5 or above. version 5 or above. version 5 or above. version can be identified through the sticker as shown in the figure: 1 Executing IPDACT-Configurator main screen (see Fig. 2) appears on executing the application. In this screen can select among the options: Quick Install: must select this option to configure the parameters needed to register the in a VisorALARM receiver. Parameters: lets you to modify local parameters that do not affect the communication VisorALARM. Device Status: this option to display the IPDACT status so problems can be diagnosed. 2 the IPDACT using a crossover Ethernet cable you have directly connected the IPDACT with the PC using a crossover Ethernet (without using any hub or switch) you will need to use the auto- feature of IPDACT in order to install the device. the next steps in order to carry out the IPDACT installation: 1 Install in the Mode group and in the box from the main screen. 2 connecting with the IPDACT, you need IP connectivity between the PC and (the configuration steps for the PC IP address are described in the IPDACT- Installation Guide). this purpose if the IPDACT has the factory settings you must configure the PC an IP address from the 192.168.0.X network (for example use 192.168.0.254). If IPDACT has another IP address you need to know that address and the in order to connect to the device. 3 the IP address (192.168.0.100 or another known address) and the password in appropriate fields on the main screen and click on the button to connection with the IPDACT. 3 the connection is successful, the Install configuration screen appears. an error message appears indicating the problem. Two situations could IPDACT IP address is incorrect or the IPDACT release is not compatible the application. user password is invalid: 3 4 4 the LAN (Local Area Network) where the IPDACT is going to be connected has a server you must fill in the next parameters in the Install screen (see 5): Check the Enable DHCP client box: This configures the device to use to get an IP address and gateway from a DHCP server in the LAN. Account Number: This is the IPDACT account number that identifies the and can be up to 8 digits long. Main VisorALARM IP address and Backup VisorALARM IP address: IP for the main and backup VisorALARM receivers. UDP Port: the receivers UDP port where the IPDACT sends alarms and messages. Auto-register password: This is the registration password that the IPDACT use to connect to the VisorALARM and to obtain its configuration to STEP 6. 5 5 the LAN does not have a DHCP server you must fill in the next parameters: Uncheck the Enable DHCP client box: This configures the device to use a IP address and gateway. IP Address: A static IP address for the device. Mask: IP subset mask the IPDACT pertains to. Gateway: This parameter is the IP address for the router accessing Account Number: This is the IPDACT account number that identifies the an

Communicator Manual DM373-I 2.0 2007 of contents – – – – – 1.3. – 1.1. – 1.2. Introduction…………………………………………………………. I-1 Introduction ………………………………………………… I-1 – 1. Scenario ……………………………………………….. I-1 Mode …………………………………………….. I-3 – 1.2.1. Monitoring…………………………………………… I-3 sending……………………………………… I-5 – 1.2.2. features …………………………………………. I-6 IPDACT Description……………………………………………… II-7 – 1. General Description ………………………………………………… II-7 – 2. LEDs …………………………………………………………………… II-10 – 3. Jumper ………………………………………………………………… II-11 – 4. Connection points to the Control Panel and external ….. II-11 – 5. LAN …………………………………………………………………….. II-13 – 6. Console……………………………………………………………….. II-13 Installation and cabling……………………………………… III-17 – 1. Installation…………………………………………………………… III-17 – 1.1. Assembly Instructions for the IPDACT box …….. III-19 – 2. Wiring…………………………………………………………………. III-20 – 2.1. Wiring for UL Listed Fire Installations ……………. III-20 scheme…………………………… III-20 instructions ……………………… III-22 Configuration ……………………………………………………. IV-27 – 1. Configuration modes …………………………………………….. IV-27 – 2. DHCP…………………………………………………………………. IV-27 – 3. Telephonic Console ……………………………………………… IV-29 – 3.1. Configuration……………………………………………… IV-30 – 3.1.1. Default Configuration………………………… IV-32 – 3.1.2. Register description………………………….. IV-32 – 3.1.3. Minimum configuration for the installer … IV-38 – 3.1.4. Configuration Example ……………………… IV-39 – 4. Asynchronous Console …………………………………………. IV-41 – 4.1. Accessing the console ………………………………… IV-41 – 2.1.1. – 2.1.2. – 4.2. Main Menu ………………………………………………… IV-41 generic configuration………………………. IV-42 – 4.3. – 4.4. Monitoring configuration and sending of alarms. IV-42 – 4.5. Quick Configuration ……………………….. IV-43 – 4.6. Monitoring …………………………………………………. IV-44 – 5. Telnet …………………………………………………………………. IV-46 Appendix …………………………………………………………… V-47 – 1. UL Compliance……………………………………………………… V-47 – 2. Control Panels………………………………………………………. V-47 – 3. Technical Specifications…………………………………………. V-48 manufacturer reserves the right to introduce changes and to the appropriate features of both the hardware and software of this product, modifying the specifications included in manual without prior notice. – – Chapter. Introduction – 1. IPDACT Introduction IP module ( IPDACT) is a device which, panel, carries out three basic tasks: when connected to a security send over an IP network the alarm information sent by the panel which this is connected. check the connectivity between the control panel and the alarms center. cases where it is not possible to transmit over the IP network, the will stop intercepting the alarms from the panel. At this the alarms will be sent over the telephone line. IPDACT operates together with the Teldat VisorALARM device, located the alarm receiver center. This behaves as an alarm receiver

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

Communicator Dm 387-Iv3 Start Programming Guide using a PC Serial Port TS563/2 Requirements Panel Id compatible panel with tone dialing. Existing PSTN Service (for backup communication lines). PC with RS-232 serial port. Console cable for the IPDACT-2(UD). Range (Maximum) 12VDC (Maximum) 24VDC VDC 180 mA (NSC), 230 mA (Alarm) 185 mA (NSC), 230 mA (Alarm) 93 mA (NSC), 136 mA (Alarm) 98 mA (NSC), 155 mA (Alarm) Access a static IP address (always the same) or a dynamic IP address (could be different every time connection is made) are possible. Checklist console access password (default is 24680). password, required to execute the register command. address, subnet mask and gateway for IPDACT-2(UD)2 account number or client number. address, and UDP Port number of the VisorALARM central station. Please obtain the following information from your central monitoring station. If you have a DHCP server in the network to which the IPDACT-2(UD) connects, these parameters can be obtained automatically. Physical Connections to the PRIMARY and SECONDARY FIRE PANEL PHONE LINE. connections to the TO AP terminal are interchangeable. voltage: -72 VDC current: 22 mA 600 be connected to supplied 1K resistors (factory installed). the power supply from the Fire Alarm Panel (or other electric a broadband modem/router or a network switch/hub for internet with a IEEE 802.3 interface. AP INPUT2 +12/24V Network IPDACT-2(UD) Default Configuration a short circuit in the IPDACT-2(UD) P1 jumper during the start up process, you can the IPDACT-2(UD) with the default factory settings. The process for this is as off the IPDACT-2(UD), circuit the jumper with the supplied berg header, on the device, maintain the jumper short circuited during the first A-D LEDs burst (the LEDs on and off) and undo the short circuit during the second burst. the process has executed successfully, the IPDACT-2(UD) will display a third burst the default configuration has been activated. Serial Port Programming order to use the serial port, you need to connect the cable designed to this end which must obtained either from Fire-Lite or from an authorized distributor. The following figures show cable and the connection mode to the IPDACT-2(UD). the serial cable to the IPDACT-2(UD) as shown above, the other end to a PC serial and use a terminal emulation program (Windows HyperTerminal for example) the serial port to 9600 bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, without parity and no flow When you connect the terminal emulation program, you will be asked for a The factory default value is Enter this and the following menu will Accepted – Main Menu – Configuration a) Generic MIP config b) Transmission Parameters c) Quick Install Monitoring d) General Info e) Remote Monitor f) Events g) IP Connectivity z) Exit option: c — Quick Install — a) DHCP client: ON b) IP addr: 192.168.0.100 mask: 255.255.255.0 c) Gateway IP: 192.168.0.200 d) Account Number: 0 e) Supervisory Main: f) Supervisory Backup: g) Maintenance: h) Port: 80 i) Register MIP j) Reset k) AutoRegister MIP: z) Exit deals with an options menu where option is represented by a letter the title. Each option accesses a or contains a parameter value. select an option, enter this and press ENTER. device installation, access the Quick menu by pressing c and then figure will be presented. All the to install the device are found this menu. The steps to complete the are as follows: The menu displayed

COMMUNICATOR Reference DM385-Iv2 2.0 2007 OF CONTENTS – I-1 – 1. – 1.1. – 1.2. Introduction …………………………………………………………………. I-1 Scenario………………………………………………………………………………..I-1 Mode…………………………………………………………………………….I-3 – 1.2.1. Monitoring………………………………………………………………………………..I-3 sending …………………………………………………………………………..I-5 – 1.2.2. features…………………………………………………………………………I-6 – 1.3. – DESCRIPTION …………………………………………………………. II-7 – 1. General Description…………………………………………………………………………..II-7 – 2. ………………………………………………………………………………………………..II-9 – 3. – 4. Connection points to the Control Panel and external…………………………II-10 – 5. – 6. Console …………………………………………………………………………………………..II-13 – III-15 – 1. modes …………………………………………………………………. III-15 – 2. III-15 – 3. – 3.1. Console……………………………………………………………………. III-17 Configuration………………………………………………………….III-19 – 3.1.1. description…………………………………………………………….III-20 – 3.1.2. – 3.1.3. Minimum configuration for the installer ………………………………..III-27 Example ……………………………………………………….III-28 – 3.1.4. – 4. – 4.1. – 4.2. – 4.3. – 4.4. Console ………………………………………………………………. III-30 the console…………………………………………………………….III-30 Menu …………………………………………………………………………..III-30 generic configuration………………………………………….III-31 configuration and sending of alarms ………………………..III-31 – 4.5. – 4.6. Quick Configuration…………………………………………..III-32 – 5. ……………………………………………………………………………………….. III-35 – ……………………………………………………………………………IV-37 – 1. Technical Specifications ………………………………………….IV-37 manufacturer reserves the right to introduce changes and to the appropriate features of both the hardware and software of this product, modifying the specifications included in manual without prior notice. – Introduction – 1. IPDACT-UD Introduction IPDACT-UD is a device which, when connected to a security control carries out three basic tasks: send over an IP network the alarm information sent by the panel which this is connected. check the connectivity between the control panel and the alarms center. cases where it is not possible to transmit over the IP network, the will stop intercepting the alarms from the panel. At this the alarms will be sent over the telephone line.

IPDACT-2/2UD IP Series: IP Fire Alarm Communicator new FireWatch IPDACT-2 and IPDACT-2UD are com- based on the original IPDACT optional digital communications module Fire The new duplicates the previous function found in the origi- IPDACT but adds two supervised inputs, two additional an improved terminal strip and the addition of several panels to the compatibility list. The IPDACT-2UD ver- 6.0 adds a modem daughter board (2UD) that supports over the Internet or a customer Intranet. to the IPDACT Series Installation Document PN 53109 more information. models connect to the primary and secondary communi- ports of the panel DACT, converting the analog signals digital signals at the panel for transmission to a compatible VisorALARM PLUS IP receiver at a central station. The operates normally during an alarm, supervisory or trou- event and sends contact-ID formatted analog information of the telephone ports to the IP Communicator. The IP reformats the data into highly encrypted Ether- UDP packets for transmission to a compatible receiver at central station. This new listing only requires an IP connec- No backup analog phone line is necessary. Customers still use a traditional backup phone line from the panel phone port if desired. Contact ID DACT-equipped panels from Fire the IP allow for faster and more economic digital transmissions, improving response times and decreas- costs found with traditional analog systems. They offer features such as supervised line functionality, a central station can detect any off-line alarm panels seconds. On the central station side, a compatible Plus IP receiver from the Teldat Corporation popular receiver formats and allows seamless inte- into existing conventional central station architectures. benefit of an IP Communicator is that it is always on, the security and supervision of the central station from once every 24 hours for a supervisory test to once every 30 – 90 seconds. IPDACT-2UD allows a programmer to upload and down- data between the user PC and a supported fire alarm The panel and PC can be anywhere on the world wide or within a corporate intranet. user computer runs a program called UDPORT.exe to the modem signals from Fire PK-PLUS or the the user enters the main IP address of the receiver, the UDP port to use, username, and Instead of using the PC modem, this process between the IPDACT-2UD modem at the and the panel own modem. While speed is still limited the baud rate of the panel modem, panel communications now 100% digital over IP from the remote program PC all way to the remote panel installation. This eliminates any in modem communications caused by noise or other If an alarm should occur during upload or download, panel is able to interrupt modem communications immedi- and transmit the alarm to the central station. PS-Tools panel programming software. A3-35 IPDACT-2UD is registered in the VisorALARM Receiver a unique serial number. A subscriber number must be into the subscriber number database field for each This same number is entered into the sub- telephone number field (panel to call) in PK-PLUS or as if calling the panel on a telephone. If these num- match, and the master username and password are cor- full duplex communication is permitted to the panel. UL 864 Ninth Edition prohibits downloading to a panel with- entering a local panel password. Uploading is permitted at any without entering a password. Listed to UL Standard 864, Ninth Edition when used with UL 864 Ninth Edition-listed panels. Eliminates the cost of two dedicated phone lines. Only the shared IP equipment is required. connection supervision to the central station from once-a-day test signal to once every 30 – 90 seconds. Requires no change to the existing panel configuration. The Communicator connect directly to the primary and sec- analog

No text preview available.

IPGSM-COM Internet and Digital Cellular IPGSM-COM is a compact alarm communicator panel. It to the primary and secondary communication ports of Fire Alarm Control Panel DACT. In the event of an off-nor- condition, the panel sends contact ID formatted information the IPGSM-COM communicator panel. The IPGSM-COM reformats the data into highly encrypted Ethernet packets transmission to the AlarmNet receiver via customer-provided connection. communication methods are critical in the market- due to VoIP (Voice over IP), migration from POTS ( telephone service and growth of digital radio networks. The delivers secure, reliable and complementary Inter- and digital communications via the GSM (Global System for network. Our exclusive, Triple-Path Communications combines Internet service with GSM for added reliability an extra level of security. The GSM radio technology is in that it uses GPRS service (General Packet Radio Ser- for data and alarm communications and automatically to SMS (Short Message Service) for alarms if GPRS is Through the Internet or GSM radio, the IPGSM- offers contact ID reporting with any Fire Alarm Control signals from the IPGSM-COM communicator panel are deliv- to Honeywell AlarmNet Network Control Center, which the information to the appropriate central station. The of the art AlarmNet Network Control Center is fully redun- and monitored 24/7. AlarmNet has the ability to route mes- using AlarmNet-i and 800 PLUS services, providing true and multi-path message delivery. Saves the cost of two dedicated phone lines. Only the cus- shared IP equipment is required. Triple path communications: Uses Internet as primary with GSM technology as back-up. GSM path utilizes GPRS automatically switches to SMS if GPRS is unavailable. Requires no change to the existing Fire Alarm Control Panel The IPGSM-COM connects directly to the pri- and secondary telephone ports. Works over any type of customer provided Ethernet 10/ network connection (LAN or WAN), DSL modem or modem. Data transmits over standard contact-ID protocol but is with the industry advanced encryption standard 256 bit). Supports both dynamic (DHCP) or Public and Private Static addressing. Built-In Power Supply module: On board charging circuit accommodates back-up battery. Includes primary and battery supervision. Diagnostic LEDs: Signal strength and status indications. Reliable connection: IP and GSM tested everyday QOS: Quality of Service diagnostics via AlarmNet supply vital including when message was received, battery input voltage, signal strength, and message path. Web-Based Programming or Handheld programmer for (cid:129) ECN 11-0070 an event occurs, the Fire Alarm Control Panel goes off- to dial the central station. The IPGSM-COM Dialer Capture detects the off-hook condition and provides the fire with a dial tone. When the fire panel detects the dial tone, begins dialing the central station. The Dialer Capture Module the three second period after dialing as the number has been completed. After the dialing is completed, the Capture Module returns a handshake to the fire panel. fire panel then sends the contact ID reports to the Dialer Module, which in turn sends a kiss-off after the report is received from the fire panel. The Dialer Capture sends the contact ID reports over the ECP bus to the communications module. When all the reports are sent, fire panel goes on-hook. The iGSM communications module transmits the messages to the central station (either over internet (primary) or the GSM network). to Program are two ways to configure the IPGSM-COM communica- panel: Handheld programmer 7720P Web-Based Programming – Allows complete interactive from AlarmNet Direct. IPGSM-COM Communicator can be pre-programmed. Use 7720P programmer or the Web-Based Program to enter all information. This is saved to the IPGSM-COM panel memory. W

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF FORESTRY & FIRE PROTECTION OFFICE OF THE STATE FIRE MARSHAL ENGINEERING – BUILDING MATERIALS LISTING PROGRAM SERVICE No. 1 of 1 — FIRE ALARM CONTROL UNIT ACCESSORIES/MISC. DEVICES SECURITY2 Corporate Center Dr, Ste. 100, Melville, NY 11747 Issa Khouryawad (516) 577-2312 Fax (516) 577-3540 [email protected] 7845GSM, LYNX DM-GSM, VISTA-GSM and SWGSM-ADT, GSMVLP, GSMX, GSML, GSMV, GSMV-ADT, GSMV-APX, iGSMV, and iGSMVCN cellular control channel communicators. All units are suitable for residential fire services. Refer to listee’s data sheet for detailed product description and operational accordance with listee’s printed installation instructions, applicable codes & ordinances in a manner acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. name, model number, electrical rating, and UL label. as a control unit accessory for use with *separately listed compatible commercial and fire alarm control units. Refer to listee installation Instruction Manual for details. and other non-fire functions were not examined. 06-06-13 bh listing is based upon technical data submitted by the applicant. CSFM Fire Engineering staff has reviewed test results and/or other data but does not make an independent verification of any claims. This listing is not endorsement or verify correct requirements or installation criteria. Refer to listee data sheet, installation instructions and/or other should not be used of This Issued: 01, 2013 Expires 30, 2014 By: PARSEGIAN, Program Coordinator Engineering Division

ISO-6(A) Fault Isolator Module ISO-6(A) Six Fault Isolator Module provides six equivalent that will allow a portion of the communications loop to operating when a short circuit occurs on that loop. An LED indicator will blink in the normal state for each of six inputs and will latch on during a short circuit condition. module will automatically restore the communications to normal condition when the short circuit is removed. ISO-6 Six Isolator Module is an automatic switch that when the line voltage drops below four volts. Isolator should be spaced between groups of sensors or in a loop to protect the rest of the loop. If a short between any two isolators, then both isolators immedi- switch to an open circuit state and isolate the devices them. The remaining units on the loop continue to operate. LED status indicators. Removable 12 to 18 AWG plug-in terminal blocks. Six individual, Class B isolator circuits. Mount up to two modules in BB-2F enclosure (optional). Mount up to six modules on a CHS-6 chassis in a BB-6F Mounting hardware included. ISO-6 Fault Isolator Modules should be spaced between of sensors in an SLC to protect the rest of the loop. to isolate short circuit problems within a section of a loop that other sections can continue to operate normally. The supports a maximum of 25 devices between isolators. more than 100 Isolator Modules are connected to an loop, the address capacity of the loop is reduced by two addresses for every isolator device in excess of 100. Operating Voltage: 15-32 VDC. Current: 450 per circuit, 2.7 mA all circuits. Current Draw: 17 mA per circuit in isolation, 102 with all circuits in isolation. Range: 32 F to 120 F (0 C to 49 C). 10% to 85% non-condensing. 6.8″H x 5.8″W x 1.0″D. weight: 1.1 lb. (0.50 kg) including packaging. Options: CHS-6 Chassis, BB-2F Cabinet, BB-6F Gauge: 12 AWG (3.31 mm to 18 AWG (0.821 mm Devices: See the documentation for your panel, the Fire-Lite Device Compatibility Document. Devices Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to ISO-6 components. In cases, certain modules or applications may not be listed certain approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Con- factory for latest listing status. UL/ULC Listed: S3705. FM Approved. CSFM: 7300-1653-0234. Line Information Six Isolator Module. ULC-listed version of ISO-6. Optional cabinet for one or two modules. Door Dimen- 9.234″ (23.454 cm) wide (9.484″ [24.089 cm] including x 12.218″ (31.0337 cm) high, x 0.672″ (1.7068 cm) Backbox Dimensions: 9.0″ (22.860 cm) wide (9.25″ cm] including hinges), x 12.0″ (30.480 cm) high x 2.75″ cm). Chassis Dimensions (installed): 7.150″ (18.161 wide overall x 7.312″ (18.5725 cm) high interior overall x (5.4762 cm) deep overall. Optional cabinet for up to six modules mounted on chassis (below). Door Dimensions: 24.0″ (60.96 cm) x 12.632″ (32.0852 cm) high, x 1.25″ (3.175 cm) deep, at bottom. Backbox Dimensions: 24.0″ (60.96 cm) x 12.550″ (31.877 cm) high x 5.218″ (13.2537 cm) deep. Chassis, mounts up to six modules in a BB-6F cabi- 2/3/2015 Page 1 of 2 is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use this document is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. specifications are subject to change without notice. more information, contact Fire(cid:129)Lite Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. 2 of 2 DF-60845:A (cid:129) 2/3/2015

March 1, 1999 Series Bells Audio/Visual Devices Fire Series bells are low-current, audible signaling for use in fire alarm systems or other signaling Under-dome design. Available in three gong sizes (6″, 8″, and 10″ diameter). Low operating current. Low current. Indoor/outdoor installation. Mount to standard 4″ square electrical box. Complies with UL 864. KMS Series bells use a low-current, high efficiency motor to drive the striker. All DC models are polar- for use with supervision circuitry. The operating is completely enclosed in a cast aluminum Series bells are ideally suited for almost any kind alarm signaling application. They can be used in factories, office buildings, or private residences. low current consumption means additional savings standby power. bell gong is made of steel finished in red enamel. striker is also made of steel, and the mechanism is made of cast aluminum. Optional backboxes of steel finished with red enamel to match the gong. may be installed on a wall surface or semi-flush. A backbox (WBB) also permits installation an exterior wall surface. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, Fire Alarms, One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, Connecticut 06472. Phone: (800) 627- Toll Free FAX: (877) 699-4105, FAX Back:(888) 388-3299 www.firelite.com Page 1 of 2 LINE INFORMATION Number Size Measurement 10 ft. (3.048 m)* KMS-6-24 KMS-8-24 (15.24 cm) (20.32 cm) KMS-10-24 (25.40 cm) dB dB dB Input VDC VDC VDC Current Voltage VDC VDC VDC WBB BB-R SFP-R Surface-mount weatherproof backbox, metal, red. Standard 4″ square electrical backbox – red enamel finish. Semiflush plate, mounting trim, metal, red. MP-SF/R Semiflush plate, mounting trim, plastic, red. Sound Pressure Level (SPL) measured in accordance UL Standard 464. UL Standard 464 requires that: The units be measured in a reverberant room for pure tones under the methods for of Sound Power Levels of Small in Reverberation Rooms, ANSI S1.21- The units be capable of providing a sound out- of not less than the sound level provided by omnidirectional source having an A-weighted pressure level equal to the level speci- on the unit marking and not less than 75 in any case. 2 of 2 DF-51636

The LCD-40 Fire Annunciator the Fire Fire Alarm Control Panel Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 # 50327 Revision: 50327:B ECN 96-117 Precautions to the following will aid in problem-free with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/ inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software To ensure proper system operation, this product be tested in accordance with NFPA 72-1993 Chapter after any programming operation or change in site- software. Reacceptance testing is required after change, addition or deletion of system components, after any modification, repair or adjustment to system or wiring. components, circuits, system operations, or software known to be affected by a change must be 100% In addition, to ensure that other operations are not affected, at least 10% of initiating devices are not directly affected by the change, up to a of 50 devices, must be tested and proper operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for at 0-49O C/32-120O F and at a relative of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O However, the useful life of the system standby and the electronic components may be affected by extreme temperature ranges humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this and its peripherals be installed in an with a nominal room temperature of 15- C/60-80O F. that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may erratically or can be damaged when subjected to induced transients. Although no system is completely from lightning transients and interferences, proper will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside wiring is not recommended, due to an increased suscep- to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or en- AC power and batteries prior to removing or circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any so that static charges are removed from the body. Use suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and pro- manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP and reliability depend upon proper installation. Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insur- rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warn- devices, and a fire alarm control with remote notification can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such system, however, does not assure protection against prop- damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot

One Fire-Lite Place CT 06472 (203) 484-7161 (203) 484-7118 Series Fire Annunciator use with MS-9200(C)/E Fire Alarm Control Panel #50327 Rev: D 50327:D1 ECN 99-023 Precautions to the following will aid in problem-free with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can connected to the fire alarm control panel. all sources of power before servicing. unit and associated equipment may be by removing and/or inserting cards, mod- or interconnecting cables while the unit is ener- Do not attempt to install, service or operate unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Soft- Changes: To ensure proper system operation, product must be tested in accordance with NFPA Chapter 7 after any programming operation or in site-specific software. Reacceptance test- is required after any change, addition or deletion system components or after any modification, or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. components, circuits, system operations or functions known to be affected by a change be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that operations are not inadvertently affected, at 10% of initiating devices that are not directly by the change, up to a maximum of 50 must be tested and proper system operation system meets NFPA requirements for operation 0 – 49o C and at a relative humidity of 85% RH @ 30o C. However, the useful life the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room of 60 – 80o F. that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating indicating device loops. Most devices cannot more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified voltage. all solid state electronic devices, this may operate erratically or can be damaged subjected to lightning induced transients. no system is completely immune from transients and interferences, proper will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning Consult with the Technical Services if any problems are anticipated or AC power and batteries prior to or inserting circuit boards. Failure to do can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any filing, reaming or punching of the When possible, make all cable entries the sides or rear. Before making modifica- verify that they will not interfere with transformer and printed circuit board not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in- Over tightening may damage threads, in reduced terminal contact pressure and with screw terminal removal. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so static charges are removed from the body. static suppressive packaging protect assemblies removed from the unit. and programming manuals. These must be followed to avoid damage to control panel and associated equipment. operation and reliability depend upon installation. Alarm System Limitations W hile installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance automatic fire alarm system – typically made of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull audible warning devices and a fire alarm with remote notification capability, can pro- early warning of a developing fire. Such a however, does not assure protection against damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of detectors may

Fire LCD-40 Ser LCD-40 Ser LCD-40 Seriesiesiesiesies LCD-40 Ser LCD-40 Ser Software Change Software Change Software Change Software Change Software Change #50373 Rev. D 12/9/98 98-499 P/N 50373:D procedure outlines the mechanical installation steps required to install an EPROM in the LCD-40. Change Change Change Change Change Software Versions Software Versions Software Versions Software Versions Software Versions proceeding with the EPROM installation, check to confirm that the software (EPROM) installed in MS-9200(C)/E is compatible with the LCD-40 software. If software with either the Part Number 73750 or 73829 is installed in the MS-9200(C), the Series Annunciator must have software with a Part Number of 73779 or 73879 to with the FACP (Fire Alarm Control Panel). If software with a Part Number of or higher is installed in the MS-9200(C), the LCD-40 Series Annunciator must software with a Part Number of #LCD40V20 or higher to operate with the FACP. If software with a Part Number 73846 is installed in the MS-9200E, the LCD-40 Series Annun- must have software with Part Number 73779 or 73879 to operate with the FACP. If with Part Number #M9200EV20 or higher is installed in the MS-9200E, the LCD-40 Annunciator must have software with a Part Number of #LCD40V20 or higher to with the FACP. Handling precautions for integrated circuits Handling precautions for integrated circuits Handling precautions for integrated circuits Handling precautions for integrated circuits Handling precautions for integrated circuits electricity can destroy integrated circuits (ICs)! To prevent damage to the EPROM, a wrist strap and static-free IC insertion/extraction tool is highly recommended. The manufacturer cannot be responsible damage to the EPROM as a result of improper handling. EPROM Access and LCD-40 Removal EPROM Access and LCD-40 Removal EPROM Access and LCD-40 Removal EPROM Access and LCD-40 Removal EPROM Access and LCD-40 Removal Remove the upper and lower retaining screws from the trim ring and remove the trim ring. Remove the mounting screws along the outer edge of the LCD-40 flange. Pull the LCD-40 out of the 3-gang electrical box to gain access to the connectors in the System Power Sources System Power Sources System Power Sources System Power Sources System Power Sources remove primary and secondary power before working on the system! to disconnecting power from the LCD-40, be sure to note the orientation of the seven power connector (P2) and the four terminal EIA-485 connector (P1) on the rear of the These plug-in type terminal connectors are utilized for ease-of-serviceability. When SURE SURE these plug-in connectors, BE SURE SURE to align the rounded groove on both the plug- SURE connector and mating connector on the LCD-40 Printed Circuit Board. Enough force can be placed on these connectors to make them fit in the reverse direction. 1. 1. 1. 1. Disconnect power from the LCD-40 by removing the seven terminal power connector (P2) the back of the LCD-40. This should ONLYONLYONLYONLYONLY be done while power is still removed from MS-9200(C)/E. For ease-of-serviceability, the four position EIA-485 terminal connector should also be removed. Reverse the procedure, noting proper orientation, for powering-up the LCD-40 and reinstall- the EIA-485 connector. 1 Circuit Pin Conversion Circuit Pin Conversion Circuit Pin Conversion Circuit Pin Conversion Circuit Pin Conversion proper orientation of any IC removed or installed! Note of Pin 1 with respect to the notch in the body of the IC. The EPROM must be installed in the same manner as the removed. Failure to observe this orientation will result in of the EPROM. NOTE: Some ICs may have a small dot of a notch for orientation purposes. of 4 of 4 of 4 of 4 of 4 50373 Rev D 12/9/98 P/N 50373:D

No text preview available.

LDM Driver Modules LDM Series lamp driver modules, when combined with a graphic display, provide annunciation and control for intelligent fire alarm control panels. These modules a serial communications interface, and may be located up 6,000 feet from the panel. ALARM/CIRCUIT ON and TROUBLE lamp/LED per-point or more dense alarm-only option (field selectable). Control switch option for remote control per point. Lamps/LEDs may be programmed to display status of indi- circuits or control relays as well as system status System trouble lamp/LED signal. On-line/power LED indicator. Alarm and trouble resound with flash of new conditions. Local sounder for both alarm/circuit-on and trouble condi- with silence/acknowledge switch connection. Serial EIA-485 interface for reduced installation costs. May be powered by 24 VDC from the panel or by remote Efficient switch-power converter reduces power consump- supplies. Microprocessor-controlled electronics, fully supervised. Plug-in terminal blocks for ease of installation and service. Trouble monitor option for remote power supplies. basic models are available; the LDM-32F control module the LDM-E32F expander module. Each may be selected provide 32 alarm indications; or 16 alarm, 16 trouble, and 16 points. LDM-32F/LDM-E32F with a custom graphic array may be to indicate point status and, in some versions, to control state of output points. addition, the LDM-R32F module may be used to provide 32 relays for electrical isolation when connecting the to other equipment. B-300 LDM-32F and LDM-E32F modules mount on four stand- inside the custom annunciator graphic box. Alternately, modules may be installed in a CHS-4L chassis. The mod- size is approximately 4.4 (11.2cm) x 7.1 (18cm). between the LDM Series annunciators and host FIre Alarm Control Panel are made through a EIA-485 multi-drop loop, and a two-wire regulated 24 power loop. Up to 32 LDM systems may be connected to single control panel. field-wiring terminations use removable, compression-type blocks for ease of installation, wiring, and circuit test- Series modules, when used with a custom graphic provide the Fire intelligent fire alarm control with up to 32 unique or redundant annunciators, each a capacity of 64 points for a total capacity of 2048 points. or remote power supplies and serial communications the custom annunciators to be located anywhere on the premises. of system operational controls, such as Signal Silence, Reset, and local annunciation controls (such as Local and Lamp Test may be accomplished through key- or push-switches. Listings and Approvals listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in document. In some cases, certain modules or applications 06/24/11 Page 1 of 2 not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. UL Listed: S2424 ULC Listed: MEA Listed: 317-01-E CSFM: 7300-0075:0160 FM Approved City of Chicago approved: Class 1, Class 2 City of Denver approved Line Information Lamp Driver Module with 32 alarm lamp-driver (sink to power common on alarm). May be selected switch) for 16 alarm/circuit on, 16 trouble, and 16 switch if desired. Also includes system-trouble lamp driver and switch input. Integral piezo sounds for each new alarm or trouble and is silenced the Local Acknowledge switch, or permanently disabled a dip switch selection. Flash of new alarms or troubles is through dip switches. 16 switch inputs may be used panel SILENCE, RESET, or remote relay control. Instruc- are included. Lamp Driver Module with 32 alarm drivers; or 16 16 trouble, and 16 switch inputs. One LDM-E32F is per LDM-32F in alarm-only mode. Three LDM-E32F are allowed per LDM-32F in alarm/trouble. Includes cable to connect to LDM-32F/LDM-E32F

May 12, 1998 Series Driver Modules Annunciators Fire 2000) 2000) LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules, when combined with a cus- graphic display, provide annunciation and control for the 2000 and MicroScan-9200 fire alarm control panels. modules use a serial communications interface, and may be up to 6,000 feet from the panel. ALARM/CIRCUIT ON and TROUBLE lamp/LED per-point option, more dense alarm-only option (field-selectable). Control switch option for remote control per point. Lamps/LEDs may be programmed to display status of notification or control relays as well as system status conditions. System trouble lamp/LED signal. On-line/power LED indicator. Alarm and trouble resound with flash of new conditions. Local sounder for both alarm/circuit-on and trouble conditions with switch connection. Serial EIA-485 interface for reduced installation cost. May be powered by 24 VDC from the panel or by remote power Efficient switched-power converter reduces power consumption. Microprocessor-controlled electronics, fully supervised. Plug-in terminal blocks for ease of installation and service. Trouble monitor option for remote power supplies. basic models are available: the LDM-32F control module and LDM-E32F expander module. Each may be selected to provide alarm indications; or 16 alarm, 16 trouble, and 16 control points. LDM-32F/LDM-E32F with a custom graphic array may be used indicate point status and, in some versions, to control the state of points. LDM-32F and LDM-E32F modules mount on four standoffs in- the custom annunciator graphic box. Alternately, the modules be installed in a standard CHS-4 chassis (Sensiscan 2000), or in an ABS-8RF backbox (when used with the MS-9200). module size is approximately 4.4″ (11.2 cm) x 7.1″ (18 cm). between the LDM Series annunciators and the host Alarm Control Panel are made through a two-wire EIA-485 multi- loop, and a two-wire regulated 24 VDC power loop. Up to 32 systems may be connected to a single control panel. field-wiring terminations use removable, compression-type ter- blocks for ease of installation, wiring, and circuit testing. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 2 Series Lamp Driver Modules are used to provide the Fire(cid:149)Lite Sensiscan 2000 MicroScan-9200 with an interface to a custom graphic annunciator. or remote power supplies and serial communications allow the custom annun- to be located virtually anywhere on the protected premises. system alarm and/or trouble conditions may be annunciated on a per-point or in a grouped-zone configuration. of system operational controls, such as Signal Silence, System Reset, and annunciation controls (such as Local Acknowledge), and Lamp Test may be through special key- or push-switches. LINE INFORMATION Lamp Driver Module with 32 alarm lamp-driver transistors (sink to power on alarm). May be selected (dip switch) for 16 alarm/circuit on, 16 trouble, 16 switch inputs if desired. Also includes system-trouble lamp driver and lamp- switch input. Integral piezo sounder sounds for each new or trouble and is silenced with the Local Acknowledge switch, or permanently with a dip-switch selection. Flash of new alarms or troubles is selectable dip switches. 16 switch inputs may be used for panel SILENCE, RESET, ACKNOWLEDGE, or remote output control (NACs and relays, Sensiscan 2000 Instructions are included. Lamp Driver Module with 32 alarm drivers; or 16 alarm, 16 trouble,

12 Clintonville Road CT 06472 484-7161 (203) 484-7118 Series Driver Modules Graphic Annunciation and Control with the Sensiscan 2000 and MS-9200 Alarm Control Panels #50055 Rev: B 50055:B ECN 95-210 Precautions to the following will aid in problem-free with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/ inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software To ensure proper system operation, this product be tested in accordance with NFPA 72-1993 Chapter after any programming operation or change in site- software. Reacceptance testing is required after change, addition or deletion of system components, after any modification, repair or adjustment to system or wiring. components, circuits, system operations, or software known to be affected by a change must be 100% In addition, to ensure that other operations are not affected, at least 10% of initiating devices are not directly affected by the change, up to a of 50 devices, must be tested and proper operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for at 0-49O C/32-120O F and at a relative of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O However, the useful life of the system standby and the electronic components may be affected by extreme temperature ranges humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this and its peripherals be installed in an with a nominal room temperature of 15- C/60-80O F. that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may erratically or can be damaged when subjected to induced transients. Although no system is completely from lightning transients and interferences, proper will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside wiring is not recommended, due to an increased suscep- to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or en- AC power and batteries prior to removing or circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any so that static charges are removed from the body. Use suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and pro- manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP and reliability depend upon proper installation. Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insur- rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warn- devices, and a fire alarm control with remote notification can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such system, however, does not assure protection against prop- damage or loss of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reason

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

The LED-10 LED-10 LED-10 LED-10 LED-10 Fire Ann Fire Ann Fire Annunciator Fire Ann Fire Ann use with the Fire Alarm Control Panel Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 # 50400 # 50400 # 50400 # 50400 # 50400 Revision: Revision: Revision: Revision: Revision: 50400:A ECN 96-088 50400:A ECN 96-088 50400:A ECN 96-088 50400:A ECN 96-088 50400:A ECN 96-088 Precautions to the following will aid in problem-free with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/ inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software To ensure proper system operation, this product be tested in accordance with NFPA 72-1993 Chapter after any programming operation or change in site- software. Reacceptance testing is required after change, addition or deletion of system components, after any modification, repair or adjustment to system or wiring. components, circuits, system operations, or software known to be affected by a change must be 100% In addition, to ensure that other operations are not affected, at least 10% of initiating devices are not directly affected by the change, up to a of 50 devices, must be tested and proper operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for at 0-49O C/32-120O F and at a relative of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O However, the useful life of the system standby and the electronic components may be affected by extreme temperature ranges humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this and its peripherals be installed in an with a nominal room temperature of 15- C/60-80O F. that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and device loops. Most devices cannot tolerate than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may erratically or can be damaged when subjected to induced transients. Although no system is completely from lightning transients and interferences, proper will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside wiring is not recommended, due to an increased suscep- to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or en- AC power and batteries prior to removing or circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal pressure and difficulty with screw terminal removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any so that static charges are removed from the body. Use suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and pro- manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid to the control panel and associated equipment. FACP and reliability depend upon proper installation. Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insur- rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke heat

The LED-10 Series Fire Annunciators use with the Fire Alarm Control/Communicator Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 # 50400 Revision: 50400:B ECN 97-510 50400 Rev B 10/27/97 P/N 50400:B One: LED-10 Series Annunciators ……………………………….. 4 ……………………………………………………………………………………. 4 1-1: Component Summary ………………………………………………… 5 1-2: Wiring to Terminals ……………………………………………………. 6 DIP Switch Settings ……………………………………………………………. 7 1-3: SW1 DIP Switch Settings Example ……………………………… 7 1-4: SW2 DIP Switch Settings Example ……………………………… 8 1-1: LED-10 Series Annunciator Addressing ………………………… 9 1-5: Typical Configuration …………………………………………………. 9 Indicators and Piezo Sounder …………………………………………….. 10 Functions for LED-10 Only ……………………………………………… 11 Two: LED-10 Series Annunciators Mounting ……………….. 13 2-1: LED-10 Series Hardware ………………………………………….. 13 2-2: LED-10 Series Backboxes ………………………………………… 13 2-3: LED-10 Series Semi-flush Mounting ………………………….. 14 2-4: LED-10 Series Surface Mounting ………………………………. 15 Three: LED-10 Series Electrical Connections …………….. 16 3-1: Power Connection ……………………………………………………. 16 3-2: LED-10IM Installation ………………………………………………. 17 3-3: EIA-485 Connection ………………………………………………… 18 3-4: Wiring FACP to LED-10 Series ………………………………….. 19 Four: EIA-485 Shield Terminations …………………………….. 20 the EIA-485 Shield is not in Conduit …………………………………. 20 the EIA-485 Shield is in Full Conduit ………………………………… 21 Slide-In Labels for LED-10 Series Annunciators ……………. 23 50400 Rev B 10/27/97 P/N 50400:B One: LED-10 Series Annunciators and LED-10LS2 Fire LED-10 Series Annunciators consist of the LED-10, LED-10L and LED- They are compact, attractive LED-type fire annunciators designed for use with MS-5210UD Fire Alarm Control Communicator. The LED-10L and LED-10LS2 are which do not have function switches or a key-switch. The LED-10LS2 is primarily for Canadian installations since it provides zone 9 and 10 alarm LEDs are yellow for supervisory functions. LED-10 Series Annunciators are capable of displaying independent zone fire alarm, monitor alarm, trouble and supervisory status. They also provide system LEDs to display Power, Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory and Signals Silenced The LED-10 model is also capable of performing system acknowledge, drill and reset remotely. between the control panel and the LED-10 Series Annunciators is over a two-wire serial interface employing the EIA-485 communication Up to 32 LED-10 Series Annunciators may be connected to the two-wire EIA- circuit. The annunciators may be powered from the host FACP or remote, UL filtered, regulated power supplies. – all models Zone Alarm and Trouble LEDs. System Status LEDs for Power (green), Alarm (red), Trouble (yellow), Supervisory and Signals Silenced (yellow). Local piezo sounder with alarm and trouble resound. Distinctly different flash rates for LEDs and piezo sounder distinguish system alarm = 1 second on and 1 second off monitor alarm = 1/4 second on and 1/4 second off alarm = 1/2 second on and 1/2

2 50122635-001:D 9/13/2018 17-408 on the front page. refer to Link Test Test Survey profile indicates Variable. units are in seconds.”M” indicates Minute. minutes (approx.) transition to next state after sec between blink patterns blink is green. 2nd is yellow blinks in this pattern 20 duration of LED state between blink patterns color of blinks device in the mesh can transition to forming mode. is in the mesh and searching for other devices. forming: forming Mesh restructuring 20 update node update- battery cut off not not all 4 batteries present than 6 months or be set by the FACP based on system events. The following patterns are supported. Actual usage protection provided by Panel/Gateway (in for request mode) (in for mode) (in for batteries are present State or modules state detectors switch for Mode Mode usage the mesh battery cut off batteries are fresh is not SWIFT Check is is is modification 0 – non0 – 0 – non0 0 – 159 – 0 cleared is Assigned Assigned on SWIFT Tools survey battery Default test fail Indications – Detectors & Modules Indications – Detectors & Modules Table Site Survey LED indications, please refer the graphic on dotted line. on dotted line. on dotted line. Survey survey – link test test by creating clearing tamper Test Results Test Test Test Test Test Pair or out range conducting only Link test, the results stay as long as there is battery life. conducting both Link and RF test, the Link test results will stay for 5 min then transition to RF test RF Test Note that the 7 blinks indicate 70 min left, 6 blinks indicate 60 min left and on. Final results are shown by a solid red and green LED. Scan Scan Test Results Scan good Scan bad Pattern Required Pattern the device. If persists, contact support the tamper condition 1 minute to enter site SWIFT Tools to assign or activate switch to for profile Required code wheel pattern to the desired mode Required device and software the mesh in formation the mesh is in mode or wait for to search mesh formation mode Required Assigned The Mesh Pattern request not permitted the mesh for (in mode) for (in mode) is assigned and is searching the mesh discovered mesh is assigned and is searching the mesh has activated has activated has

LPSD-12 Volt Photoelectric Smoke Detector LPSD-12 FEATURES Low Profile Design 2 or 4 Wire Base Compatible Highly Stable Operation Superior RF/Transient Protection Low Standby Current, 55 uA Nominal Non-directional Smoke Chamber Tamper Proof Security Locking Feature Magnetic Detector Operation Check Fire-Lite LPSD-12 can be used in all areas where Smoke Detectors are required. The LPSD- is designed for smoldering and flaming fires which are caused by such fuel sources as wood, paper and The BLP series base is designed for this detector is available in either a two or four wire version. unit is comprised of an LED source and silicon photo receiving element. In a normal standby condition, receiving element receives no light from the pulsing source. In the event of a fire, smoke enters the and light is reflected from the smoke particles to receivingelement. The light received is converted into electronic signal. Signals are processed in the com- circuitry, and when two consecutive signals ex- the basic level are received within a specified of time, the time delay circuit triggers the SCR to activate the alarm signal. An LED is contained the detector base and continuously illuminates to indi- an alarm condition. CONTROL PANELS MS-4412B MS-5012 Clintonville Road CT 06472 (203) 484-7161 484-7118 1 of 2 7, 1994 SPECIFICATIONS Source Voltage Form Current Current Allowable Current Alarm Trip Current Temperature UL Rated Feature As infrared Emitting Diode Voltage: 9.4 – 15.4 VDC Voltage: 8.0 – 17.0 VDC DC (average at 12 VDC) (maximum) @ 77 – 100 1.3″ (with Base: 1.75″) 4″ (with Base: 6″) Ounces magnetic: equivalent to 4%/ft – 6%/ft obscuration SPECIFICATIONS contractor shall furnish and install where indicated on the plans, photoelectric smoke detectors Firelite Model The combination head and twist-lock base shall be UL listed compatible with a UL listed fire alarm panel. head dimensions shall be 1.3″ in height, and 4″ in diameter. base shall limit the alarm current available to the detectors. Base shall be appropriate twist-lock base Model BLP- (4W). The detector may be reset by actuating the control panel reset switch. The sensitivity of the detector shal1 capable of being measured. vandal-resistant, security locking feature shall be used in those areas as indicated on the drawings. The locking shall be field removable when not required. shall be possible to perform an operational test of the detector without the need of generating smoke. The test shall simulate the effects of products of combustion in the chamber to ensure testing of detector circuits. facilitate installation, the detector shall be non-polarized. Voltage and RF transient suppression techniques shall employed to minimize false alarm potential. LINE INFORMATION Smoke detectors, 12VDC. Requires a BLP Series Base. profile two-wire base. profile two-wire base. profile four-wire base with resistor. Allow use with FireLite MP-12 and MS-4012 panels. try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover specific applications or anticipate all All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, contact

GENERAL Sensor Multi-Alert sounders and sounder/ are uniquely suited to provide primary or second- signaling for fire and security applications. System Sensor Multi-Alert Sounder and combination Sounder/Strobe (MA/SS), and Sig- Strobe (SS) are UL listed for primary or secondary sig- in life safety systems. The MA Series and MASS provide eight different warning tones which can be during installation by arranging clips on tabs (see Sounder Tone Selection diagram). These clips can be in the field, allowing the user to change the sound at any time after installation. The Multi- mounts directly to 4″ (101.6 mm) square backboxes. mounting plates are available for either flush or installations. Flush installations require a 2-3/4″ mm) deep backbox (model BB-D). The UL 464 com- sounder has a low current consumption and is listed 12 and 24 VDC and full wave rectified unfiltered opera- Model MA12/24D is suitable for outdoor applications installed in the optional System Sensor WBB Weath- Back Box. In Canada, a rigid steel conduit must used when installing the WBB Weatherproof Back Box. The UL 1638 compliant SS Series signal is an electronic visible warning signal that flashes once every 1.5 seconds. Available in either 1.5 cd or 15 cd light intensity at 24 VDC or 15 cd at 12 the strobe light uses an extremely reliable xenon flash with low current requirements. The electronic circuit enclosed within the durable polycarbonate lens. Field-programmable for one of eight distinctive sounds. Eight field-selectable and reversable tone outputs (Mult- sounder). Strobe available in 1.5 or 15 cd. Low current consumption. May be surface mounted on standard 4″ square backbox. Flush or semi-flush mounting available with optional plates. Sounder and strobe can each be operated independently. SS strobe UL listed to Standard 1638. Three-year warranty. for protection of life and property. Intended for use in alarm notification circuit of a UL listed fire alarm control For further information, refer to NFPA standards recommended practices for installation and use of these 23, 1998 Sounder, Sounder/Strobe, MA/SS, SS SS Signal Strobe Audio/Visual Devices Fire MASSLO/M) Vol. II and MASSLO/M) (SSLO/M) (MA only) (SS24LO,M) MASSLO/M) AND OPERATION Signal Strobe is an electronic visual warning signal flashes approximately once every 1.5 seconds. The intensity strobe light uses an extremely reliable xe- flash tube with low current requirements. The elec- circuit is enclosed within the durable polycarbonate All circuits are polarized to be compatible with DC supervision and satisfy code requirements for visual strobe works independently, but it may be mounted on of the horn. When mounted alone, it may be either semi- or surface mounted, depending on the choice of plate options. instructions are packaged with each unit. are included with each device. Phillips head screws used to attach accessories. Mounting options include: Surface mounting. Semi-flush mounting. Flush mounting (deep box required). Plaster ring mounting. Weatherproof (use WBB box, sounders only strobes not approved for weatherproof applications). document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information, Fire Alarms, One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, Connecticut 06472. Phone: (800) 627- Toll Free FAX: (877) 699-4105, FAX Back:(888) 388-3299 www.firelite.com Page 1 of 4 SPECIFICATIONS shall be a System Sensor Model ________, capable of operating at 12 and 24 VDC. Sounder shall be listed to Laboratories Standard 464 for fire protection signal

GENERAL Sensor(cid:146)s Multi-Alert(cid:153) sounders and sounder/ are uniquely suited to provide primary or second- signaling for fire and security applications. (cid:151) System Sensor(cid:146)s Multi-Alert(cid:153) Sounder and combination Sounder/Strobe (MA/SS), and Sig- Strobe (SS) are UL listed for primary or secondary sig- in life safety systems. The MA Series and MASS provide eight different warning tones which can be during installation by arranging clips on tabs (see Sounder Tone Selection diagram). These clips can be in the field, allowing the user to change the sound at any time after installation. The Multi- mounts directly to 4″ (101.6 mm) square backboxes. mounting plates are available for either flush or installations. Flush installations require a 2-3/4″ mm) deep backbox (model BB-D). The UL 464 com- sounder has a low current consumption and is listed 12 and 24 VDC and full wave rectified unfiltered opera- Model MA12/24D is suitable for outdoor applications installed in the optional System Sensor WBB Weath- Back Box. In Canada, a rigid steel conduit must used when installing the WBB Weatherproof Back Box. (cid:151) The UL 1638 compliant SS Series signal is an electronic visible warning signal that flashes once every 1.5 seconds. Available in either 1.5 cd or 15 cd light intensity at 24 VDC or 15 cd at 12 the strobe light uses an extremely reliable xenon flash with low current requirements. The electronic circuit enclosed within the durable polycarbonate lens. Field-programmable for one of eight distinctive sounds. Eight field-selectable and reversable tone outputs (Mult- sounder). Strobe available in 1.5 or 15 cd. Low current consumption. May be surface mounted on standard 4″ square backbox. Flush or semi-flush mounting available with optional plates. Sounder and strobe can each be operated independently. SS strobe UL listed to Standard 1638. Three-year warranty. for protection of life and property. Intended for use in alarm notification circuit of a UL listed fire alarm control For further information, refer to NFPA standards recommended practices for installation and use of appliances. 23, 1998 MA/SS, SS Sounder, Sounder/Strobe, SS Signal Strobe Audio/Visual Devices Fire MASSLO/M) Vol. II and MASSLO/M) (SSLO/M) (MA only) (SS24LO,M) MASSLO/M) AND OPERATION Signal Strobe is an electronic visual warning signal flashes approximately once every 1.5 seconds. The intensity strobe light uses an extremely reliable xenon tube with low current requirements. The electronic is enclosed within the durable polycarbonate lens. circuits are polarized to be compatible with DC alarm and satisfy code requirements for visual sig- strobe works independently, but it may be mounted on of the horn. When mounted alone, it may be either semi- or surface mounted, depending on the choice of plate options. Installation instructions are packaged with each unit. are included with each device. Phillips head screws used to attach accessories. Mounting options include: Surface mounting. Semi-flush mounting. Flush mounting (deep box required). Plaster ring mounting. Weatherproof (use WBB box, sounders only (cid:151) strobes not approved for weatherproof applications). document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all specific applications or all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For information, contact Fire(cid:149)Lite. Phone: (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118 Clintonville Road, Northford, Connecticut 06472 and Manufacturing System Certified to Standard ISO-9001 in the U.S.A. (cid:151) Page 1 of 4 SPECIFICATIONS shall be a Sy

No text preview available.

InstallatIon anD maIntenance InstructIons FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 Dual monitor module to 32 VDC mA (LED on) (LED flashing) Ohms Ohms Ohms Volts to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Non-condensing in H 4.275 in W 1.4 in D (Mounts to a 4 in square by 21/8 in deep box.) Electrical Box Operating Voltage: Current Draw: Operating Current: Resistance: SLC Wiring Resistance: IDC wiring resistance: IDC Voltage: IDC Current: Range: InstallIng information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to control panel installation manual for detailed system information. If the will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the opera- and local authority that the system will be temporarily out of service. Dis- power to the control panel before installing the modules. directly to 4-inch square electrical boxes, Figure 2A). The box must a minimum depth of 21/8 inches. Surface mounted electrical boxes are available from FireLite. 2. moDule mountIng: This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. DescrIptIon Dual Monitor Module is intended for use in addressable, two wire sys- It provides two independent 2-wire initiating device circuits (IDC), at separate, consecutive addresses. It is capable of monitoring normally contact fire alarm and supervisory devices, or either normally open or closed security devices. requIrements ensure proper operation, this module shall be connected to a compatible system control panel (list available from FireLite). 1. removIng rotary swItch stop: All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and This module is intended for power limited wiring only. Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and appropri- wiring diagrams. Set the address on the module per job drawings. NOTE: Monitor module L (using terminals 6 and 7) responds at the ad- set on the code switches. Monitor module H (using terminals 8 and will automatically respond at the next higher address. For example, if code switches are set to 76, module L will respond at address 76 and H will respond at address 77. Use caution to avoid duplicate ad- of modules on the system. Secure module to electrical box (supplied by installer), as shown in 2. 3. typical 2-wire initiating circuit configuration, nfpa style B: NEXT PANEL OR DEVICE INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUITS (L&H), EACH LIMITED TO 240 @ 11 VDC MAX. 47k EOL 47k EOL MODULES TO LISTED CONTROL PANELS ONLY LINE CIRCUIT (SLC) VDC MAX. SHIELDED-TWISTED IS RECOMMENDED LISTED CONTACT CLOSURE DEVICES MAY USED. DO NOT MIX FIRE ALARM INITIATING, OR SECURITY DEVICES ON THE INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT. CONTACT CLOSURE DEVICES PER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. WIRING SHOWN IS AND POWER LIMITED L (TERMINALS 6 & 7) RESPONDS AT ADDRESS ON CODE SWITCHES. MONITOR H (TERMINALS 8 & RESPONDS AT NEXT HIGHER ADDRESS. FireLite Alarms, Inc.

MDF-300 Dual Monitor Module Instructions Operating Voltage: Current Draw: Operating Current: Resistance: IDC wiring resistance: Range: to 32 VDC mA (LED on) (LED flashing) Ohms Ohms to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Noncondensing H x 4 x 11/4 D (Mounts to a 4 square by 21/8 deep box.) Electrical Box Installing information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to the control panel installation manual for detailed system If the modules will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the operator and local authority that the system be temporarily out of service. Disconnect power to the control panel before installing the modules. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. Description Dual Monitor Module is intended for use in addressable, two wire systems. It provides two independent 2-wire initiating device circuits at two separate, consecutive addresses. It is capable of monitoring normally open contact fire alarm and supervisory devices, or normally open or normally closed security devices. The module has a single panel controlled red LED. Requirements ensure proper operation, this module shall be connected to a compatible Fire system control panel (list available from directly to 4 square electrical boxes (see Figure 2A). The box must have a minimum depth of 21/8 Surface mounted elec- boxes (SMB500) are available from Fire 2A. Module mounting: All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regula- This module is intended for power limited wiring only. Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and appropriate wir- diagrams. Set the address on the module per job drawings. Some panels support extended addressing. In order to set the module address 99 on compatible systems, carefully remove the stop on the rotary switch with thumb in the direction shown in Figure 1. Monitor module L (using terminals 6 and 7) responds at the address set the code switches. Monitor module H (using terminals 8 and 9) will automati- respond at the next higher address. For example, if the code switches are to 76, module L will respond at address 76 and module H will respond at ad- 77. Use caution to avoid duplicate addressing of modules on the system. Secure module to electrical box (supplied by installer), as shown in Figure 2A. 1. Removing Switch Stop: 865 10 2 1 2B: Alarms, Inc., One Fire-Lite Place., Northford, CT 06472-1653, (203)484-7161 3. Typical 2-wire initiating circuit configuration, NFPA Style B: INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUITS (L & H), POWER LIMITED TO 230 A @ 12VDC MAX. NEXT 865 PANEL OR DEVICE MODULES TO LISTED COMPATIBLE PANELS ONLY WIRING SHOWN IS SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED LINE VDC MAX. PAIR RECOMMENDED K EOL K EOL NUMBER OF UL LISTED CONTACT CLOSURE MAY BE USED. DO NOT MIX FIRE ALARM SUPERVISORY, OR SECURITY DEVICES THE SAME INITIATING DEVICE CIRCUIT. CONTACT CLOSURE DEVICES PER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. A (TERMINALS 6 & 7) RESPONDS AT ADDRESS ON CODE SWITCHES. MONITOR B (TERMINALS 8 & 9) AT NEXT HIGHER ADDRESS. Fire Alarms, Inc.

DF-51663:A G-260 Devices Modules for the SpectrAlert SpectrAlert Advance Series Sync module synchronizes SpectrAlert strobes at Hz and horns at temporal 3 over a single pair of wires. Pat- module technology also allows the silencing of horns and on horn/strobe and chime/strobe models over a pair of Flexibility. The Sync module is designed to and synchronize either two 3-amp circuits wired in Class or one 3-amp circuit powered as Class A. Should more than zones require synchronization, additional modules can be by interconnecting the input and output terminals modules. Configuration MDL3 module has the capability of connecting two Style Y B) circuits or one Style Z (Class A) circuit. NAC output(s) from the panel are connected to the zone of the MDL3 module and the zone output(s) from the module are connected to the notification loop(s). Supervi- is accomplished in the module by a direct connection the zone input and the zone output of each of the two circuits connected to the normal end-of-line device. The the EOL device through the MDL3 module. When or both outputs (zones 1 & 2) from the module are wired the SpectrAlert and SpectrAlert Advance products, the horns strobes in both zones will be synchronized. MDL3 module can be configured so that more than two can be synchronized by the interconnection of the slave and output (see Application Examples). Specifications range: Regulated: 12 VDC/FWR (8.0 V to 17.5 V) or 24 (16.0 V to 33.0 V) load on loop: 3 amps. draw: See chart. temperature: 0 to 49 (32 to 120 Specifications 5.25 in L x 5.25 in W (13.3 cm L x 13.3 cm W) 4.69 x 4.69 x 2.125 (11.9 cm x 11.9 cm x 5.4 cm) Operating Temperature: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 SpectrAlert Horns and Each module can power two three-amp circuits wired in B, or one three-amp circuit powered as Class A. Each module will synchronize two zones. Additional modules can be added and may be synchronized all other modules by interconnecting the input and terminals between modules. LINE INFORMATION – Sync module for use with SpectrAlert and SpectrAlert Series, red. – Sync module for use with SpectrAlert and SpectrA- Advance Series, red, for Canada – Sync module for use with SpectrAlert and SpectrAlert Series, white. – Sync module for use with SpectrAlert and SpectrA- Advance Series, white, for Canada Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the basic control In some cases, certain modules may not be listed by cer- approval agencies, or listing may be in process. Consult fac- for latest listing status. UL: S4011 ULC: S5512 CSFM: 7300-1653:202 FM Approved Draw (mA) (mA) (mA) Slave (mA) 06/25/09 Page 1 of 2 Alarms and System Sensor are registered trademarks of International Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use this document is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all specific applications or anticipate all requirements. specifications are subject to change without notice. more information, contact Fire Alarms. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. in the U.S. A. 2 of 2 DF-51663:A 06/25/09

firealarmresources.com

2UD Modem Card Instructions mIP-2 and the IPDACT-2 products can be converted to a mIP-2UD or to an (respectively) by installing the 2UD Modem Card. This will provide full Panel Upload/Download support over the IP network. 1. Adding the 2UD modem card to a mIP-2 or an IPDACT-2 module Before proceeding with the installation, make sure all power and DC) has been removed. installer should follow the steps described below: Remove the plastic label/cover from the IPDACT-2 Module. If the module is a mIP-2 Remove the jumpers from A and B pins located in the upper left portion of the mIP-2 step may not be required. the IPDACT-2 module. 2. Close-up of pins A and B in mIP-2 and IPDACT-2 modules Carefully align the connector on the 2UD Modem Card with the connector located in top left of the mIP-2 or the IPDACT-2 module and align the A and B connectors the 2UD Modem Card with the A and B pins on the mIP-2 or IPDACT-2 module removed in step 2). 3. Aligning the 2UD card with the mIP-2 or IPDACT-2 module Carefully press the 2UD Modem Card onto the mIP-2 or IPDACT-2 module Ensure that the 2UD Modem Card is securely seated, being careful not bend or break any pins on the connectors. Reinstall the plastic label/cover on the IPDACT-2UD Module. If the module is a mIP- this step may not be necessary. Reapply all power (AC and DC) and test the system for proper operation.

No text preview available.

Specifications Operating Voltage: Resistance: IDC Resistance: Range: Monitor Module Instructions to 32 VDC Ohms Ohms to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Noncondensing H x 4 W x 11/4 D (Mounts to a 4 square by 21/8 deep box.) Electrical Box Installing information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to the control panel installation manual for detailed system If the modules will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the operator and local authority that the system be temporarily out of service. Disconnect power to the control panel before installing the modules. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. Description MMF-300 Monitor Module is intended for use in addressable, two-wire systems, where the individual address of each module is se- using the built-in rotary switches. It provides either a 2-wire or 4-wire fault tolerant Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) for normally open fire alarm or supervisory devices. The module has a panel controlled LED indicator. The MMF-300 can be used to replace an module in existing systems. Requirements ensure proper operation, these modules shall be connected to listed compatible system control panels only. MMF-300 mounts directly to 4 square electrical boxes (see Figure 2). The box must have a minimum depth of 21 /8 Surface electrical boxes (SMB500) are available. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. This module is intended for power limited wiring only. Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and appropriate wiring diagrams. Set the address on the module per job drawings. Some panels support extended addressing. In order to set the module above address 99 on Fire compatible systems, remove the stop on the upper rotary switch with thumb in the direction shown in Figure 1. Secure module to electrical box (supplied by installer), as shown in Figure 2. 1. Controls and indicators: 2. mounting: 865 6 7 8 9 10 2 1 8 9 Alarms, Inc., One Fire-Lite Place., Northford, CT 06472, 203-484-7161 3. Typical 2-wire Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) configuration, NFPA Style B (Class B): NEXT NUMBER OF UL LISTED CONTACT CLOSURE MAY BE USED. DO NOT MIX FIRE INITIATING, SUPERVISORY, OR DEVICES ON THE SAME MODULE. K EOL DEVICE CIRCUIT (IDC) – NFPA STYLE B LIMITED: 230 MAX @ 12 VDC MAX CONTACT CLOSURE DEVICES PER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. NEXT NUMBER OF UL LISTED CONTACT CLOSURE MAY BE USED. DO NOT MIX FIRE INITIATING, SUPERVISORY, OR DEVICES ON THE SAME MODULE. 865 6 7 8 9 865 6 7 8 9 PANEL OR DEVICE MODULES TO LISTED COMPATIBLE CONTROL PANELS ONLY LINE VDC MAX. PAIR RECOMMENDED WIRING SHOWN IS SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED PANEL OR DEVICE MODULES TO LISTED COMPATIBLE CONTROL PANELS ONLY RESISTOR INTERNAL AT 8 & 9. LINE VDC MAX PAIR RECOMMENDED CONTACT CLOSURE DEVICES PER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. WIRING SHOWN IS SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED 4. Typical 4-wire fault tolerant Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) configuration, NFPA Style D (Class A): Fire Alarms, Inc.

MMF-300(A) Series, Monitor Modules different monitor modules are available for Fire control panels to suit a variety of applications. Moni- modules are used to supervise a circuit of dry-contact input such as conventional heat detectors and pull stations, monitor and power a circuit of two-wire smoke detectors is a standard-sized module (typically mounts to a [10.16 cm] square box) that supervises either a Style D A) or Style B (Class B) circuit of dry-contact input is a miniature monitor module a mere 1.3″ (3.302 H x 2.75″ (6.985 cm) W x 0.65″ (1.651 cm) D that super- a Style B (Class B) circuit of dry-contact input devices. Its design allows the MMF-301(A) to be mounted in a box behind the device it monitors. is a standard-sized module used to monitor and compatible two-wire, 24 volt, smoke detectors on a D (Class A) or Style B (Class B) circuit. is a standard-sized dual monitor module used to and supervise two independent two-wire Style B B) dry-contact initiating device circuits (IDCs) at two consecutive addresses in intelligent, two-wire sys- is a communication protocol developed by Engineering that greatly increases the speed of com- between analog intelligent devices. Intelligent communicate in a grouped fashion. If one of the within the group has new information, the panel CPU the group poll and concentrates on single points. The effect is response speed greater than five times that of communication protocols. Monitor Module Built-in type identification automatically identifies this device a monitor module to the control panel. Powered directly by two-wire SLC loop. No additional required. High noise (EMF/RFI) immunity. SEMS screws with clamping plates for ease of wiring. Direct-dial entry of address: 01 159 on MS-9600 series 01 99 on other compatible systems. LED flashes during normal operation and latches on steady indicate alarm. MMF-300(A) Monitor Module is intended for use in intelli- two-wire systems, where the individual address of each is selected using the built-in rotary switches. It pro- either a two-wire or four-wire fault-tolerant Initiating Circuit (IDC) for normally-open-contact fire alarm and devices. The module has a panel-controlled LED The MMF-300(A) can be used to replace M300(A) in existing systems. APPLICATIONS to monitor a zone of four-wire smoke detectors, manual alarm pull stations, waterflow devices, or other normally- dry-contact alarm activation devices. May also be used monitor normally-open supervisory devices with special E-325 Devices (Type H) indication at the control panel. Monitored circuit be wired as an NFPA Style B (Class B) or Style D (Class Initiating Device Circuit. A 47K Ohm End-of-Line Resistor terminates the Style B circuit. No resistor is required supervision of the Style D circuit. OPERATION MMF-300(A) uses one of available module on an SLC loop. It responds to regular polls from control panel and reports its type and the status (open/nor- of its Initiating Device Circuit (IDC). A flashing LED that the module is in communication with the control The LED latches steady on alarm (subject to current on the loop). SPECIFICATIONS operating voltage: 15 to 32 VDC. current draw: 5.0 mA (LED on). operating current: 375 (LED flashing), 1 com- every 5 seconds, 47k EOL. IDC wiring resistance: 1500 Ohms. IDC Voltage: 11 Volts. resistance: 47K Ohms. range: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 range: 10% to 93% noncondensing. 4.5″ (11.43 cm) high x 4″ (10.16 cm) wide x (3.175 cm) deep. Mounts to a 4″ (10.16 cm) square x (5.398 cm) deep box. Mini Monitor Module Built-in type identification automatically identifies this device a monitor module to the panel. Powered directly by two-wire SLC loop. No additional required.

I FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Ten Input Monitor Module Operating Voltage: Current: Current: Range: Gauge: IDC Wiring Resistance: IDC Voltage: IDC Current: 15-32 VDC 3.5 mA 55 mA (assumes all six LEDs solid on) 32 to 120 (0 to 49 10 to 93% Non-condensing 6.8 x 5.8 x 1.25 CH-6 Chassis; BB-6 Cabinet; BB-2 Cabinet 12-18 AWG 1500 Ohms 12 VDC 1 mA INSTALLINg information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to appropriate Fire control panel installation manual for detailed sys- information. If the modules will be installed in an existing operational inform the operator and local authority that the system will be tempo- out of service. Disconnect the power to the control panel before install- the modules. This system contains static sensitive components. Always yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that charges are removed from the body. The module housing should also grounded. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. DESCRIPTION MMF-300-10 Ten Input Monitor Module is intended for use in an intel- alarm system. Each monitor module is intended to interface between a panel and normally open contact devices, such as pull stations. A com- SLC input is used for all modules, and the initiating device loops share common supervisory supply and ground. Otherwise, each monitor operates from the others. Each module has its own unique address. pair of rotary code switches is used to set the address of the first module 01 to 150. The remaining modules are automatically assigned to the next higher addresses. Provisions are included for disabling a maximum of unused modules to release the addresses to be used elsewhere. Each mod- also has panel controlled green LED indicators. The panel can cause the to blink, latch on, or latch off. 1 x 4 Terminal Blocks (2) 11/4 Stand offs (2) Nuts Machine Screws (3) Shunts 47k Ohm End of Line Resistors in Class B position, remove shunt for Class A) on Board: Shunt in Class A/B position REQUIREMENTS ensure proper operation, this module shall be connected to a compatible system control panel (list available from Fire are descriptions of the MMF-300-10 mounting frameworks. There are mounting options for MMF-300-10 modules: Up to six MMF-300-10 modules can be installed on a CH-6 in cabinet One or two MMF-300-10 modules can be installed in a BB-2 cabinet used CH-6 chassis a cabinet. It accommodates up to six MMF-300-10 modules in a single row three modules wide and two modules deep. 1. CH-6 CHASSIS: mount MMF-300-10 modules BB-2 cabinet has a built-in chassis that will accommodate one or two modules. 2. BB-2 CABINET: front MMF-300-10 module positions of each chassis are offset below the MMF-300-10 module positions so that all of the status indicators are vis- BB-6 cabinet will house the CH-6 chassis with up to six MMF-300-10 mod- installed on it. Refer to cabinet installation documents for dimensions. BB-2 cabinet houses one or two MMF-300-10 modules on the internal that is part of the cabinet. Refer to cabinet installation documents for STEPS Cabinet Mounting In a clean, dry area, mount the backbox using the four holes provided in back surface of the cabinet (Figure 3). Chassis Installation The CH-6 chassis is mounted in the BB-6. It is shipped with two self-

MMF-300-10(A) Monitor Module MMF-300-10 ten-input monitor module is an interface a control panel and normally open contact devices intelligent alarm systems such as pull stations, security or flow switches. first address on the MMF-300-10 is set from 01 to 150 the remaining modules are automatically assigned to the nine higher addresses. Provisions are included for dis- a maximum of two unused addresses. supervised state (normal, open, or short) of the moni- device is sent back to the panel. A common SLC input used for all modules, and the initiating device loops share a supervisory supply and ground otherwise each operates independently from the others. MMF-300-10 module has panel-controlled green LED The panel can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, latch off. Unless otherwise specified, the term MMF-300-10 is used this data sheet to refer to both the MMF-300-10 and the MMF- (ULC-listed version). Listed to UL Standard 864, 9th edition. Ten addressable Class B or five addressable Class A initi- device circuits. Removable 12 AWG (3.25 mm to 18 AWG (0.9 mm terminal blocks. Status indicators for each point. Unused addresses may be disabled. Rotary address switches. Class A or Class B operation. Flexible mounting options. Mounting hardware included. current: 3.5 mA (SLC current draw with all used; if some addresses are disabled, the current decreases). current: 55 mA (assumes all ten LEDs solid ON). range: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 for UL to +55 for EN54 applications. 10% to 85% noncondensing for UL applications; to 93% noncondensing for EN54 applications. 6.8″ (172.72 mm) high x 5.8″ (147.32 mm) x 1.25″ (31.75 mm) deep. weight: 0.76 lb. (0.345 kg) including packaging. (cid:129) E-900 Devices options: CHS-6 chassis: Up to 6 modules. BB-6F cabinet: Up to 6 modules. BB-2F cabinet: One or two modules. gauge: 12 AWG (3.25 mm to 18 AWG (0.9 mm circuits must employ type FPL, FPLR, or cable as required by Article 760 of the NEC. is shipped in Class B position; remove shunt Class A operation. SLC wiring resistance: 40 or 50 ohms, panel IDC wiring resistance: 1500 ohms. IDC voltage: 10.2 VDC. IDC current: 240 05/15/2009 Page 1 of 2 Listings and Approvals listings and approvals below apply to the MMF-300- Monitor Module. In some cases, certain mod- or applications may not be listed by certain approval or listing may be in process. Consult factory for lat- listing status. UL Listed: S2424 ULC Listed: S2424 CSFM approved: 7300-0075:205 FM approved MEA approved: 55-02-E Line Information Ten-input monitor module. Same as above with ULC Listing. Optional cabinet for one or two modules. Dimen- DOOR: 9.234″ (23.454 cm) wide (9.484″ [24.089 cm] hinges), x 12.218″ (31.0337 cm) high, x 0.672″ cm) deep; BACKBOX: 9.0″ (22.860 cm) wide (9.25″ cm] including hinges), x 12.0″ (30.480 cm) high x (6.985 cm); CHASSIS (installed): 7.150″ (18.161 cm) overall x 7.312″ (18.5725 cm) high interior overall x (5.4762 cm) deep overall. Optional cabinet for up to six modules mounted on chassis (below). Dimensions, DOOR: 24.0″ (60.96 wide x 12.632″ (32.0852 cm) high, x 1.25″ (3.175 cm) hinged at bottom; BACKBOX: 24.0″ (60.96 cm) wide x (31.877 cm) high x 5.218″ (13.2537 cm) deep. Chassis, mounts up to six modules in BB-6F. Alarms and System Sensor are registered trademarks of International Inc. Microsoft and Windows are registered of the Microsoft Corporation. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use this document is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate.

installation and Maintenance instructions Monitor Module FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 Operating Voltage: Operating Current: resistance: IDC Resistance: IDC Voltage: IDC Current: Range: length: VDC (group poll); 350 (direct poll); 600 Maximum (Communicating, IDC Shorted) ohms Ohms Volts to 120 F (0 to 49 C) to 93% Non-condensing H x 2.75 W x 0.65 D minimum installing information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to control panel installation manual for detailed system information. If the will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the opera- and local authority that the system will be temporarily out of service. Dis- power to the control panel before installing the modules. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. description MMF-301 monitor module can be installed in a single gang junction box behind the monitored unit. Its small size and light weight allow it to installed without rigid mounting (see Figure 1). The MMF-301 is intended use in intelligent, two-wire systems where the individual address of each is selected using rotary switches. It provides a two-wire initiating cir- for normally open contact fire alarm and security devices. This module be used to replace an M301 module in existing systems. requireMents ensure proper operation, this module should only be connected to listed system control panels only. 1: and Wiring This module is intended to be wired and mounted without rigid con- inside a standard electrical box. All wiring must conform to appli- local codes, ordinances, and regulations. Connect the red (+) and black (-) wires to the positive and negative loop leads of the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). Connect the violet (+) and yellow (-) wires to a two-wire, normally open loop. the specified EOL resistor value to terminate the initiating loop. the address on the module per job drawings. the module in the desired mounting location. 2. typical 2-Wire style B initiating device circuit conFiguration: LISTED LINE CIRCUIT (SLC) WIRING IS AND LIMITED 1 ( EOL FireLite Alarms Inc.

I Operating Voltage: Operating Current: resistance: IDC Resistance: IDC Voltage: IDC Current: Range: length: Monitor Module Instructions VDC (group poll); 350 (direct poll); 600 Max. (Communicating, IDC Shorted) ohms Ohms Volts to 120 F (0 to 49 C) to 93% non-condensing H x 2.75 W x 0.5 D minimum Installing information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to the control panel installation manual for detailed system If the modules will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the operator and local authority that the system be temporarily out of service. Disconnect power to the control panel before installing the modules. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. Description MMF-301 monitor module can be installed in a single gang junction box directly behind the monitored unit. Its small size and light allow it to be installed without rigid mounting (see Figure 1). The MMF-301 is intended for use in intelligent, two-wire systems the individual address of each module is selected using rotary switches. It provides a two-wire initiating circuit for normally contact fire alarm and security devices. This module can be used to replace an M301 module in existing systems. Requirements ensure proper operation, this module should only be connected to listed compatible system control panels only. and Wiring This module is intended to be wired and mounted without rigid connections inside a standard electrical box. All wiring must to applicable local codes, ordinances, and regulations. Connect the red (+) and black (-) wires to the positive and negative loop power leads of the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). Connect the violet (+) and yellow (-) wires to a two-wire, normally open initiating loop. Install the specified EOL resistor value to terminate the initiating loop. Set the address on the module per job drawings. NOTE: Some panels support extended addressing. In order to set the module above address 99 on compatible systems, carefully the stop on the upper rotary switch with thumb in the direction shown in Figure 1. Install the module in the desired mounting location. 1: 2. Typical 2-wire style B Initiating Circuit (IDC) configuration: LISTED Control Panel LINE CIRCUIT (SLC) WIRING SHOWN IS SUPERVISED POWER LIMITED 0 EOL Fire Alarms, Inc., One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 06472, 203-484-7161

InstallatIon anD maIntenance InstructIons Interface module to 32 VDC (LED on) (LED flashing) ohms Ohms Operating Voltage: Current Draw: Operating Current: Resistance: IDC Resistance: Supply Voltage (between Terminals T10 and T11) Range: DC Voltage: Voltage: VDC power limited Volts RMS maximum per module to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Non-condensing H 4 W 11 D (Mounts to a 4 square by 21 deep box.) Electrical Box FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 InstallIng information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to control panel installation manual for detailed system information. If the will be installed in an existing operational system, inform the opera- and local authority that the system will be temporarily out of service. Dis- power to the control panel before installing the modules. This manual should be left with the owner/user of this equipment. DescrIptIon MMF-302 Interface Module is intended for use in addressable two-wire where the individual address of each module is selected using the rotary switches. This module allows addressable panels to interface monitor two-wire conventional smoke detectors. It transmits the status open, or alarm) of one full zone of conventional detectors back to control panel. All two-wire detectors being monitored must be UL compat- with this module. The MMF-302 has a panel controlled LED indicator and be used to replace an M302 module in existing systems. requIrements ensure proper operation, these modules shall be connected to listed com- system control panels only. In addition, please refer to Fire-Lite Device document number 15384 for the list of compatible detectors. 1. controls anD InDIcators: MMF-302 mounts directly to 4-inch square electrical boxes (see Figure 2). box must have a minimum depth of 21 inches. Surface mounted electri- boxes (SMB500) are available. All wiring must conform to applicable local codes, ordinances, and This module is intended for power-limited wiring only. Install module wiring in accordance with the job drawings and appropri- wiring diagrams. the address on the module per job drawings. Secure module to electrical box (supplied by installer), as shown in 2. 2. moDule mountIng: 3. Interface tWo-WIre conventIonal Detectors, nfpa style B (class B): BRANCH CIRCUIT TO THE INTERFACE MUST BE EXTERNALLY TO RESET THE A RELAY CONTROL CAN BE USED TO SWITCH FROM A STANDARD POWER (SEE FIGURE 5). NEXT INTERFACE MODULE SUPPLY AND LOOP. NEXT BATTERY-BACKUP SWITCHED DC POWER SUPPLY EOL NOT LOOP WIRE UNDER TERMINALS. BREAK ALL WIRE RUN TO PROVIDE SUPERVISION OF CONNECTIONS. DETECTORS MUST UL LISTED COMPATIBLE WITH MODULE. INSTALL DETECTORS PER MANUFACTURER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS NOT MIX FIRE ALARM INITIATING, SUPERVISORY, SECURITY DEVICES ON THE SAME MODULE. ANY FAULT IN THE POWER SUPPLY IS LIMITED TO THAT AND DOES NOT RESULT IN A FAULT IN A SEPARATE ZONE. 4. Interface tWo-WIre conventIonal Detectors, nfpa style D (class a): TO THE INTERFACE MUST BE SWITCED TO THE DETECTORS. A CONTROL MODULE CAN USED TO SWITCH POWER A STANDARD POWER (SEE FIGURE 5). BRANCH CIRCUIT NEXT INTERFACE MODULE. SUPERVISES SUPPLY AND LOOP. NEXT OR OR LINE CIRCUIT (SLC) VDC MAX. PAIR RECOMMENDED MODULES TO COMPATIBLE PANELS ONLY. WIRING MUST POWER LIMITED. LINE CIRC

No text preview available.

I FireLite Place CT 06472 203.484.7161 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRuCTIONS Six Zone Interface Module Operating Voltage: Current: Current: Range: Gauge: IDC Wiring Resistance: Power Supply Voltage: Voltage: (supervised and power limited) DC Voltage: Frequency: Current: VDC mA mA (assumes all six LEDs solid on) to 120 (0 to 49 to 93% Non-condensing x 5.8 x 1.25 Chassis; BB-6 Cabinet; BB-2 Cabinet AWG Ohms 24VDC volts RMS maximum volts power limited per circuit INSTALLING information is included as a quick reference installation guide. Refer to appropriate Fire control panel installation manual for detailed sys- information. If the modules will be installed in an existing operational inform the operator and local authority that the system will be tempo- out of service. Disconnect the power to the control panel before install- the modules. This system contains static sensitive components. Always yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that charges are removed from the body. The module housing should also grounded. This manual should be left with the owner/user of the equipment. DESCRIPTION MMF-302-6 Six Zone Interface Module is intended for use in an intelli- alarm system. Each module provides an interface between the intelligent system and a conventional alarm system loop. A common SLC input is for all modules, and the initiating device loops share a common super- supply and ground. Otherwise, each monitor operates independently the others. Each module has its own unique address. pair of rotary code switches is used to set the address of the first module 01 to 154. The remaining modules are automatically assigned to the next higher addresses. Provisions are included for disabling a maximum of two modules to release the addresses to be used elsewhere. Each mod- also has panel controlled bicolor LED indicators. The panel can cause the to blink, latch on, or latch off. TwO-wIRE SySTEM SENSOR SMOkE DETECTORS FOR uSE wITh MMF-302-6 wITh ZONE A IDENTIFIER MODEL DET. B401B B401 B401B,B401 B401B DETECTOR DET. MODEL COMP. ID 1151 1451 1451DH 2151 2451 2451TH 5451 1100 1400 2100AT 2100B 2100D 2100S 2100TB 2100TD 2100TS 2300B 2300TB 2400 2400TH 2W-B 2W-TB DH100LP Class B, Style B Only No Accessory will be supported by 2100AT SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR 1 x 4 Terminal Blocks (2) 11/4 Stand offs (3) Shunts Machine Screws (2) Nuts (1) Long Power Supply Jumper STEPS Cabinet Mounting Chassis Installation In a clean, dry area, mount the backbox using the four holes provided in back surface of the cabinet (Figure 3). The CH-6 chassis is mounted in the BB-6 cabinet. It is attached to the PEM studs on the back wall of the cabinet with two 8-32 hex nuts. hex nuts are included with the chassis (Figure 4). 3. TyPICAL MOuNTING hOLE LOCATIONS: 3.9k Ohm of Line Resistors on Board: Shunts in Class A/B position (Shipped in Class B position, remove shunts for Class A) REQuIREMENTS ensure proper operation, this module shall be connected to a compatible system control panel (list available from Fire Contact System for a current list of compatible detectors. are descriptions of the MMF-302-6 mounting frameworks. There

MMF-302-6(A) Interface Module MMF-302-6 six-zone interface module provides an between the intelligent alarm system and a two-wire detection zone. A common SLC input is used for modules, and the initiating device circuits share a common supervisory supply and ground. Otherwise, each operates independently from the others. first module is addressed from 01 to 154 while the remain- modules are automatically assigned to the next five higher Provisions are included for disabling a maximum of unused modules. All two-wire detectors being monitored be two-wire-compatibility-listed with the modules. The transmits the status of a zone of two-wire detec- to the fire alarm control panel. Status conditions are as normal, open, or alarm. The interface module the zone of detectors and the connection of the power supply. MMF-302-6 module has panel-controlled bicolor LED The panel can cause the LEDs to blink, latch on, or off. Six addressable Class B or three addressable Class A initi- Removable 12 AWG (3.1 mm to 18 AWG (0.78 mm plug- device circuits. terminal blocks. Status indicators for each point. Unused addresses may be disabled. Rotary address switches. Class A or Class B operation. LiteSpeed or CLIP operation. Mount one or two modules in a BB-2F cabinet (optional). Mount up to six modules on a CH-6 chassis in a BB-6F cab- (optional). Mounting hardware included. current: 2.0 mA (SLC current draw with all used; if some addresses are disabled, the standby decreases). current: 40 mA (assumes all six LEDs solid ON). range: 32 to 120 (0 to 49 10% to 85% noncondensing. 6.8″ (172.72 mm) high x 5.8″ (147.32 mm) wide 1.25″ (31.75 mm) deep. weight: 1.1 lb. (0.499 kg) including packaging. options: BB-2F cabinet or BB-6F cabinet with CH- chassis. gauge: 12 AWG (3.1 mm to 18 AWG (0.78 mm is shipped in Class B position: Remove shunt Class A operation. SLC wiring resistance: 40 or 50 ohms, panel (cid:129) E-910 Devices IDC wiring resistance: 25 ohms. supply voltage: DC voltage: 18 28 volts power- Ripple voltage: 0.1 Vrms maximum. External supply 90 mA maximum per address in alarm. In Class B 540 mA maximum for all six addresses in alarm. In A operation, 270 mA maximum for all three addresses in detectors: See the Device Compatibility Docu- Listings and Approvals listings and approvals apply to the modules specified in document. In some cases, certain modules or applications not be listed by certain approval agencies, or listing may in process. Consult factory for latest listing status. UL Listed: S2424. ULC Listed: S2424 (MMF-302-6A). MEA Listed: 385-02-E. CSFM: 7300-0075:0185. FM Approved. Line Information Six-zone conventional-detector interface module. Same as above with ULC Listing. Optional cabinet for one or two modules. Dimensions, 9.234″ (23.454 cm) wide (9.484″ [24.089 cm] including x 12.218″ (31.0337 cm) high, x 0.672″ (1.7068 cm) BACKBOX: 9.0″ (22.860 cm) wide (9.25″ [23.495 cm] hinges), x 12.0″ (30.480 cm) high x 2.75″ (6.985 cm); (installed): 7.150″ (18.161 cm) wide overall x 7.312″ 09/28/2013 Page 1 of 2 cm) high interior overall x 2.156″ (5.4762 cm) deep Optional cabinet for up to six modules mounted on chassis (below). Dimensions, DOOR: 24.0″ (60.96 cm) x 12.632″ (32.0852 cm) high, x 1.25″ (3.175 cm) deep, at bottom; BACKBOX: 24.0″ (60.96 cm) wide x 12.550″ cm) high x 5.218″ (13.2537 cm) deep. Chassis, mounts up to six modules in a BB-6F cabinet. and LiteSpeed are registered trademarks of Honeywell Inc. by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use this document is strictly prohibited. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to keep our product information up-to-date and accurate. cannot cover all specifi

12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 Manual Alarm Control Panel Document 15440 6/6/96 Rev: G 15440:G ECN 96-200 Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Further- all types of smoke detectors – both ionization and photoelectric types, have limitations.

www.firelite.com popular MiniPanel Series consists of the MP-12 MP-24, 12-volt and 24-volt, two-zone, Class B, Fire Alarm Panels. Compact and economical, the MiniPanels of- a variety of option modules designed to meet many low- applications, including NFPA 72, Local and Remote Sta- Fire Alarm Systems. Device Circuits (IDCs) Two Style B (Class B). Economical two-zone, non-expandable construction. Two-wire smoke detector compatibility. Meets the requirements of NFPA 72 (Local and Remote Appliance Circuit (NACs) Single Style Y (Class B) NAC. and Batteries 0.75 A (MP-24) and 1.0 A (MP-12) of notification appliance 12- or 24-volt models. Regulated DC power output rated @ 100 mA. battery charger. Low current drain of panel minimizes battery ampere-hour Power-limited per UL requirements. Can be used with power-limited cable. Battery/earth fault supervision. Built-in brownout circuitry. Built-in surge suppression. 230 VAC, 50 Hz international version available ( MP-24E). Circuit Monitors Open detector loop(s). Low battery voltage. Missing or disconnected battery. Ground fault. Low AC voltage (brownout). Loss of AC power. Normal switch position. Open or shorted Notification Appliance (bell) Circuit (NAC). Compact size: 9.500″ (24.130 cm) wide x 10.625″ (26.988 high x 4.875″ (12.383 cm) deep. AND INDICATORS AND INDICATORS AND INDICATORS AND INDICATORS AND INDICATORS Indicators A.C. POWER ALARM per zone. SYSTEM TROUBLE 21, 2003 (cid:127) A2-100 Class B Class B Class B Class B Class B Alarm Control P Alarm Control P Alarm Control Panels Alarm Control P Alarm Control P Conventional MP-24) Fire MP-24) Switch Control for control and detectors. Silence with resound. to silence alarm. LINE INFORMATION LINE INFORMATION LINE INFORMATION LINE INFORMATION LINE INFORMATION 12-volt Fire Alarm Control Panel. 24-volt Fire Alarm Control Panel. as above, with 230 VAC, 50 Hz transformer Listed). Relay module, 12-volt, two Form-C auxiliary Alarm Relay module, 24-volt, two Form-C auxiliary Alarm module, 12-volt, two Form-C auxiliary Alarm Trouble contacts. module, 24-volt, two Form-C auxiliary Alarm Trouble contacts. module, 12-volt, Remote Station out- Alarm only. module, 24-volt, Remote Station out- Alarm only. Transmitter module, 12-volt, Remote Station out- Transmitter module, 24-volt, Remote Station out- Alarm and Trouble. Alarm and Trouble. document is not intended to be used for installation purposes. We try to our product information up-to-date and accurate. We cannot cover all applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are sub- to change without notice. For more information, contact Fire(cid:127)Lite Alarms , Fire-Lite Place, Northford, Connecticut 06472. Phone: (800) 627-3473, FAX: (877) 699-4105. in the U.S.A. 10/21/03 Page 1 of 2 TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL YOUR PROTECTION: use two-wire detectors have been Listed by Laboratories Inc. use with this control panel. a list of compatible UL-Listed detectors, please refer to Device Compatibility #15384 for this control only ONE per control

12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 Manual Alarm Control Panel Document 15440 6/6/96 Rev: G 15440:G ECN 96-200 Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Further- all types of smoke detectors – both ionization and photoelectric types, have limitations.

12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 Manual Alarm Control Panel Document 15440 6/6/96 Rev: G 15440:G ECN 96-200 Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Further- all types of smoke detectors – both ionization and photoelectric types, have limitations.

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:1)(cid:2)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:7)(cid:4)(cid:8)(cid:6)(cid:2)(cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:11) (cid:3)(cid:14)!(cid:4)(cid:4)(cid:5) (cid:18)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:7)(cid:3)(cid:18)(cid:25)(cid:29)(cid:4)(cid:26)(cid:25)(cid:29)(cid:4)(cid:30)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:3)(cid:17)(cid:3)(cid:7) (cid:6)”(cid:3)(cid:10)(cid:4)(cid:19)(cid:7)(cid:9)(cid:26)(cid:4)(cid:25)(cid:4)(cid:31)(cid:9)(cid:18)(cid:13)(cid:25) (cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:14)(cid:9)(cid:11)(cid:7)(cid:12)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:9)(cid:19)(cid:4)#$ (cid:4)(cid:13)(cid:9)(cid:4)(cid:25)(cid:27)(cid:27)(cid:7)(cid:9)(cid:27)(cid:7)(cid:6)(cid:24) (cid:2)(cid:13)(cid:24)(cid:3)(cid:26)(cid:6)(cid:13)(cid:13)(cid:6)(cid:17) (cid:4)(cid:10)(cid:6)(cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:3)(cid:4)*+)(cid:21),(cid:4)(cid:28)(cid:2)(cid:6)(cid:12)(cid:2) (cid:13)(cid:2)(cid:3)(cid:4) (cid:7)(cid:3)(cid:18)(cid:25)(cid:29)(cid:4) (cid:12)(cid:9)(cid:6)(cid:18)(cid:4) (cid:6)(cid:14)(cid:4) (cid:3)(cid:17)(cid:3)(cid:7) (cid:6)”(cid:3)(cid:10)!(cid:4) (cid:4) -(cid:3)(cid:18)(cid:25)(cid:29)(cid:14)(cid:4) (cid:26)(cid:25)(cid:29)(cid:4) (cid:30)(cid:3) (cid:25)(cid:27)(cid:25)(cid:7)(cid:13)/(cid:4) (cid:19)(cid:7)(cid:9)(cid:26)(cid:4) (cid:25)(cid:4) (cid:14)(cid:13)(cid:25)(cid:17)(cid:10)(cid:25)(cid:7)(cid:10)(cid:4) (cid:19)(cid:9)(cid:11)(cid:7)(cid:24)(cid:26)(cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:11)(cid:18)(cid:3)(cid:4) (cid:25)(cid:14)(cid:14)(cid:3)(cid:26)(cid:30)(cid:18)(cid:29) (cid:3)(cid:17)(cid:3)(cid:7)(cid:25)(cid:18)(cid:4)(cid:27)(cid:11)(cid:7)(cid:27)(cid:9)(cid:14)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:14)(cid:28)(cid:6)(cid:13)(cid:12)(cid:2)(cid:6)(cid:17) !

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

The MRP-4424 Release Control Panel Clintonville Road, Northford CT 06472 15180 D 96-433 Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Further- all types of smoke detectors – both ionization and photoelectric types, have limitations. No type of smoke detector can sense every

No text preview available.

MRP-2001C – Preaction Control Panel MRP-2001C is a six-zone FACP for single and dual haz- deluge and preaction applications. The MRP-2001C pro- reliable fire detection, signaling and protection for industrial and institutional buildings requiring releasing. The MRP-2001C is compatible with Sensor i3 detectors which are conventional smoke that can transmit a maintenance trouble signal to the indicating the need for cleaning and a supervisory signal when the ambient temperature falls below the rating of approximately 7.22 In addition, the control is compatible with conventional input devices such as smoke detectors, four-wire smoke detectors, pull sta- waterflow devices, tamper switches and other normally- contact devices. Refer to the Fire Device Compati- Document for a complete listing of compatible devices. outputs are programmable as NACs (Notification Appli- Circuits) or releasing circuits. Three programmable relays (factory programmed for Alarm, Trouble and and 24 VDC special application resettable and power outputs are also included on the main board. The MRP-2001C supervises all wiring, AC volt- battery charger and battery level. of a compatible smoke detector or any normally- fire alarm initiating device will activate audible and visual devices, illuminate an indicator, display alarm infor- on the panel LCD, sound the piezo sounder at the activate the FACP alarm relay and operate an optional used to notify a remote station or initiate an auxiliary function. Listed to Standard ULC-S527-11. FM Approved. Designed for sprinkler standards NFPA 13, 15, and 16. Dual hazard operation. Adjustable waterflow discharge timer and two soak timers. Cross-zone (double-interlock) capability. Six programmable Style B (Class B) IDCs (Initiating Device System Sensor i3 series detectors compatible. Four programmable Style Y (Class B) output circuits – (spe- application power). Strobe Synchronization: System Sensor Wheelock Gentex Faraday Amseco Three programmable Form-C relays. 7.0 amps total 24 VDC output current. Resettable and non-resettable output power. Built-in Programmer. DF-60441:B2 Control Panels ANN-BUS for connection to optional devices (one or 2 of of the following): ANN-80C Remote LCD Indicator ANN-I/O LED Driver ANN-S/PG Printer Module ANN-RLY Relay Module ANN-LED Annunciator Module (built-in) 80-character LCD display (backlit). Real-time clock/calendar with daylight savings time control. History log with 256 event storage. Piezo sounder for alarm, trouble, and supervisory. 24 volt DC operation. Low AC voltage sense. Outputs Programmable for: Releasing circuits or NACS NACs programmable for: Silence Inhibit Strobe Synchronization Selective Silence (horn-strobe mute) Temporal or Steady Signal Silenceable or Non-silenceable Release Stage Sounder Disable/Enable control per input zone and output zone. Extensive transient protection. Automatic battery charger with charger supervision. Supplied Dress Panel DP-51050 (red). Optional Trim Ring TR-CE (red) for semi-flush mounting the 8/31/2016 Page 1 of 4 Optional CAC-5X Class A Converter Module for Outputs IDCs. Optional 4XTMF Municipal Box Transmitter Module. Optional Digital Alarm Communicators 411UD, 411UDAC). Optional ANN-SEC card for a secondary ANN-BUS. AND SOFTWARE: Custom English labels (per point) may be manually entered selected from an internal library file. Three programmable Form-C relay outputs. Pre-programmed and custom application templates. Continuous fire protection during online programming at the panel.

MRP-2001(E) – Preaction Control Panel MRP-2001 is a six-zone FACP for single and dual hazard and preaction applications. The MRP-2001 provides fire detection, signaling and protection for commercial, and institutional buildings requiring water-based The MRP-2001 is compatible with System Sensor detectors which are conventional smoke detectors that can a maintenance trouble signal to the FACP indicating need for cleaning and a supervisory signal when ambient temperature falls below the detector rating of 45 (7.22 In addition, the control panel is with conventional input devices such as two-wire detectors, four-wire smoke detectors, pull stations, devices, tamper switches and other normally-open devices. Refer to the Fire Device Compatibility for a complete listing of compatible devices. outputs are programmable as NACs (Notification Appli- Circuits) or releasing circuits. Three programmable relays (factory programmed for Alarm, Trouble and and 24 VDC special application resettable and power outputs are also included on the main board. The MRP-2001 supervises all wiring, AC voltage, charger and battery level. of a compatible smoke detector or any normally- fire alarm initiating device will activate audible and visual devices, illuminate an indicator, display alarm infor- on the panel LCD, sound the piezo sounder at the activate the FACP alarm relay and operate an optional used to notify a remote station or initiate an auxiliary function. MRP-2001E offers the same features as the MRP-2001 allows connection to 240 VAC. Unless otherwise specified, information in this data sheet applies to both the 120 VAC 240 VAC versions of the panels. Listed to UL Standard 864, 9th edition. FM Approved. Designed for sprinkler standards NFPA 13, 15 and 16. Dual hazard operation. Adjustable waterflow discharge timer and two soak timers. Cross-zone (double-interlock) capability. Six programmable Style B (Class B) IDCs (Initiating Device System Sensor i3 series detectors compatible. Four programmable Style Y (Class B) output circuits – (spe- application power). Strobe Synchronization: System Sensor Wheelock Gentex Faraday Amseco Three programmable Form-C relays. 7.0 amps total 24 VDC output current. Resettable and non-resettable output power. A2-300 Built-in Programmer. ANN-BUS for connection to optional devices (up to 8 total of of the following): ANN-80 Remote LCD Annunciator ANN-I/O LED Driver ANN-S/PG Printer Module ANN-RLY Relay Module ANN-LED Annunciator Module 80-character LCD display (backlit). Real-time clock/calendar with daylight savings time control. History log with 256 event storage. Piezo sounder for alarm, trouble and supervisory. 24 volt DC operation. Low AC voltage sense. Outputs Programmable for: Releasing circuits or NACS NACs programmable for: Silence Inhibit Auto-Silence Strobe Synchronization Selective Silence (horn-strobe mute) Temporal or Steady Signal Silenceable or Non-silenceable Release Stage Sounder Disable/Enable control per input zone and output zone. Extensive transient protection. Automatic battery charger with charger supervision. Optional Dress Panel DP-51050 (red). Optional Trim Ring TR-CE (red) for semi-flush mounting the Optional CAC-5X Class A Converter Module for Outputs IDCs. 12/18/12 Page 1 of 4 Standby Current: 4 mA. to the Fire Device Compatibility Document for listed devices. Appliance and Releasing Circuit(s) – TB5 and Four Output Circuits. Style Y (Class B) or Style Z (Class A) with opt

No text preview available.

MRP-2002(E) Release Control Panel MRP-2002 is a six-zone FACP for single and dual hazard releasing applications. The MRP-2002 provides reliable detection, signaling and protection for commercial, indus- and institutional buildings requiring agent-based releasing. MRP-2002 is compatible with System Sensor i3 detec- which are conventional smoke detectors that can transmit maintenance trouble signal to the FACP indicating the need cleaning and a supervisory signal when the ambi- temperature falls below the detector rating of approxi- 45 (7.22 In addition, the control panel is with conventional input devices such as two-wire detectors, four-wire smoke detectors, pull stations, devices, tamper switches and other normally-open devices. Refer to the Fire Device Compatibility for a complete listing of compatible devices. outputs are programmable as NACs (Notification Appli- Circuits) or releasing circuits. Three programmable relays (factory programmed for Alarm, Trouble and and 24 VDC special application resettable and power outputs are also included on the main board. The MRP-2002 supervises all wiring, AC voltage, charger and battery level. of a compatible smoke detector or any normally- fire alarm initiating device will activate audible and visual devices, illuminate an indicator, display alarm infor- on the panel LCD, sound the piezo sounder at the activate the FACP alarm relay and operate an optional used to notify a remote station or initiate an auxiliary function. MRP-2002E offers the same features as the MRP-2002 allows connection to 220/240 VAC. Unless otherwise spec- the information in this data sheet applies to both the 110/ VAC and 220/240 VAC versions of the panels. Listed to UL Standard 864, 9th edition. FM Approved. Designed for agent releasing standards NFPA 12, 12A, Meets International Building Code (IBC) seismic require- and 2001. Disable/Enable control per input zone and output zone. Extensive transient protection. Dual hazard operation. Adjustable pre-discharge, discharge and waterflow delay Cross-zone (double-interlock) capability. Six programmable Style B (Class B) IDCs (Initiating Device System Sensor i3 series detector compatible. Four programmable Style Y (Class B) output circuits – (spe- application power). Strobe synchronization: System Sensor Wheelock A2-350 Control Panels Gentex Faraday Amseco Three programmable Form-C relays. 7.0 amps total 24 VDC output current. Resettable and non-resettable output power. Built-in Programmer. ANN-BUS connector (up to 8 total of any of the following): ANN-80 Remote LCD Annunciator ANN-I/O LED Driver ANN-S/PG Printer Modules ANN-RLY Relay Module ANN-LED Annunciator Module communication with optional 80-character LCD display (backlit). Real-time clock/calendar with daylight savings time control. History log with 256 event storage. Piezo sounder for alarm, trouble and supervisory. 24 volt operation. Low AC voltage sense. Outputs Programmable for: Releasing Circuits or NACS NACs programmable for: Silence Inhibit Auto-Silence Strobe Synchronization Selective Silence (horn-strobe mute) Temporal or Steady Signal Silenceable or Non-silenceable Release Stage Sounder Automatic battery charger with charger supervision. 8/31/2016 Page 1 of 4 Optional Dress Panel DP-51050 (red). Optional Trim Ring TR-CE (red) for semi-flush mounting the Optional CAC-5X Class A Converter Module for Outputs Optional 4XTMF Municipal Box Transmitter Module. Optional Digital Alarm Communicators (411, 411UD, IDCs. Opti

(cid:14)(cid:15)(cid:16)(cid:17)(cid:9)(cid:5)(cid:12)(cid:18)(cid:9)(cid:12)(cid:6)(cid:6)(cid:13) (cid:21)!!(cid:22)!” (cid:21)!!(cid:22)!” (cid:1)(cid:2)(cid:3)(cid:4)(cid:5)(cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:5)(cid:7)(cid:8)(cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:11)(cid:4) (cid:5)(cid:6)(cid:4) (cid:7)(cid:4) (cid:8)(cid:9)(cid:10)(cid:11)(cid:12)(cid:13)(cid:14)(cid:15)(cid:4) (cid:16)(cid:17)(cid:3)(cid:18)(cid:14)(cid:4) (cid:19)(cid:3)(cid:13)(cid:3)(cid:7)(cid:6)(cid:3)(cid:4) (cid:20)(cid:12)(cid:18)(cid:14)(cid:21)(cid:12)(cid:13) (cid:4)(cid:12)(cid:28)(cid:4)(cid:12)(cid:25)(cid:14)(cid:5)(cid:12)(cid:18)(cid:6)(cid:4)(cid:27)(cid:3)(cid:6)(cid:5)(cid:17)(cid:18)(cid:3)(cid:27)(cid:4)(cid:14)(cid:12)(cid:4)(cid:24)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:14)(cid:4)(cid:24)(cid:12)(cid:6)(cid:14)(cid:4)(cid:4)(cid:13)(cid:12)(cid:30)(cid:10)

No text preview available.

No text preview available.

firealarmresources.com

No text preview available.

R Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 (203) 484-7161 FAX: (203) 484-7118

firealarmresources.com Device Connection (Typical) 3: Supervised Class B Operation Detection loop specifications Class B standby: 23VDC current: 15mA circuit current: 35mA current: 5mA resistor: 4.7k, 5% loop resistance: 200 ohms detector current: 2.0mA/Zone Smoke and ionization detectors requiring separate 24VDC can be powered from MCB-104 terminals 12 (+) & 13 (-). Use relay (SDLR-B) to supervise power circuit wiring. Detector loop current is sufficient to ensure operation of one detector per zone. Compatible, U.L. listed, 2-wire detectors available from Fire-Lite. Initiating devices include: Manual stations, heat detectors, smoke detectors, ionization detectors, waterflow alarm devices, manual stations. Use mechanical water motor gong if waterflow alarm devices are connected to the zone. Inhibit latching circuit by removing diode marked with a * from DZC-2 card if coded manual stations are connected. Compatible, U.L. listed, 2-wire detector available from Fire-Lite, include the following series: CP101, CP204, CP311, CP751, SD12T and SD32T. Bell Circuit 5 Modes of operation For non-disconnectable bells, remove jumper J3 but leave jumper J2. For disconnectable bells remove jumper J2 but leave jumper J3. For MTC bell signal, remove jumper J1. Select normally open or normally closed trouble contact by removing J4 or J5 respectively. Trouble contact is provided Terminals 1 and 2. It is rated 2 amps, 28 VDC. a) Connect signalling circuit as shown. Size wire for a maximum voltage drop of 2 VDC. Use polarized, U.L. listed, signalling devices with a minimum rated voltage range of 18 to 30 VDC. For bell power, connect terminal 7 (positive input CKT A), terminal 8 (positive input CKT B) of BCM-2 to terminal 10 & of MCB-104 respectively. Maximum bell load is 1.1 amps per CKT. current load on regulator (add last column) current should not exceed 0.75 amp. unfiltered, unregulated bell power = 2.2 amps total. Remove both jumpers in DZC-2 card(s) if optional module(s) employed. 2: Standby Battery Requirements Remove both jumpers in DZC-2 card(s) if optional module(s) employed. 3: Calculate Ampere-Hour

firealarmresources.com 1) U.L. listed, 2 wire detector from Fire-Lite, include the series: loop specifications Class B standby: 23VDC current: 15mA minimum. circuit current: .35MA current: 5mA of line resistor: 4.7k, 5% loop resistance: 200 ohms detector current: 2.0mA./Zone and ionization detectors requiring separate 24VDC can be powered MCB-104 terminal 12(+) & 13(-) . Use end of line relay (SDLR-B) supervise power circuit wiring. loop current is sufficient to ensure operation of one per zone. U.L. listed, 2 wire detector available from Fire-Lite. devices include: Manual station, heat detectors, smoke stations. mechanical water motor gong if waterflow alarm devices are connected the zone. latching circuit by removing diode marked with a * from DZC-2 if coded manual stations are connected. detectors, waterflow alarm devices, coded ) ) 5 ) REMOTE ZONE ANNUNCIATOR ALARM LEDS TROUBLE LED TROUBLE – 1 ) To connections are supervised for opens except sonalert. normally open connection flip Trouble silence switch off-normal (downward) position. Sonalert should sound. check connection between MCB terminal 14 & terminal 8 wire resistance is 100 ohms for all connections except to terminal 7 audible device will resound when trouble condition corrected. not exceed 5 ohms.

MS-4412B/MS-4424B FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Instructions – Only the GREEN A.C. POWER LED is on. other LEDs are off. KEY – The key to open the panel can be found at location. AUDIBLE DEVICES ARE SOUNDING AN ALARM Evacuate the protected area. your current status is. Notify the monitoring service and/or the Fire Department immediately. Tell them briefly what happened and Department Service If the Fire Department is responding, be prepared to provide directions to arriving firefighters. TROUBLE ONLY is happening. Notify the monitoring service and/or Fire Department if this panel is connected to either one, and tell them Silence audible devices by unlocking and opening the panel and pressing the TONE SILENCE switch. The SYSTEM TROUBLE LED will remain on. Contact authorized service personnel immediately! (See NOT ALLOW TROUBLE CONDITIONS TO REMAIN LOGGED IN THE SYSTEM. THE PROTECTION THE SYSTEM OFFERS HAS BEEN COMPROMISED, OR ELIMINATED WHEN A TROUBLE EXISTS. return to normal after an alarm- Do not enter the protected area until safe to do so. Clear all initiating devices. Smoke detectors will not reset if is still smoke in the area. Reset the control panel (PRESS the RESET switch). failure or brownout – AC power drops too low or fails, the POWER ON LED will go the SYSTEM TROUBLE LED will turn on and the panel and any other audible trouble devices will sound. authorized service personnel immediately. See below. Supervisory – Silence will silence the piezo and cause the supervisory to illuminate steadily. the event of trouble, contact the local Service Number:____________________ Activation (Fire Drill or otherwise) – Appliance Circuits can be activated by pressing ALARM ACTIVATE switch. You may want to disconnect the municipal box by the DISCONNECT switch, located on the module, to its DOWN position. Silencing – Appliance Circuits may be silenced by pressing ALARM SILENCE switch. The ALARM SILENCED LED turn on. Subsequent alarms will reactivate circuits. the RESET switch to clear the condition. The ALARM SILENCE switch may be disabled by switch selection (see manual). Test the Lamps – and hold the RESET switch and check all the LEDs. one should be on as long as the RESET switch is on. For more information, refer to the manual, P/N It is kept in the following location: AND POST THESE INSTRUCTIONS TO THE PANEL #15071 Rev. A 10/27/93

The MS-4412B/MS-4424B(E) ALARM CONTROL PANELS Clintonville Road, Northford CT 06472 15125 F1 97-192 Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Further- all types of smoke detectors – both ionization and photoelectric types, have limitations. No type of smoke detector can

The MS-4424 ALARM CONTROL PANEL Clintonville Road, Northford CT 06472 15153 F1 97-192 Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Further- all types of smoke detectors – both ionization and photoelectric types, have limitations. No type of smoke detector can sense every ki

D. CLASS A/CLASS B ZONE INSTALLATION (INITIATING ZONE MODULES) Initiating Zone Module provides up to 2 class A (style D), 4 class B (style B) or 1 class A and 2 class B of protection. This module accommodates both 2 and 4-wire smoke detectors, N.O. alarm initiating de- and N.O. or N.C. supervisory devices. Use any UL Listed N.O. or N.C. device not requiring power from Fire Control Panel such as pull stations, heat detectors, waterflow switches, etc. Use only those 2 and 4- smoke detectors which are listed in Table 2 in section II.C Of Specifications Each zone pro- enough current (2mA) to power up to 16 of the 2-wire detectors listed in that section. Before proceeding, the module jumpers for the desired zone configuration as shown in Figure 4. N.C. supervisory devices are not permitted for NFPA71-central station installations, but are for NFPA 72A-local installations. the first module into slot 2 of the main board and connect the ribbon cable to the connector shown on the of Connections Diagram (Figures 8, 9). Wire connections from initiating devices to this module are on the main terminal block.if used, the second module plugs into slot 3, with its ribbon cable plugged into Auxiliary Terminal Block Board as shown in the Summary of Connections Diagram. Wire connections to second module are made to the Auxiliary Terminal Block Board. wiring initiating devices, be sure that the maximum zone wire run resistance does not exceed 100 ohms both the MS4812 and the MS4824. Observe polarity when wiring 2-wire smoke detectors. Be sure that 2 and 4wire smoke detectors are wired to zones that will be programmed for alarm verification (other de- may not be programmed for alarm verification). 4. ZONE CONFIGURATIONS FOR INITIATING ZONE MODULES (Previous Page)* ADDRESSABLE SENSOR INSTALLATION (POLLING LOOP MODULES) Polling Loop module provides a supervised polling loop output for connection to addressable sensors. The loop provides power to sensors and serves as a communication path between the control panel and sensors. sensor is assigned a unique address ID number, set by an 8 position DIP switch, which is displayed at the key- console when annunciating the sensor status. Polling Loop module up to 55mA of current for sensors. Fill out the polling loop loading worksheet 3) to determine the maximum number of sensors that can be connected to a single loop. A second module be installed, which provides a second 55mA polling loop output, if additional sensors are required. Note that maximum number of sensors supported by the system is 88. Do not connect one polling loop output to the other loop output if two modules are used. first Polling Loop module is installed in slot 2 of the main board, and its ribbon cable plugs into the connector the main terminal block as shown in the Summary of Connections Diagram. The second module (if used) is in- in slot 3 of the main board with its ribbon cable connected to the connector on the Auxiliary Terminal Block as shown in the Summary of Connections diagram. installing sensors, be sure to assign unique ID numbers (from 9-96) using each sensor DIP switch. Do not the same number to more than one sensor. Refer to Table 4 in this section when setting DIP switches. Wire to the polling loop as shown in Figure 5. Observe the wire run length limitations listed in section II.C Loop module specifications. Sensors can be connected to a single wire run or groups of sensors can be to separate wire runs without affecting the Fire Control Panel ability to supervise individual sensors. sure to observe sensor polarity when wiring. Use of shielded wire or conduit reduces the maximum combined wire run length for multiple wire (f rom one Polling Loop Module) f rom 4000 f eet (1 200m) to 2000 feet (600m), independent of wire gauge. Installation and Connection using the RIZ-1 module, be sure that the maximum wire run resistance does not exceed 100 ohms. Wire ini- devices to the RIZ-1 zone as shown in Figure 5. Be sure that only 4- wire smoke detectors are wired to the if the zone will be programmed for alarm verification. The RIZ-1 mounts to any standard double gang electri- box using the four screws supplied with the module. using SDID, SDID-T, or CPID smoke detectors, or the BGID pull station, follow the instructions included these modules for proper installation. 3. POLLING LOOP LOADING WORKSHEET FACTO

An AC terminal block P/N 5012ATB is available for the MS-5012 Communicator backbox. The AC terminal block is manda- for Canadian versions and optional for all other versions of the The terminal block can only be used on the newer, (14.5″ x 12.5″ x 2.875″) backbox. It cannot be installed in older, smaller (12.0″ x 9.0″ x 2.75″) backbox. MS-5012 Terminal Block Installation Drawing 50491 Rev B 1/28/97 ECN 96-493 Make certain all power (AC and battery) is removed before any connections are made. Mount the optional AC terminal block to the lower left of the MS-5012 backbox using two supplied screws. Connect AC power wiring to the optional terminal block as shown in the illustration below. Connect the black and white wires (primary) from the MS-5012 system transformer to the optional terminal block as illus- below. (Make certain the black AC wire (Hot) is connected opposite the black transformer wire and the white AC wire is connected opposite the white transformer wire). Make certain that the yellow wires (secondary) from the MS-5012 system transformer are connected to Terminal Block TB1 in the lower left corner of the MS-5012 main circuit board. Install jumper between the terminal block and the backbox ground stud as illustrated below. This will be used to provide protection to the panel. (Make certain the jumper is connected opposite the green AC ground wire on the block). Install a solid earth ground connection to the backbox ground stud as illustrated below. This will be used to provide protection to the panel. Press the AC terminal cover firmly into place. Reapply AC and battery power to the MS-5012 Control Communicator. Main Circuit Board Backbox

Field Software Change 50194 Rev B 3/16/95 ECN 95-133 procedure outlines the mechanical installation steps required to install a PROM in the MS-5012. Change precautions for integrated circuits electricity can destroy integrated circuits (ICs)! To prevent damage to the PROM, a wrist strap and a PLCC IC insertion/extraction tool is highly recommended. The manufacturer cannot be responsible damage to the PROM as a result of improper handling. Power Sources remove primary and secondary power before working on the system! Disconnect battery backup power before working on the system! Proceed by disconnecting AC power to the panel at the main service circuit breaker (not the breaker on the fire control panel’s power supply). Wait 60 seconds to allow for capacitive discharge before touching any of the system’s compo- Reverse the procedure for powering up the system – AC first, then batteries. Circuit Pin Conversion proper orientation of any IC removed or installed! Note location of Pin 1 with respect to the flattened and dot on the body of the IC and the relationship to the flattened corner on the IC socket. The PROM must be installed in the same manner as the PROM removed. Failure to observe this will result in destruction of the PROM. Pin 1 Corner Pin 1 Corner Replacement proper orientation of any IC removed or installed! To replace the PROM, complete the following steps: Once all power has been removed, disconnect any option modules (if installed). Gently remove membrane keypad from circuit board, but do not disconnect cable from circuit (Note that the keypad’s four supports snap into the circuit board). Locate U8 (center of the board). Gently loosen and remove the PROM from U8. Install the replacement PROM in location U8. Observe proper orientation! The dot on the IC be positioned to the left and the flattened corner of the IC should align with the flattened of the socket. Use care to insure that the PROM’s pins are not bent or broken during Reconnect power supplies. (U8) and Testing and test the MS-5012 after PROM replacement. of 3 50194 Rev B ECN 95-133 3/16/95 Changes following Table summarizes the MS-5012 software changes, specifying these changes by Number and Release Number. # Release # Summary of Changes Release disabling of reports to either Central Station. runaway reporting of Phone 1 Communications Failure to Phone 2. to turn on Notification Appliances for 4 seconds on activation of each zone. (Subsequent activation of same zone turns Notification Appliances on 1 second). Slave Mode by having Zone 2 turn on the Trouble LED, trouble output trouble piezo and not turn on the Notification Appliance output 50194 Rev B ECN 95-133 3/16/95 of 3

MS-5012 Communicator Operation and Manual Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 #15465 #15465 #15465 #15465 #15465 Rev: Rev: Rev: Rev: Rev: 15465:F 97-227 1997 Fire Alarms, Inc. Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a bui

MS-5024/MS-5024E Software Change 50288 Rev B 12/16/96 ECN 96-496 Change procedure outlines the mechanical installation steps required to install a PROM in the MS-5024(E). precautions for integrated circuits electricity can destroy integrated circuits (ICs)! To prevent damage to the PROM, a wrist strap and a PLCC IC insertion/extraction tool is highly recommended. The manufacturer cannot be respon- for damage to the PROM as a result of improper handling. Power Sources remove primary and secondary power before working on the system! Disconnect battery backup power before working on the system! Proceed by disconnecting AC power to the panel at the main service circuit breaker (not circuit breaker on the fire control panel’s power supply). Wait 60 seconds to allow for capacitive discharge before touching any of the system’s Reverse the procedure for powering up the system – AC first, then batteries. Circuit Pin Conversion proper orientation of any IC removed or installed! Note location of Pin 1 with respect to the corner and dot on the body of the IC and the relationship to the flattened corner on the IC socket. replacement PROM must be installed in the same manner as the PROM removed. Failure to observe orientation will result in destruction of the PROM. Pin 1 Corner Pin 1 Corner Replacement proper orientation of any IC removed or installed! To replace the PROM, complete the following steps: Once all power has been removed, disconnect any option modules (if installed). Locate U23 (center right of the board). Gently loosen and remove the PROM from U23. Install the replacement PROM in location U23. Observe proper orientation! The dot on the IC be positioned to the left and the flattened corner of the IC should align with the flattened of the socket. Use care to insure that the PROM’s pins are not bent or broken during Reconnect power supplies. (U23) and Testing and test the MS-5024(E) after PROM replacement. of 3 50288 Rev B ECN 96-496 12/16/96 Software Changes following Table summarizes the MS-5024 software changes, specifying these changes by Number and Release Number. # # of Changes Release enhancements as follows: Entries ‘7’ through ‘F’ corresponding to times of 15 to 23 hours were added to AC Loss Delay entry in program mode. Eliminated Positive Alarm Sequence and Alarm Verification in Slave Mode only. Program mode was changed to correctly modify the transmission codes when Comm Format entry is altered. Software Changes following Table summarizes the MS-5024E software changes, specifying these changes by Number and Release Number. # # of Changes Release 50288 Rev B ECN 96-496 12/16/96 of 3

The MS-5024/MS-5024E Control Programming, Operation Maintenance Manual Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 Rev: D # 50066 # 50066 # 50066 # 50066 # 50066 50066:D ECN 97-173 1997 Fire Alarms, Inc. Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies from the unit. the instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. instructions must be followed to avoid damage to the control panel and equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon proper Alarm System Limitations installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance! automatic fire alarm system – typically made up of smoke detectors, heat manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control remote notification capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. a system, however, does not assure protection against property damage or of life resulting from a fire. fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons: detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a

MS-5024UD/MS-5024UDE Softw Softw Change Change Software Change Change Softw Softw Change 50125 Rev G 11/23/98 ECN 98-486 Change Change Change Change Change procedure outlines the mechanical installation steps required to install a PROM in the MS-5024UD/ circuits circuits integrrrrrated circuits integ integ precautions f precautions f circuits precautions for integ circuits integ precautions f precautions f electricity can destroy integrated circuits (ICs)! To prevent damage to the PROM, a wrist strap and a PLCC IC insertion/extraction tool is highly recommended. The manufacturer cannot be respon- for damage to the PROM as a result of improper handling. Sources Sources Pooooowwwwwer Sources P P Sources Sources P P remove primary and secondary power before working on the system! Disconnect battery backup power before working on the system! Proceed by disconnecting AC power to the panel at the main service circuit breaker (not circuit breaker on the fire control panel’s power supply). Wait 60 seconds to allow for capacitive discharge before touching any of the system’s Reverse the procedure for powering up the system – AC first, then batteries. Circuit Pin Con Circuit Pin Con Circuit Pin Con Circuit Pin Convvvvversionersionersionersionersion Circuit Pin Con proper orientation of any IC removed or installed! Note location of Pin 1 with respect to the corner and dot on the body of the IC and the relationship to the flattened corner on the IC socket. replacement PROM must be installed in the same manner as the PROM removed. Failure to observe orientation will result in destruction of the PROM. Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin 1 Cor Cor Cornernernernerner Cor Cor Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin 1 Pin 1 Cor Cor Cornernernernerner Cor Cor Replacement Replacement Replacement Replacement Replacement proper orientation of any IC removed or installed! To replace the PROM, complete the following steps: Remove all power (AC and battery) before proceeding with PROM replacement. If necessary, disconnect any installed option modules which may inhibit access to PROM. Locate U23 (center right of the board). Gently loosen and remove the PROM from U23. Install the replacement PROM in location U23. Observe proper orientation! The dot on the IC be positioned to the left and the flattened corner of the IC should align with the flattened of the socket. Use care to insure that the PROM’s pins are not bent or broken during Reconnect any option modules which were removed in Step 2. Reconnect power (AC and batteries). (U23) (U23) (U23) (U23) (U23) and TTTTTestingestingestingestingesting and and and and and test the MS-5024UD/MS-5024UDE after PROM replacement. of 3 50125 Rev G ECN 98-486 11/23/98 Softw Softw Changes Changes Software Changes Changes Softw Softw Changes following Table summarizes the MS-5024UD software changes, specifying these changes by Number and Release Number.

The MS-5024UD/MS-5024UDE Control Operation and Manual Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 # 15140 # 15140 # 15140 # 15140 # 15140 Rev: Rev: Rev: Rev: Rev: 15140:E ECN 97-173 1997 Fire Alarms, Inc. Precautions – Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability: – Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm panel. Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. Control unit and equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood. – System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure system operation, this product must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72- Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. testing is required after any change, addition or deletion of system or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to ensure that other are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be and proper system operation verified. system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0-49O C/32-120O F at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) at 30O C/86O F. the useful life of the system standby batteries and the electronic may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be in an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27O C/60-80O that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and indicating device loops. devices cannot tolerate more than a 10% I.R. drop from the specified device all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can damaged when subjected to lightning induced transients. Although no system is immune from lightning transients and interferences, proper grounding will susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to increased susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the Technical Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered. AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. to do so can damage circuits. all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching the enclosure. When possible, make all cable entries from the sides or rear. making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, and printed circuit board location. not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs. Over tightening may damage resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw removal. syst